Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2007  witii  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littp://www.arcliive.org/details/cantonmentmanualOOkilnricli 


THE    CANTONMENT 
MANUAL 


The 

Cantonment  Manual 


OR 


Fads  for  Every  Soldier 


Bu 

Lieut-Colonel  W.  G.  KILNER,  U.  S.  ARMY 

(west  point) 


Captain  A.  J.  MacELROY,  U.  S,  ARMY 

(CORNELL) 


42isi&>» 


D.    APPLETON    AND    COMPANY 

NEW    YORK  LONDON 

1918 


^//2 

K^ 


COPTRIOHT,  1917,  BT 

O.  APPLETON  AND  COMPANY 


Printed  m  the  United  States  of  America 


THIS    MANUAL    IS    DEDICATED    TO 

WOODROW    WILSON 

COMMANDER-IN-CHIEF   OF  THE   UNITED   STATES   ARMY 
INSPIRER    AND    LEADER    OF    WORLD    DEMOCRACY 


392184 


PRESIDENT  WILSON  TO  THE  NATIONAL  ARMY 


THE  WHITE   HOUSE, 
WASHINGTON. 

To  THE  Soldiers  of  the  National  Army: 

You  are  undertaking  a  great  duty.  The  heart  of  the 
whole  country  is  with  you. 

Everything  that  you  do  will  be  watched  with  the  deep- 
est interest  and  with  the  deepest  solicitude  not  only  by 
those  who  are  near  and  dear  to  you,  but  by  the  whole 
nation  besides. 

For  this  great  war  draws  us  all  together,  makes  us  all 
comrades  and  brothers,  as  all  true  Americans  felt  them- 
selves to  be  when  we  first  made  good  our  national  in- 
dependence. 

The  eyes  of  the  world  will  be  upon  you,  because  you 
are  in  some  special  sense  the  soldiers  of  freedom. 

Let  it  be  your  pride,  therefore,  to  show  all  men  every- 
where not  only  what  good  soldiers  you  are,  but  also  what 
good  men  you  are,  keeping  yourselves  fit  and  straight  in 
everything  and  pure  and  clean  through  and  through. 

Let  us  set  for  ourselves  a  standard  so  high  that  it  will 
be  a  glory  to  live  up  to  it,  and  then  let  us  live  up  to 
it  and  add  a  new  laurel  to  the  crown  of  America. 

My  affectionate  confidence  goes  with  you  in  every 
battle  and  every  test. 

God  keep  and  guide  you ! 

WooDROw  Wilson. 


FOREWORD 

First  impressions  are  lasting.  Nowhere  is  this  more- 
true  than  in  the  mihtary  service.  The  impressions  upon 
the  recruit,  be  they  good  or  bad,  made  during  the  first 
few  weeks,  stick  to  him  all  through  his  military  life. 

The  authors  of  this  manual  hope  that  they  have  made 
this  book  so  simple  and  clear  that  any  man  who  enters 
the  army  can,  by  mastering  its  contents,  lay  the  founda- 
tion for  a  successful  career  as  a  soldier.  They  also 
trust  that  such  facts  and  advice  have  been  included  as 
will  inspire  every  man  entering  the  service  to  become  a 
better  man  and  a  soldier  who,  by  his  words,  actions  and 
devotion  to  duty,  will  do  his  part  to  uphold  the  glorious 
reputation  of  the  Army  of  the  United  States. 

This  book  in  the  hands  of  the  pupils  at  schools  where 
military  drill  is  taught  should  prove  a  most  valuable  aid, 

W.  G.  K. 

A.  J.  M. 

Mineola,  N.  Y, 
Aug.  25,  1917, 


CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

I.    Characteristics   of   a   Good    Soldier i 

II.    Helpful  Hints  for  Recruits 4 

Simple  rules  for  cantonment  life 6 

When  on  a  march  or  hike 7 

Ten  "he's"  that  will  beat  the  Kaiser 8 

III,  Setting-up  Exercises    9 

Purpose  9 

Arm  exercises   9 

Leg   exercises    lo 

Body  exercises   lo 

IV.  Infantry  Drill   12 

Introduction    12 

General  rules  for  drills  and  formations 14 

Orders  and  commands 19 

Orders    20 

Commands     21 

School  of  the  soldier 22 

Position  of  the  soldier  at  attention 23 

The  rests   23 

Eyes  right  or  left 24 

Facings    24 

Salute  with  the  hand 25 

Steps  and  marchings 25 

Quick  time 26 

To   mark  time 27 

The  half  step 27 

Sidestep    27 

Back  step   27 

To  halt   28 

To  march  by  the  flank 28 

ix 


X  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  PAOB 

To  march  to  the  rear 28 

Change  step    28 

Manual  of  arms 29 

Rifle  salute   35 

The  bayonet 36 

The  inspection    37 

To  dismiss  the  squad 38 

V.    School  of  the  Squad 38 

To   form  the   squad 40 

Alignments    40 

To  take  intervals  and  distances 41 

To  stack  and  take  arms 44 

The  oblique  march 46 

To  turn  on  moving  pivot 46 

To  turn  on  fixed  pivot 48 

To  follow  the  corporal 50 

To  deploy  as  skirmishers 51 

To  increase  or  diminish  intervals 52 

The   assembly   52 

Kneeling  and  lying  down 52 

Loadings  and  firings 53 

To    load    54 

To  unload   56 

To  set  the  sight 56 

To   fire   by   volley 56 

To    fire    at    will , 57 

To  fire  by  clip 58 

To  suspend   firing 58 

To  cease   firing 58 

The  use  of  cover 59 

Observation    60 

VI.    School  of  the  Company 61 

Close  order,  rules , 65 

To  form  the  company 66 

To   dismiss   the  company 67 

Alignments    67 

Movements  on  the  fixed  pivot 68 

Movements  on  the  moving  pivot 73 


CONTENTS  xi 

CHAPTER  PAGE: 

Facing  or  marching  to  the  rear 74 

On  right   (left)   into  line y6 

Front  into  line 76 

At  ease  and  route  step 78 

To  diminish  the  front  of  a  column  of  squads  79 

Extended  order,  rules  for  deployment 81 

Deployments    82 

The  assembly  85 

The  advance   85 

The  fire  attack 90 

The  company  in   support 92 

The  company  acting  alone 93 

Fire    . . . . : 93 

Ranges    94 

Classes    of   firing 95 

The  target    95 

Fire  directions    96 

Fire  control    97 

Fire  discipline    98 


VII.    Inspections  and   Muster 100 

Company  inspection    lOO 

Company  muster   104 

VIII.    Honors   and   Salutes 106 

IX.    The  Color   100 

The   color   guard no 

To  receive  the  color 112 

Manual  of  the   color 112 


X.    Tent  Pitching  114 

Shelter  tents    114 

Single   sleeping  bag 116 

Double   sleeping  bag 116 

To  strike  shelter  tents 116 

To  pitch  tents 117 

Conical   wall  tents 118 


xii  CONTENTS 

CHAPTEE  PAGE 

To  Strike  common,  wall,  pyramidal,  and  con- 
ical  wall  tents ii8 

To   fold   tents 119 

Method  of  folding  pyramidal  tent 119 

XI.    Signals  and  Signaling 122 

Arm   signals    122 

Signals  and  codes 129 

The  more  important  conventional  flag  signals  130 

Two-arm  semaphore  code 131,  132 

XII.    Interior  Guard  Duty 133 

Sergeant  of  the  guard 133 

Corporal    of  the   guard 137 

Privates  of  the  guard 144 

Orders   for   sentinels 144 

Regulations    relating    to    the   general    orders 

for  sentinels    145 

Special  orders  for  sentinels  at  the  post  of  the 

guard    153 

Countersigns   and   paroles 155 

Guarding   prisoners    157 

Guard    mounting    158 

Formal  guard  mounting  for  infantry 158 

Informal  guard  mounting  for  infantry 164 

Relieving  the  old  guard 165 

XIII.    Target  Practice   169 

Preliminary  training  in  marksmanship 169 

Sight  adjustments   169 

Table  of  sight  corrections 171 

Aiming   172 

Battle  sight    I73 

Trigger  squeeze   I74 

Firing  positions    I75 

Calling  the  shot 177 

Coordination    178 

Advice  to  riflemen 178 

The  course  in  small-arms  firing 181 

Targets   181,  182,  183 


CONTENTS  xiii 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

XIV.    Care  of  Clothing,  Equipment  and  Rifle 184 

Clothing   184 

Shoes    185 

Cloth  equipment   186 

Mess  kit    186 

The   rifle    187 

The  parts  of  the  rifle 187,  188 

Pointers    189 


XV.    The  Soldier's  Health 190 

A  few  health  hints 192 

Venereal  diseases   192 

XVI.     Sanitation  and  Cleanliness  in  Camp 193 


XVII.    Articles   of   War I94 

Certain  articles  to  be  read  and  explained  to 

enlisted  men  I94 

Desertion:  absence  without  leave 198 

Disrespect:   Insubordination;   mutiny 199 

Arrest :  confinement   200 

War  ofl^enses    203 

Miscellaneous  crimes  and  offenses 205 

Miscellaneous  provisions    210 

XVIII.     Court-Martial  and  Punishment 214 

Maximum  and  minimum  punishments 215 

XIX.    First-Aid  Suggestions   216 

Wounds  and  cuts 216 

Broken  bone    218 

Fainting  or  exhaustion 219 

Sunstroke    219 

Freezing  and  frostbite 220 

Schaefer  method  of  restoring  the  apparently- 
drowned    220 

Hints  for  treating  wounds 223 


xiv  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

XX.    Easy  Road  to  French 225 

Pronunciation    225 

Articles — definite  and  indefinite 226 

Pronouns    227 

Plurals    228 

Questions    228 

Adjectives  229 

Adverbs    229 

Disjunctive  personal  pronouns 229 

Learn  these  by  heart 230 

Common   phrases    232 

Requests,   etc 233 

Food,  drink,  smoke 234 

Correspondence,  telegraph,  etc 235 

Dress  and  toilet  235 

Utensils   236 

Directions   and   places 237 

On  the  road — sur  la  route 238 

English-French  vocabulary 241 

Common  words  241 

Numerals    243 

Currency,  measures,   weights 245 

Days,   months,   seasons 246 

Familiar  phrases  247 

Military  titles,  ranks,  and  grades 249 

Military  terms    250 

Uniform,  arms,  clothing,  and  equipment. . . .  252 

Questions  about  the  road 254 

Towns    256 

Railroads   257 

Rations  and   food 258 

Hospitals    259 

Points  of  the  compass 260 

Trench  warfare   260 

Words  of  command — 

Commandements  262 

Summons  to  surrender  (in  German) 263 

Conjugation    263 

Regular  verbs   263 

Auxiliary  verbs   265 


CONTENTS  XV 

CHAPTEP  PAGE 

Compound  tenses  266 

Formations  of  tenses 268 

Important  irregular  verbs 268 

Appendix    274 

Definitions    274 

Slang  in  the  army 276 

Form  of  a  military  letter 277 

Form  for  last  will  and  testament 278 

Infantry  division   (make-up  under  war  conditions)  . .  280 

Military  badges  or  service  ribbons 281 

Military  mail  282 

Cantonments  and  mobilization  camps 283 

National  guard  camps  284 

National   army  cantonments 285 

Army  insignia  286 

Hat  cords  289 

Bugle  calls  291 


THE    CANTONMENT 
MANUAL 

CHAPTER   I 
CHARACTERISTICS   OF  A   GOOD   SOLDIER 

Making  good  as  a  soldier  is  not  unlike  making  good 
in  civil  life.  The  main  characteristics  you  must  possess 
to  become  a  good  soldier  are:  obedience,  courage,  de- 
termination, initiative,  alertness,  cleanliness,  cheerfulness, 
comradeship,  courtesy,  ambition,  team  work,  and  loyalty. 

Obedience  means  to  obey  at  once  all  orders  of  your 
commissioned  and  noncommissioned  officers.  Do  what 
you  are  told  promptly  and  cheerfully  and  you  will  avoid 
getting  into  trouble.  Remember  that  a  good  soldier  will 
obey  first  and  then  if  he  feels  himself  aggrieved  he  will 
afterward  complain  to  the  proper  authority. 

Courage  means  not  only  to  face  danger  without  flinch- 
ing when  performing  your  duty  but  to  be  willing  to  right 
any  wrong  that  you  have  intentionally  or  otherwise  done 
to  another.  Bear  in  mind  that  courage  is  most  infectious. 
A  brave  soldier  has  often  turned  defeat  into  victory  by 
an  act  of  bravery  that  has  infected  his  comrades.  If  you 
know  what  to  do  in  an  emergency  so  that  you  will  not 
be  surprised  you  will  have  done  much  to  put  the  thought 
of  danger  out  of  your  mind.  Self-confidence  in  a  soldier 
is  the  one  thing  that  will  eliminate  fear  and  keep  his 
courage  at  its  height. 

Determination  and  bulldog  stick-to-it-iveness  to  win  at 
all  hazards  are  the  greatest  contributing  factors  to  suc- 
3  I 


2  THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

cess  in  battle.  While  in  training  do  all  in  your  power  to 
develop  and  strengthen  your  determination.  Keep  ever- 
lastingly at  the  most  difficult  tasks  and  never  give  up 
until  you  have  mastered  them. 

Initiative  is  using  your  common  sense  as  to  what  to  do 
when  no  specific  order  is  given.  In  the  U.  S.  Army 
every  man  from  the  newest  recruit  to  the  most  seasoned 
general  is  expected  to  use  his  head.  It  is  better  to  make 
a  mistake  than  to  remain  inactive  in  any  emergency. 
Action  counts.  Do  something  even  if  it  is  wrong  rather 
than  "lay  down." 

Alertness.  A  good  soldier  may  be  pardoned  for  failure 
but  never  for  being  surprised.  You  should  always  be 
on  your  guard.  Should  the  unexpected  happen  use  your 
head  and  by  always  being  on  the  alert  you  will  never 
be  taken  entirely  by  surprise. 

Cleanliness.  Self-respect  demands  that  every  soldier 
keep  his  person  and  clothing  clean.  Your  health  and 
therefore  your  efficiency  depend  upon  your  keeping  your- 
self clean.  A  clean,  neat  soldier  ninety-nine  times  out 
of  a  hundred  is  a  good  soldier. 

Cheerfulness.  Nothing  contributes  to  the  success  of 
a  m^n  in  the  military  game  so  much  as  a  cheerful  disposi- 
tion. Upon  this  depends  courage  and  practically  all  the 
attributes  of  an  efficient  soldier.  It's  a  mighty  contagious 
thing  and  makes  life  worth  while. 

"It's  easy  enough  to  be  pleasant  when  life  goes  along 
like  a  song, 
But  the  man  worth  while  is  the  man  with  a  smile  when 
everything  goes  dead  wrong." 

Comradeship.  What  a  world  of  meaning  in  the  word 
comrade !  A  comrade  is  far  more  than  a  friend.  Com- 
rade in  arms  means  that  men  are  willing,  if  need  be,  to  die 


CHARACTERISTICS  OF  A  GOOD  SOLDIER   3 

fighting  shoulder  to  shoulder  and  to  live  arm  in  arm. 
Let  every  man  in  the  squad,  let  every  man  in  the  com- 
pany be  a  comrade  to  every  other  man  in  that  group. 
Little  differences  will  arise,  but  men  of  the  good  old  U.  S. 
Army  are  made  of  that  stuff  which  fights  through  thick 
and  thin  for  their  glorious  country  and  as  comrades  glad 
to  lay  down  their  lives  for  each  other.  Therefore  let 
the  spirit  of  comradeship  be  ever  present  in  your  midst. 

Courtesy,  Military  courtesy  is  one  of  the  most  beauti- 
ful and  essential  features  of  the  life  of  a  soldier.  As  in 
civil  life  courtesy  is  the  mark  of  a  well  bred  man,  so 
in  military  life  military  courtesy  is  the  sure  sign  of  a 
well  disciplined  and  efficient  soldier.  In  the  Army  Regu- 
lations we  read:  "Courtesy  among  military  men  is  in- 
dispensable to  discipline;  respect  to  superiors  will  not  be 
confined  to  obedience  on  duty,  but  will  be  extended  on 
all  occasions." 

Ambition  is  a  desire  and  a  will  to  succeed  in  any  under- 
taking. The  young  soldier  should  be  ambitious  to  do 
his  duty  so  well  that  he  will  merit  promotion. 

Team  work  means  that  each  man  in  the  squad,  platoon 
or  company  contributes  all  in  his  power  to  make  for 
the  success  of  the  whole  unit.  Success  in  battle  depends 
on  team  work  just  as  much  as  success  in  a  football  game 
depends  upon  the  cooperation  and  pull-together  spirit  of 
the  football  team.  You  might  perform  a  brilliant,  brave 
deed  and  yet  this  might  contribute  to  defeat  because  your 
special  part  in  the  team  work  of  the  company  was  neg- 
lected. 

Loyalty  means  that  you  must  stand  by  your  com- 
pany through  thick  and  thin.  Boost  your  organization 
at  every  opportunity.  Be  loyal  and  true  to  your  officers, 
your  noncommissioned  officers  and  your  comrades.  In 
this  way  you  will  be  loyal  to  yourself  and  your  country. 


CHAPTER   II 
HELPFUL   HINTS   FOR  RECRUITS 

1.  An  officer  wears  a  gold  and  black  hat  cord  and  has 
a  brown  braid  on  the  sleeve  of  his  blouse. 

2.  Salute  all  officers  whom  you  meet. 

3.  If  seated  and  an  officer  approaches  arise,  stand  at 
attention,  and  salute  when  he  gets  within  saluting  dis- 
tance, which  is  about  six  paces. 

4.  If  an  officer  enters  the  mess  hall  the  men  stop  eat- 
ing until  he  leaves. 

5.  If  you  are  working  you  do  not  salute  unless  the 
officer  speaks  to  you. 

6.  Foreign  officers  should  be  saluted  the  same  as  your 
own  officers. 

7.  Before  addressing  an  officer  always  salute  and  salute 
before  leaving  him. 

8.  When  walking  with  an  officer  keep  on  his  left  and 
one  pace  to  his  rear. 

9.  When  you  are  with  an  officer  and  he  salutes  an- 
other person  you  do  not  salute. 

10.  When  an  officer  enters  a  room  or  a  tent  where  there 
are  several  soldiers  the  first  to  perceive  him  calls  out  "At- 
tention"; the  men  all  stand  at  attention  while  the  officer 
is  in  the  room  or  tent  or  until  he  directs  otherwise. 

11.  When  the  "Star  Spangled  Banner"  is  played  stand 
at  attention,  face  the  music  and  come  to  the  salute  at  the 
first  note  and  drop  the  hand  at  the  last  note.  When  To  the 
Colors  is  sounded  face  the  flag,  come  to  the  salute  at 
the  first  note  and  drop  the  hand  at  the  last  note. 

4 


HELPFUL    HINTS    FOR    RECRUITS        5 

12.  Prisoners  do  not  salute  but  stand  at  attention  when 
being  addressed  by  an  officer. 

13.  Always  hold  the  hand  at  the  salute  until  the  salute 
is  returned  by  the  officer. 

14.  Before  speaking  to  any  of  your  company  officers 
always  secure  the  permission  of  the  first  sergeant  unless 
one  of  the  officers  speaks  to  you. 

15.  In  addressing  an  officer  the  form  should  be  "The 
njajor  is  wanted  on  the  phone."  "Did  the  captain  call 
Private  Jones?"  "Private  Smith  reports  to  the  lieuten- 
ant." When  given  an  order  by  an  officer  you  should  say, 
"Yes,  sir." 

16.  When  entering  the  office  or  tent  of  an  officer  you 
should  knock  once,  even  though  the  door  be  open.  When 
requested,  enter  the  room  and  stand  near  the  door  until 
you  are  spoken  to.  Then  advance,  salute  and  tell  your 
business.  After  you  have  finished  your  business,  salute, 
make  a  proper  about-face  and  depart. 

17.  Always  take  off  your  hat  upon  entering  a  room  or 
tent  where  officers  are  present. 

18.  Never  wear  sleeve  holders.  Always  have  leggins 
and  breeches  properly  laced. 

19.  Keep  your  uniform  clean  and  your  shoes  polished. 

20.  Don't  let  yourself  become  careless.  Always  bathe 
frequently  and  keep  clean. 

21.  Always  have  your  mail  addressed  care  of  Com- 
pany and  Regiment,  as:  "Pvt.  William  Baylis,  Co.  A, 
119th  Regiment." 

22.  The  custom  of  the  service  is  that  an  experienced 
soldier  will  explain  things  to  a  new  man.  Therefore, 
don't  get  embarrassed  but  ask  questions  freely  about  your 
new  duties  and  surroundings. 

23.  As  soon  as  you  are  assigned  to  a  Company,  report 
to  the  first  sergeant  of  that  Company. 


6  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

24.  You  are  responsible  for  all  property  given  to  you. 

25.  If  you  lose  a  blanket,  or  anything  else,  the  cost 
will  be  taken  out  of  your  monthly  pay. 

26.  Never  wear  any  civilian  clothes  with  any  part  of 
your  uniform. 

Simple  Rules  for  Cantonment  Life 

1.  Jump  out  of  your  bunk  at  the  first  note  of  first  call 
and  dress  quickly. 

2.  Get  out  as  soon  as  dressed  and  not  later  than  at  the 
first  note  of  assembly  for  reveille. 

3.  Be  ready  to  step  into  your  place  in  ranks  as  soon 
as  the  first  sergeant  commands  "Fall  in,"  and  stand  at 
"Attention"  until  directed  to  do  otherwise. 

4.  After  reveille  make  up  your  bunk  and  have  every- 
thing arranged  as  prescribed  by  your  company  com- 
mander. 

5.  Wash  before  every  meal. 

6.  Go  to  the  toilet  or  latrine  right  after  breakfast. 

7.  Prepare  your  equipment  needed  for  drill. 

8.  If  you  are  sick  and  need  medical  attention,  give  your 
name  to  the  first  sergeant  at  reveille. 

9.  As  soon  as  first  call  for  drill  sounds  put  on  your 
equipment  and  go  to  your  place  in  ranks. 

10.  After  drill,  clean  your  rifle. 

11.  After  noon  mess  there  is  usually  a  little  time  for 
rest.    Lie  down  and  be  quiet,  if  but  for  a  short  time. 

12.  After  the  drill  in  the  afternoon  there  is  usually  a 
short  time  before  evening  parade  or  ceremony  of  retreat. 
This  is  a  good  time  to  bathe,  shave,  change  your  uniform, 
shine  your  shoes,  etc.  Strive  to  be  the  neatest  man  in 
your  company. 

13.  Evening  mess  follows  retreat. 


HELPFUL    HINTS    FOR    RECRUITS        7 

14.  After  supper  you  will  have  plenty  of  time  to  write 
letters  and  read.  In  the  Y.  M.  C.  A.  and  Knights  of 
Columbus  rooms  you  will  find  writing  paper  and  reading 
matter. 

15.  Don't  forget  to  read  your  Bible. 

16.  Write  home  at  least  once  a  week. 

17.  Be  in  your  bunk  when  taps  sounds.  If  you  are 
not  sleepy  keep  quiet  out  of  consideration  for  your  fel- 
lows. 

18.  Look  at  the  company  bulletin  board  frequently. 
Here  you  will  find: 

The  Hst  of  calls. 

Details  for  guard,  etc. 

Special  orders  and  instructions. 

19.  Rumors  are  always  afloat  wherever  there  are  sol- 
diers. Don't  act  on  rumors.  Your  orders  will  be  given 
to  you  by  your  company  officers  and  noncommissioned 
officers.  The  company  bulletin  board  will  furnish  you 
with  all  other  details  and  information  about  your  duties. 

20.  Don't  pattern  your  conduct  a'fter  the  braggart  and 
bully.  In  military  as  in  civil  life,  it  is  the  quiet,  orderly 
and  industrious  fellow  who  gets  ahead. 

21.  Keep  your  temper  and  "do  unto  others  as  ye  would 
that  they  should  do  unto  you." 

When  on  a  March  or  Hike  ' 

1.  Don't  smoke. 

2.  Don't  drink  frequently  from  your  canteen.  Merely 
rinse  your  mouth  and  spit  the  water  out  until  the  hike  is 
finished. 

3.  Loosen  and  adjust  your  equipment  at  every  halt. 

4.  Don't  leave  the  ranks  without  permission. 

5.  Relieve  yourself  at  the  first  halt. 


8  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

6.  Lie  down  and  relax  at  every  halt. 

7.  Keep  in  your  place  forty  inches  behind  the  man 
in  front  of  you. 

8.  When  on  "route  step,"  join  your  comrades  in  sing- 
ing and  whistling.  Do  your  part  in  helping  to  make 
everybody  happy. 

9.  "Fall  in"  at  once  when  the  signal  is  given  after  a 
halt. 

10.  Don't  make  remarks  about  people  you  pass  on  the 
road. 

Ten  "Be's"  That  Will  Beat  The  Enemy 

1.  Be  clean. 

2.  Be  properly  clothed. 

3.  Be  sure  to  eat  nourishing  food. 

4.  Be  sure  to  sleep  with  lots  of  fresh  air. 

5.  Be  sure  to  get  plenty  of  exercise  daily. 

6.  Be  sure  to  sleep  eight  hours  every  night,  if  possible. 

7.  Be  sure  to  defecate  daily. 

8.  Be  ever  busy,  either  with  work  or  fun. 

9.  Be  happy  and  look  on  the  bright  side  of  life. 

10.  Be  ready  with  a  smile  to  tackle  any  task  set  for  you. 


CHAPTER   III 

SETTING-UP    EXERCISES 

Purpose 

As  the  name  indicates,  these  exercises  are  for  the 
purpose  of  giving  the  soldier  the  proper  bearing  or  to 
"set  him  up."  To  this  may  be  added  that  nothing  so  con- 
duces to  good  health  as  judiciously  and  regularly  going 
through  these  exercises.  A  few  of  the  best  and  sim- 
plest exercises  are  here  given  so  that  the  young  soldier 
may  daily  take  these  .exercises  by  himsel'f  if  necessary. 
Go  through  these  as  soon  as  you  get  up  and  just  before 
going  to  bed  and  you  v^ill  be  surprised  at  the  improve- 
ment in  your  bodily  vigor  and  health. 

Arm  Exercises 

I.  Extend  arms  to  side,  (a)  Open  and  close  fists 
as  rapidly  as  possible,  (b)  With  arms  extended,  move 
arms  up  and  down  about  ten  inches  as  rapidly  as  pos- 
sible. 

II.  Extend  arms  to  front,  overhead,  bend  forward, 
knees  stiff,  until  fingers  touch  toes,  arms  to  front.  Re- 
peat by  numbers  (i)    (2)    (3). 

III.  Extend  arms  to  side,  (a)  Swing  arms,  crossing 
each  other  in  front  of  body,  keeping  arms  stiff,  making 
a  complete  circle  at  each  count.  Repeat  by  numbers  (i) 
(2)  (3)  (4).  (b)  Swing  arms  backward,  arms  ex- 
tended,   describing    small    circles.      The    same,    swinging 


lo  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

arms  forward,  (c)  With  body  as  a  pivot,  swing  left 
arm  down  to  side,  right  arm  overhead,  and  the  reverse, 
keeping  the  arms  stiff  and  bending  the  body  to  side  from 
the  waist,  (d)  Clench  fists  and  bend  the  right  arm  until 
fist  touches  shoulder,  then  extend  right  arm  and  bend 
left  until   fist  touches  shoulder.     Repeat  on  two  counts 

(I)     (2). 

Leg  Exercises 

IV.  Hands  on  hips,  fingers  to  the  front,  (a)  Bend 
knees  until  hips  touch  heels.  Up  to  standing  position. 
Repeat  by  numbers  (i)  (2).  (b)  Bend  left  leg  at  knee 
until  lower  left  leg  is  horizontal.  In  this  position,  bend 
right  leg  until  left  knee  reaches  point  three  inches  above 
ground.  On  two  counts.  Same  with  right  leg  on  two 
counts. 

V.  Hop  to  side  straddle  position.  Extend  the  arms 
overhead,  at  the  same  time  throwing  the  feet  apart. 
Bring  the  arms  to  the  sides  and  at  the  same  time  bring 
feet  together.  Repeat  by  numbers  (i)  (2).  (This  is 
one  of  the  most  popular  army  exercises.) 

VI.  Hands  on  hips  as  in  IV.  Alternately  raise  the  left 
and  the  right  leg  until  the  knee  is  nearly  as  high  as  the 
shoulder.     Repeat  by  numbers  (i)    (2)    (3)    (4). 

Body  Exercises 

VII.  Hands  on  hips  as  in  IV.  (a)  Bend  body  for- 
ward and  then  backward  (i)  (2).  (b)  Bend  to  the 
left  and  then  to  the  right  (i)  (2).  (c)  Hop  to  side 
straddle  position,  circle,  using  the  hips  as  a  pivot,  first 
to  the  left  and  then  to  the  right.     Repeat  by  numbers 

(O     (2)- 


SETTING-UP    EXERCISES  ii 

VIII.  Lie  flat  on  the  back  with  hands  under  the  head. 
Raise  the  legs,  using  the  hips  as  a  pivot,  very  slowly, 
keeping  the  knees  stiff,  until  the  feet  are  over  the  hips, 
then  very  slowly  back  to  the  ground.     Repeat.. 

IX.  Bend  knees,  palms  of  hands  on  ground  between 
feet,  carry  feet  backward  until  the  body  rests  on  toes 
and  hands,  body  straight.  Bend  arms  downward  until 
body  nearly  touches  ground,  always  keeping  the  back 
stiff,  not  arched.  Repeat.  To  come  to  attention  bring 
feet  up  to  hands  and  then  spring  up  to  attention. 

X.  Cock  Fight. — With  arms  folded  and  one  foot  raised 
from  the  ground,  two  men  try  by  bumping  each  other 
to  cause  the  other  to  put  both  feet  on  the  ground,  which 
counts  a  point  for  the  opponent.  This  exercise  can  be 
worked  into  a  good  healthy  competition  in  a  squad  or 
company. 

Note. — If  these  exercises  are  used  by  an  instructor 
he  should  explain  and  illustrate  the  various  exercises. 
From  the  position  of  attention  they  should  be  given  by 
numbers. 


CHAPTER   IV 1 

INFANTRY    DRILL 

Introduction 

1.  Success  in  battle  is  the  ultimate  object  o'f  all  mili- 
tary training;  success  may  be  looked  for  only  when  the 
training  is  intelligent  and  thorough. 

2.  Commanding  officers  are  accountable  for  the  proper 
training  of  their  respective  organizations  within  the  lim- 
its prescribed  by  regulations  and  orders. 

The  excellence  of  an  organization  is  judged  by  its 
field  efficiency.  The  field  efficiency  of  an  organization 
depends  primarily  upon  its  effectiveness  as  a  whole. 
Thoroughness  and  uniformity  in  the  training  of  the  units 
of  an  organization  are  indispensable  to  the  efficiency  of 
the  whole;  it  is  by  such  means  alone  that  the  requisite 
team  work  may  be  developed. 

3.  Simple  movements  and  elastic  'formations  are  essen- 
tial to  correct  training  for  battle. 

4.  The  Drill  Regulations  are  furnished  as  a  guide. 
They  provide  the  principles  for  training  and  for  increas- 
ing the  probability  of  success  in  battle. 

In  the  interpretation  of  the  regulations,  the  spirit  must 
be  sought.  Quibbling  over  the  minutiae  of  form  is  indica- 
tive of  failure  to  grasp  the  spirit. 


1  This  chapter  on  Infantry  Drill  is  taken  from  the  In- 
fantry Drill  Regulations  U.  S.  Army,  to  which  the  authors 
have  added  certain  explanations  and  drawings. 

12 


INFANTRY    DRILL  13 

5.  The  principles  of  combat  are  considered  in  Part  II 
of  these  regulations.  They  are  treated  in  the  various 
schools  included  in  Part  I  only  to  the  extent  necessary 
to  indicate  the  functions  of  the  various  commanders  and 
the  division  of  responsibility  between  them.  The  am- 
plification necessary  to  a  proper  understanding  of  their 
application  is  to  be  sought  in  Part  II. 

6.  The  following  important  distinctions  must  be  ob- 
served : 

(a)  Drills  executed  at  attention  and  the  ceremonies  are 
disciplinary  exercises  designed  to  teach  precise  and  sol- 
dierly movement,  and  to  inculcate  that  prompt  and  sub- 
conscious obedience  which  is  essential  to  proper  military 
control.  To  this  end,  smartness  and  precision  should 
be  exacted  in  the  execution  of  every  detail.  Such  drills 
should  be  frequent,  but  short. 

(b)  The  purpose  of  extended  order  drill  is  to  teach 
the  mechanism  of  deployment,  of  the  firings,  and,  in 
general,  of  the  employment  of  troops  in  combat.  Such 
drills  are  in  the  nature  of  disciplinary  exercises  and 
should  be  'frequent,  thorough,  and  exact  in  order  to  habit- 
uate men  to  the  firm  control  of  their  leaders.  Extended 
order  drill  is  executed  at  ease.  The  company  is  the  larg- 
est unit  which  executes  extended  order  drill. 

{c)  Field  exercises  are  for  instruction  in  the  duties 
incident  to  campaign.  Assumed  situations  are  employed. 
Each  exercise  should  conclude  with  a  discussion,  on  the 
ground,  of  the  exercise  and  principles  involved. 

{d)  The  combat  exercise,  a  form  of  field  exercise  of 
the  company,  battalion,  and  larger  units,  consists  of  the 
application  of  tactical  principles  to  assumed  situations, 
employing  in  the  execution  the  appropriate  formations 
and   movements   o'f   close   and   extended   order. 

Combat  exercises  must  simulate,  as  far  as  possible,  the 


14  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

battle  conditions  assumed.  In  order  to  familiarize  both 
officers  and  men  with  such  conditions,  companies  and 
battalions  will  frequently  be  consolidated  to  provide  war- 
strength  organizations.  Officers  and  noncommissioned 
officers  not  required  to  complete  the  full  quota  of  the 
units  participating  are  assigned  as  observers  or  um- 
pires. 

The  firing  line  can  rarely  be  controlled  by  the  voice 
alone;  thorough  training  to  insure  the  proper  use  of 
prescribed  signals  is  necessary. 

The  exercise  should  be  followed  by  a  brief  drill  at 
attention  in  order  to  restore  smartness  and  control. 

7.  In  field  exercises  the  enemy  is  said  to  be  imaginary 
when  his  position  and  force  are  merely  assumed;  out^ 
lined  when  his  position  and  'force  are  indicated  by  a 
few  men;  represented  when  a  body  of  troops  acts  as 
such. 

General  Rules  for  Drills  and  Formations 

8.  When  the  preparatory  command  consists  of  more 
than  one  part,  its  elements  are  arranged  as  follows : 

(i)  For  movements  to  be  executed  successively  by  the 
subdivisions  or  elements  of  an  organization:  (o)  Descrip- 
tion of  the  movement;  (&)  how  executed,  or  on  what  ele- 
ment executed. 

(2)  For  movements  to  be  executed  simultaneously  by 
the  subdivisions  of  an  organization:  (a)  The  designa- 
tion of  the  subdivisions;  (b)  the  movement  to  be  exe- 
cuted. 

9.  Movements  that  may  be  executed  toward  either  flank 
arc  explained  as  toward  but  one  flank,  it  being  necessary 
to  substitute  the  word  "left"  for  "right,"  and  the  reverse, 
to  have  the  explanation  of  the  corresponding  movement 


INFANTRY   DRILL  15 

toward  the  other  flank.  The  commands  are  given  for 
the  execution  of  the  movements  toward  either  flank.  The 
substitute  word  of  the  command  is  placed  within  paren- 
theses. 

10.  Any  movement  may  be  executed  either  from  the 
halt  or  when  marching,  unless  otherwise  prescribed.  If 
at  a  halt,  the  command  for  movements  involving  march- 
ing need  not  be  prefaced  by  forward,  as  i.  Column  right 
(left),  2.  MARCH. 

11.  Any  movement  not  specially  excepted  may  be  ex- 
ecuted in  double  time. 

If  at  a  halt,  or  if  marching  in  quick  time,  the  command 
double  time  precedes  the  command  of  execution. 

12.  In  successive  movements  executed  in  double  time 
the  leading  or  base  unit  marches  in  qtdck  time  when  not 
otherwise  prescribed;  the  other  units  march  in  double 
time  to  their  places  in  the  formation  ordered  and  then 
conform  to  the  gait  of  the  leading  or  base  unit.  If 
marching  in  double  time,  the  command  double  time  is 
omitted.  The  leading  or  base  unit  marches  in  quick 
time;  the  other  units  continue  at  double  time  to  their 
places  in  the  formation  ordered  and  then  conform  to  the 
gait  o'f  the  leading  or  base  unit. 

13.  To  hasten  the  execution  of  a  movement  begun  in 
quick  time,  the  command:  i.  Double  time,  2.  MARCH,  is 
given.  The  leading  or  base  unit  continues  to  march  in 
quick  time,  or  remains  at  halt  if  already  halted;  the  other 
units  complete  the  execution  of  the  movement  in  double 
time  and  then  conform  to  the  gait  of  the  leading  or  base 
unit. 

14.  To  stay  the  execution  of  a  movement  when  march- 
ing, for  the  correction  of  errors,  the  command:  i.  In 
place,  2.  HALT,  is  given.  All  halt  and  stand  fast,  with- 
out changing  the  position  o'f  the  pieces.    To  resume  the 


i6  THE    CANTONxMENT    MANUAL 

movement,  the    command:    i.  Resume,    2.    MARCH,    is 
given. 

15.  To  revoke  a  preparatory  command,  or,  being  at  a 
halt,  to  begin  anew  a  movement  improperly  begun,  the 
command,  AS  YOU  WERE,  is  given,  at  which  the 
movement  ceases  and  the  former  position  is  resumed. 

16.  Unless  otherwise  announced,  the  guide  of  a  com- 
pany or  subdivision  of  a  company  in  line  is  right;  of  a 
battalion  in  line  or  line  of  subdivisions  or  of  a  deployed 
line,  center;  of  a  rank  in  column  of  squads,  toward  the 
side  of  the  guide  of  the  company. 

To  march  with  guide  other  than  as  prescribed  above,  or 
to  change  the  guide:  Guide  {right,  left,  or  center). 

In  successive  formations  into  line,  the  guide  is  toward 
the  point  of  rest;  in  platoons  or  larger  subdivisions  it  is 
so   announced. 

The  announcement  of  the  guide,  when  given  in  con- 
nection with  a  movement,  follows  the  command  of  ex- 
ecution for  that  movement.  Exception :  i.  As  skirmishers, 
guide  right   {left  or  center),  2.  MARCH. 

ly.  The  turn  on  the  fixed  pivot  by  subdivisions  is  used 
in  all  formations  'from  line  into  column  and  the  reverse. 

The  turn  on  the  moving  pivot  is  used  by  subdivisions 
of  a  column  in  executing  changes  of  direction. 

18.  Partial  changes  of  direction  may  be  executed: 
By  interpolating  in  the  preparatory  command  the  word 

half,  as  Column  half  right   {left),  or  Right   {left)   half 
turn.     A  change  of  direction  of  45**  is  executed. 

By  the  command:  GIVE  WAY  TO  THE  RIGHT 
{LEFT),  The  guide,  or  guiding  element,  moves  in  the 
indicated  direction  and  the  remainder  of  the  command 
conforms.  This  movement  effects  slight  changes  of  direc- 
tions. 

19.  The   designations,   line   of  platoons,  line   of   com- 


INFANTRY   DRILL  17 

panies,  line  of  battalions,  etc.,  refer  to  the  formations 
in  which  the  platoons,  companies,  battaHons,  etc.,  each 
in  column  of  squads,  are  in  line. 

20.  Full  distance  in  column  of  subdivisions  is  such 
that  in  forming  line  to  the  right  or  left  the  subdvisions 
will  have  their  proper  intervals. 

In  column  of  subdivisions  the  guide  o'f  the  leading  sub- 
division is  charged  with  the  step  and  direction;  the 
guides  in  rear  preserve  the  trace,   step,  and  distance. 

21.  In  close  order,  all  details,  detachments,  and  other 
bodies  of  troops  are  habitually  formed  in  double  rank. 

To  insure  uniformity  of  interval  between  files  when 
falling  in,  and  in  alignments,  each  man  places  the  palm 
of  the  left  hand  upon  the  hip,  fingers  pointing  down- 
ward. In  the  first  case  the  hand  is  dropped  by  the 
side  when  the  next  man  on  the  left  has  his  interval;  in 
the  second  case,  at  the  command,  front. 

22.  The  posts  of  officers,  noncommissioned  officers,  spe- 
cial units  (such  as  band  or  machine-gun  company),  etc., 
in  the  various  formations  of  the  company,  battalion,  or 
regiment,  are  shown  in  plates. 

In  all  changes  from  one  formation  to  another  involv- 
ing a  change  of  post  on  the  part  of  any  o'f  these,  posts 
are  promptly  taken  by  the  most  convenient  route  as 
soon  as  practicable  after  the  command  of  execution  for 
the  movement;  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  who 
have  prescribed  duties  in  connection  with  the  movement 
ordered,  take  their  new  posts  when  such  duties  are  com- 
pleted. 

As  instructors,  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  go 
wherever  their  presence  is  necessary.  As  file  closers  it 
is  their  duty  to  recti'fy  mistakes  and  insure  steadiness 
and  promptness  in  the  ranks. 

23.  Except   at  ceremonies,   the  special  units  have  no 

3 


i8  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

fixed  places.  They  take  places  as  directed ;  in  the  absence 
of  directions,  they  conform  as  nearly  as  practicable  to  the 
plates,  and  in  subsequent  movements  maintain  their  rela- 
tive positions  with  respect  to  the  flank  or  end  of  the 
command   on   which   they   were   originally   posted. 

24.  General,  field,  and  staff  officers  are  habitually 
mounted.  The  staff  of  an  officer  forms  in  single  rank  3 
paces  in  rear  of  him,  the  right  of  the  rank  extending  i 
pace  to  the  right  of  a  point  directly  in  rear  o'f  him.  Mem- 
bers of  the  staff  are  arranged  in  order  from  right  to  left 
as  follows:  General  staff  officers,  adjutant,  aids,  other 
5taff  officers,  arranged  in  each  classification  in  order  of 
rank,  the  senior  on  the  right.  The  flag  of  the  general 
officer  and  the  orderlies  are  3  paces  in  rear  of  the  staff, 
the  flag  on  the  right.  When  necessary  to  reduce'  the 
front  of  the  staff  and  orderlies,  each  line  executes  twos 
right  or  fours  right,  as  explained  in  the  Cavalry  Drill 
Regulations,   and  follows  the  commander. 

When  not  otherwise  prescribed,  staff  officers  draw  and 
return  saber  with  their  chief. 

25.  In  making  the  about,  an  officer,  mounted,  habit- 
ually turns  to  the  left. 

When  the  commander  faces  to  give  commands,  the 
staff,  flag,  and  orderlies  do  not  change  position. 

26.  When  making  or  receiving  official  reports,  or  on 
meeting  out  of  doors,  all  officers  will  salute. 

Military  courtesy  requires  the  junior  to  salute  first, 
tut  when  the  salute  is  introductory  to  a  report  made 
at  a  military  ceremony  or  formation,  to  the  represen- 
tative of  a  common  superior  (as,  'for  example,  to  the 
adjutant,  officer  of  the  day,  etc.),  the  officer  making 
the  report,  whatever  his  rank,  will  salute  first;  the  officer 
to  whom  the  report  is  made  will  acknowledge  by  salut- 
ing that  he  has  received  and   understood  the  report. 


INFANTRY   DRILL  19 

27.  For  ceremonies,  all  mounted  enlisted  men  of  a 
regiment  or  smaller  unit,  exce;pt  those  belonging  to  the 
machine-gun  organizations,  are  consolidated  into  a  de- 
tachment; the  senior  present  commands  if  no  officer  is 
in  charge.  The  detachment  is  formed  as  a  platoon  or 
squad  of  cavalry  in  line  or  column  of  'fours;  noncom- 
missioned staff  officers  are  on  the  right  or  in  the  leading 
ranks. 

28.  For  ceremonies,  such  of  the  noncommissioned  staff 
officers  as  are  dismounted  are  formed  5  paces  in  rear 
of  the  color,  in  order  of  rank  from  right  to  left.  In 
column  of  squads  they  march  as  file  closers. 

29.  Other  than  'for  ceremonies,  noncommissioned  staff 
officers  and  orderlies  accompany  their  immediate  chiefs 
unless  otherwise  directed.  If  mounted,  the  noncommis- 
sioned staff  officers  are  ordinarily  posted  on  the  right 
or  at  the  head  of  the  orderlies. 

30.  In  all  formations  and  movements  a  noncommis- 
sioned officer  commanding  a  platoon  or  company  carries 
his  piece  as  the  men  do,  if  he  is  so  armed,  and  takes 
the  same  post  as  an  officer  in  hke  situation.  When  the 
command  is  formed  in  line  for  ceremonies,  a  noncom- 
missioned officer  commanding  a  company  takes  post  on 
the  right  of  the  right  guide  after  the  company  has  been, 
aligned. 


k 


ORDERS  AND   COMMANDS 


31.  Commands  only  are  employed  in  drill  at  attention. 

therwise  either  a  command,  signal,  or  order  is  em- 
ployed, as  best  suits  the  occasion,  or  one  may  be  used  in 
conjunction  with  another. 

32.  Signals  should  be  'freely  used  in  instruction,  in 
order   that   officers    and   men    may    readily    know   them. 


20         THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

In  making  arm  signals  the  saber,  rifle,  or  headdress  may 
be  held  in  the  hand. 

33.  Officers  and  men  fix  their  attention  at  the  first 
word  of  command,  the  first  note  of  the  bugle  or  whistle, 
or  the  first  motion  of  the  signal.  A  signal  includes 
both  the  preparatory  command  and  the  command  of  ex- 
ecution; the  movement  commences  as  soon  as  the  signal 
is  understood,  unless  otherwise  prescribed. 

34.  Except  in  movements  executed  at  attention,  com- 
manders or  leaders  of  subdivisions  repeat  orders,  com- 
mands, or  signals  whenever  such  repetition  is  deemed 
necessary  to  insure  prompt  and  correct  execution. 

Officers,  battalion  noncommissioned  staff  officers,  pla- 
toon leaders,  guides,  and  musicians  are  equipped  with 
whistles. 

The  major  and  his  staff  will  use  a  whistle  of  distinc- 
tive tone;  the  captain  and  company  musicians  a  second 
and  distinctive  whistle;  the  platoon  leaders  and  guides  a 
third  distinctive  whistle. 

35.  Prescribed  signals  are  limited  to  such  as  are  essen- 
tial as  a  substitute  for  the  voice  under  conditions  which 
render  the  voice  inadequate. 

Before  or  during  an  engagement  special  signals  may 
be  agreed  upon  to  facilitate  the  solution  of  such  special 
difficulties  as  the  particular  situation  is  likely  to  de- 
velop, but  it  must  be  remembered  that  simplicity  and  cer- 
tainty are  indispensable  qualities  of  a  signal. 

Orders 

36.  In  these  regulations  an  order  embraces  instructions 
or  directions  given  orally  or  in  writing  in  terms  suited 
to  the  particular  occasion  and  not  prescribed  herein. 

Orders  are  employed  only  when   the   commands  pre- 


INFANTRY   DRILL  21 

scribed  herein  do  not  sufficiently  indicate  the  will  of  the 
commander. 

Orders  are  more  fully  described  in  paragraphs  378  to 
383,  inclusive,  "I.  D.  R." 

Commands 

37.  In  these  regulations  a  command  is  the  will  of  the 
commander  expressed  in  the  phraseology  prescribed 
herein. 

38.  There  are  two  kinds  of  commands: 

The  preparatory  command,  such  as  forward,  indicates 
the   movement  that  is  to   be  executed. 

The  command  of  execution,  such  as  MARCH,  HALT, 
or  ARMS,  causes  the  execution. 

Preparatory  commands  are  distinguished  by  italics, 
those  of  execution  by  CAPITALS. 

Where  it  is  not  mentioned  in  the  text  who  gives  the 
commands  prescribed,  they  are  to  be  given  by  the  com- 
mander oi  the  unit  concerned. 

The  preparatory  command  should  be  given  at  such  an 
interval  of  time  before  the  command  of  execution  as  to 
admit  of  being  properly  understood;  the  command  of 
execution  should  be  given  at  the  instant  the  movement 
is  to  commence. 

The  tone  of  command  is  animated,  distinct,  and  of  a 
loudness  proportioned  to  the  number  of  men  for  whom 
it  is  intended. 

Each  preparatory  command  is  enunciated  distinctly, 
with  a  rising  inflection  at  the  end,  and  in  such  manner 
that  the  command  o'f  execution  may  be  more  energetic. 

The  command  of  execution  is  firm  in  tone  and  brief. 

39.  Majors  and  commanders  of  units  larger  than  a 
battalion  repeat  such  commands  of  their  superior  as 
are  to  be  executed  by  their  units,  facing  their  units  for 


22  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

that  purpose.  The  battalion  is  the  largest  unit  that 
executes  a  movement  at  the  command  of  execution  of 
its    commander. 

40.  When  giving  commands  to  troops  it  is  usually  best 
to  face  toward  them. 

Indifference  in  giving  commands  must  be  avoided  as 
it  leads  to  laxity  in  execution.  Commands  should  be 
given  with  spirit  at  all  times. 

SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER 

In  this  chapter  you  will  learn  the  manual  of  arms,  the 
facings  and  salutes.  These  are  the  first  things  a  soldier 
should  master.  Once  you  have  mastered  the  school  of 
the  soldier,  the  part  you  will  take  as  a  member  of  the 
squad  will  be  relatively  easy. 

Study  the  text  carefully  and  by  observing  the  illustra- 
tions and  your  instructor  make  sure  that  you  execute  the 
movements  correctly.  If  you  do  not  thoroughly  under- 
stand any  command  ask  the  officer  or  noncommissioned 
officer  who  is  teaching  you  to  explain  the  movement  until 
you  know  how  to  execute  it  properly.  Never  be  afraid 
to  ask  a  question.  It  is  the  duty,  and  should  be  the 
pleasure,  of  your  instructor,  to  make  everything  clear  to 
you.  Remember  that  probably  he  was  once  as  awkward 
as  you  are  now. 

Your  appearance  as  a  soldier  will  be  judged  by  your 
military  bearing,  the  manner  in  which  you  execute  the 
manual  of  arms  and  the  facings  and  your  compliance 
with  the  requirements  of  military  courtesy.  Therefore, 
if  you  would  be  a  smart  soldier  master  this  chapter  so 
that  it  will  be  second  nature  for  you  to  do  correctly  every- 
thing called  for  in  the  School  of  the  Soldier. 

The  only  way  to  get  this  is  to  drill,  drill,  drill.    When 


INFANTRY   DRILL  23 

you  have  done  the  things  called  for  in  this  chapter  until 
you  no  longer  have  to  think  how  the  movements  are 
executed,  then,  and  not  until  then,  will  you  have  mas- 
tered the  first  essentials  of  a  good  soldier. 

Position  of  the  Soldier,  or  Attention    ^^^«^^t  .?>6  4-^ 

151.  Heels  on  the  same  line  and  as  near  each  other  as 
the  conformation  of  the  man  permits. 

Feet  turned  out  equally  and  forming  an  angle  of 
about  45°. 

Knees  straight  without  stiffness. 

Hips  level  and  drawn  back  slightly;  body  erect  and 
resting  equally  on  hips;  chest  Hfted  and  arched;  shoul- 
ders square  and  falling  equally. 

Arms  and  hands  hanging  naturally,  thumb  along  the 
seam  of  the  trousers. 

Head  erect  and  squarely  to  the  front,  chin  drawn  in  so 
that  the  axis  of  the  head  and  neck  is  vertical;  eyes 
straight  to  the  'front. 

Weight  of  the  body  resting  equally  upon  the  heels  and 
balls  of  the  feet. 

The  Rests 

52.  Being  at  a  halt,  the  commands  are:  FALL  OUT; 
REST;  AT  EASE;  and,  i.  Parade,  2.  REST. 

At  the  command  fall  out,  the  men  may  leave  the  ranks, 
but  are  required  to  remain  in  the  immediate  vicinity. 
They  resume  their  former  places,  at  attention,  at  the 
command  fall  in. 

At  the  command  rest  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in  place^ 
but  is  not  required  to  preserve  silence  or  immobility. 

1  These  numbers  correspond  to  the  numbers  in  the  Infan- 
try Drill  Regulations. 


i4         THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

At  the  command  at  ease  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in 
place  and  is  required  to  preserve  silence  but  not  immo- 
bility. 

53.  I.  Parade,  2.  REST,  Carry  the  right  foot  6  inches 
straight  to  the  rear,  left  knee  slightly  bent;  clasp  the 
hands,  without  constraint,  in  front  of  the  center  of  the 
body,  fingers  joined,  left  hand  uppermost,  left  thumb 
clasped  by  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand; 
preserve  silence  and  steadiness  of  position. 

54.  To  resume  the  attention:  i.  Squad,  2.  ATTEN- 
TION, 

The  men  take  the  position  of  the  soldier. 

Eyes  Right  or  Left 

55.  I.  Eyes,  2.  RIGHT  (LEFT),  3.  FRONT, 

At  the  command  right,  turn  the  head  to  the  right  ob- 
lique, eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or 
supposed  to  be  in,  the  same  rank.  At  the  command  front, 
turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 

Facings 

56.  To  the  flank:  i.  Right  (left),  2.  FACE. 

Raise  slightly  the  left  heel  and  right  toe;  face  to  the 
right,  turning  on  the  right  heel,  assisted  by  a  slight  pres- 
sure on  the  ball  of  the  left  foot;  place  the  left  foot  by  the 
side  of  the  right.  Left  face  is  executed  on  the  left  heel 
in  the  corresponding  manner. 

Right  (left)  half  face  is  executed  similarly,  facing  45**. 

"To  face  in  marching"  and  advance,  turn  on  the  ball 
of  either  foot  and  step  ofif  with  the  other  foot  in  the  new 
line  of  direction;  to  face  in  marching  without  gaining 
ground  in  the  new  direction,  turn  on  the  ball  of  either 
foot  and  mark  time. 


INFANTRY   DRILL 


25 


57.  To  the  rear:  i.  About,  2.  FACE. 

Carry  the  toe  of  the  right  foot  about  a  half  foot-length 
to  the  rear  and  slightly  to  the  left  of  the  left  heel  with- 
out changing  the  position  of  the  left  foot;  face  to  the 
rear,  turning  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel  and  right  toe; 
place  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left. 


Salute  with  the  Hand 

58.  I.  Hand,  2.  SALUTE. 

Raise  the  right  hand  smartly  till  the  tip  of  the  fore- 
finger touches  the  lower  part  of  the  headdress  or  fore- 
head above  the  right  eye,  thumb  and 
fingers  extended  and  joined,  palm  to  the 
left,  forearm  inclined  at  about  45°,  hand 
and  wrist  straight;  at  the  same  time  look 
toward  the  person  saluted.  (TWO)  Drop 
the  arm  smartly  by  the  side. 

Steps  and  Marchings 

59.  All  steps  and  marchings  executed 
from  a  halt,  except  right  step,  begin  with 
the  left  foot. 

60.  The  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick 
time  is  30  inches,  measured  from  heel  to 
heel,  and  the  cadence  is  at  the  rate  of  120 
steps  per  minute. 

The  length  of  the  full  step  in  double 
time  is  36  inches;  the  cadence  is  at  the 
rate  of  180  steps  per  minute. 

The  instructor,  when  necessary,  indi- 
cates the  cadence  of  the  step  by  calling  one,  izvo,  three, 
four,  or  left,  right,  the  instant  the  left  and  right  foot,  re- 
spectively, should  be  planted. 


Fig.  I 
Hand  salute 


26  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

6i.  All  steps  and  marchings  and  movements  involving 
march  are  executed  in  quick  time  unless  the  squad  be 
marching  in  double  time,  or  double  time  be  added  to  the 
command;  in  the  latter  case  double  time  is  added  to  the 
preparatory  command.  Example:  i.  Squad  right,  double 
time,  2.  MARCH  (School  of  the  Squad). 

Quick  Time 

62.  Being  at  a  halt,  to  march  forward  in  quick  time: 
I.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  forward,  shift  the  weight  of  the  body- 
to  the  right  leg,  left  knee  straight. 

At  the  command  march,  move  the  left  foot  smartly 
straight  forward  30  inches  from  the  right,  sole  near  the 
ground,  and  plant  it  without  shock;  next,  in  like  manner, 
advance  the  right  foot  and  plant  it  as  above;  continue 
the  march.     The  arms  swing  naturally. 

63.  Being  at  a  halt,  or  in  march  in  quick  time,  to  march 
in  double  time:  i.  Double  time,  2.  MARCH. 

If  at  a  halt,  at  the  first  command  shift  the  weight  of  the 
body  to  the  right  leg.  At  the  command  march,  raise  the 
forearms,  fingers  closed,  to  a  horizontal  position  along 
the  waist  line;  take  up  an  easy  run  with  the  step  and 
cadence  of  double  time,  allowing  a  natural  swinging  mo- 
tion to  the  arms. 

If  marching  in  quick  time,  at  the  command  march, 
given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground,  take  one  step 
in  quick  time,  and  then  step  off  in  double  time. 

64.  To  resume  the  quick  time:  i.  Quick  time,  2. 
MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes 
the  ground,  advance  and  plant  the  other  foot  in  double 
time;  resume  the  quick  time,  dropping  the  hands  by  the 
sides. 


INFANTRY   DRILL  a; 

To  Mark  Time 

65.  Being  in  march:     i.  Mark  time,  2.  MARCH, 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  other  foot;  bring  up  the 
foot  in  rear  and  continue  the  cadence  by  alternately  rais- 
ing each  foot  about  2  inches  and  planting  it  on  line  with 
the  other. 

Being  at  a  halt,  at  the  command  march,  raise  and  plant 
the  feet  as  described  above. 

The  Half  Step 

66.  I.  Half  step,  2.  MARCH. 

Take  steps  of  15  inches  in  quick  time,  18  inches  in 
double  time. 

67.  Forward,  half  step,  halt,  and  mark  time  may  be 
executed  one  from  the  other  in  quick  or  double  time. 

To  resume  the  full  step  from  half  step  or  mark  time: 

1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

Side  Step 

68.  Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time:  i.  Right  (left)  step, 

2.  MARCH. 

Carry  and  plant  the  right  foot  15  inches  to  the  right; 
bring  the  left  foot  beside  it  and  continue  the  movement 
in  the  cadence  of  quick  time. 

The  side  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is 
not  executed  in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  side  step  is  executed  at  trail  with- 
out command. 

Back  Step 

69.  Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time:  i.  Backward, 
2.  MARCH. 

Take  steps  of  15  inches  straight  to  the  rear. 


28  THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

The  back  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is 
not  executed  in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  back  step  is  executed  at  trail  with- 
out command. 

To  Halt 

70.  To    arrest    the    march    in    quick    or    double    time: 

1.  Squad,  2.  HALT. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the 
ground,,  plant  the  other  foot  as  in  marching;  raise  and 
place  the  first  foot  by  the  side  of  the  other.  If  in  double 
time,  drop  the  hands  by  the  sides. 

To  March  by  the  Flank 

71.  Being    in    march:    i.    By    the    right    (left)    flank, 

2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes 
the  ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot,  then  'face  to 
the  right  in  marching  and  step  off  in  the  new  direction 
with  the  right  foot. 

To  March  to  the  Rear 

72.  Being  in  march :  i.  To  the  rear,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes 
the  ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot;  turn  to  the 
right  about  on  the  balls  of  both  feet  and  immediately 
step  off  with  the  left  foot. 

If  marching  in  double  time,  turn  to  the  right  about, 
taking  four  steps  in  place,  keeping  the  cadence,  and  then 
step  off  with  the  left  foot. 

Change  Step 

73.  Being  in  march:  i.  Change  step,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes 


INFANTRY   DRILL  29 

the  ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot;  plant  the  toe 
of  the  right  foot  near  the  heel  of  the  left  and  step  off 
with  the  left   foot. 

The  change  on  the  right  foot  is  similarly  executed,  the 
command  march  being  given  as  the  left  foot  strikes  the 
ground. 

MANUAL  OF  ARMS 

74.  As  soon  as  practicable  the  recruit  is  taught  the  use, 
nomenclature  (Fig.  44),  and  care  of  his  rifle;  when  fair 
progress  has  been  made  in  the  instruction  without  arms, 
he  is  taught  the  manual  of  arms ;  instruction  without  arms 
and  that  with  arms  alternate. 

75.  The  following  rules  govern  the  carrying  of  the 
piece : 

First.  The  piece  is  not  carried  with  cartridges  in  either 
the  chamber  or  the  magazine  except  when  specifically 
ordered.  When  so  loaded,  or  supposed  to  be  loaded,  it  is 
habitually  carried  locked;  that  is,  with  the  safety  lock 
turned  to  the  "safe."  At  all  other  times  it  is  carried  un- 
locked, with  the  trigger  pulled. 

Second.  Whenever  troops  are  formed  under  arms, 
pieces  are  immediately  inspected  at  the  commands: 
I.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS;  3.  Order  (Right  shoulder,  port), 
4.  ARMS. 

A  similar  inspection  is  made  immediately  before  dis- 
missal. 

If  cartridges  are  found  in  the  chamber  or  magazine 
they  are  removed  and  placed  in  the  belt. 

Third.  The  cut-off  is  kept  turned  "off"  except  when 
cartridges  are  actually  used. 

Fourth.  The  bayonet  is  not  fixed  except  in  bayonet 
exercise,  on  guard,  or  for  combat. 

Fifth.  Fall  in  is  executed  with  the  piece  at  the  order 


30  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

arms.  Fall  out,  rest,  and  at  ease  are  executed  as  without 
arms.  On  resuming  attention  the  position  of  order  arms 
js  taken. 

Sixth.  If  at  the  order,  unless  otherwise  prescribed,  the 
piece  is  brought  to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  command 
march,  the  three  motions  corresponding  with  the  first 
three  steps.  Movements  may  be  executed  at  the  trail  by- 
prefacing  the  preparatory  command  with  the  words  at 
trail;  as,  i.  At  trail,  forward,  2.  MARCH;  the  trail  is 
taken  at  the  command  march. 

When  the  facings,  alignments,  open  and  close  ranks, 
taking  intervals  or  distance,  and  assemblings  are  executed 
from  the  order,  raise  the  piece  to  the  trail  while  in  mo- 
tion and  resume  the  order  on  halting. 

Seventh.  The  piece  is  brought  to  the  order  on  halting. 
The  execution  of  the  order  begins  when  the  halt  is  com- 
pleted. 

Eighth.  A  disengaged  hand  in  double  time  is  held  as 
when  without  arms. 

76.  The  following  rules  govern  the  execution  of  the 
manual  of  arms: 

First.  In  all  positions  of  the  left  hand  at  the  balance 
(center  of  gravity,  bayonet  unfixed)  the  thumb  clasps  the 
piece,  the  sling  is  included  in  the  grasp  of  the  hand. 

Second.  In  all  positions  of  the  piece  "diagonally  across 
the  body"  the  position  of  the  piece,  left  arm  and  hand  are 
the  same  as  in  port  arms. 

Third.  In  resuming  the  order  from  any  position  in  the 
manual,  the  motion  next  to  the  last  concludes  with  the 
butt  of  the  piece  about  3  inches  from  the  ground,  barrel 
to  the  rear,  the  left  hand  above  and  near  the  right,  steady- 
ing the  piece,  fingers  extended  and  joined,  forearm  and 
wrist  straight  and  inclining  downward,  all  fingers  of  the 
right  hand  grasping  the  piece.     To  complete  the  order. 


INFANTRY   DRILL  31 

lower  the  piece  gently  to  the  ground  with  the  right  hand, 
drop  the  left  quickly  by  the  side,  and  take  the  position 
of  order  arms. 

Allowing  the  piece  to  drop  through  the  right  hand  to 
the  ground,  or  other  similar  abuse  of  the  rifle  to  produce 
effect  in  executing  the  manual,  is  prohibited. 

Fourth.  The  cadence  of  the  motions  is  that  of  quick 
time;  the  recruits  are  first  required  to  give  their  whole 
attention  to  the  details  of  the  motions,  the  cadence  being 
gradually  acquired  as  they  become  accustomed  to  handling 
their  pieces.  The  instructor  may  require  them  to  count 
aloud  in  cadence  with  the  motions. 

Fifth.  The  manual  is  taught  at  a  halt  and  the  move- 
ments are,  for  the  purpose  of  instruction,  divided  into 
motions  and  executed  in  detail;  in  this  case  the  command 
of  execution  determines  the  prompt  execution  of  the  first 
motion,  and  the  commands,  two,  three,  four,  that  of  the 
other  motions. 

To  execute  the  movements  in  detail,  the  instructor  first 
cautions:  ^3;  the  numbers;  all  movements  divided  into 
motions  are  then  executed  as  above  explained  until  he 
cautions:  Without  the  numbers;  or  commands  movements 
other  than  those  in  the  manual  of  arms. 

Sixth.  Whenever  circumstances  require,  the  regular 
positions  of  the  manual  of  arms  and  the  firings  may  be 
•ordered  without  regard  to  the  previous  position  of  the 
piece. 

Under  exceptional  conditions  of  weather  or  fatigue  the 
rifle  may  be  carried  in  any  manner  directed. 

yy.  Position  of  order  arms  standing:  The  butt  rests 
evenly  on  the  ground,  barrel  to  the  rear,  toe  of  the  butt 
on  a  line  with  toe  of,  and  touching,  the  right  shoe,  arms 
and  hands  hanging  naturally,  right  hand  holding  the 
piece  between  the  thumb  and  fingers. 


32 


THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 


78.  Being  at  order  arms:  i.  Present,  2. 
ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  carry  the  piece  in 
front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  barrel  to 
the  rear  and  vertical,  grasp  it  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  balance,  forearm  horizontal  and 
resting  against  the  body.  (TWO)  Grasp 
the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand. 

79.  Being  at  order  arms :  i.Port,  2.  ARMS. 
With  the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the 

piece  diagonally  across  the  body,  grasp  it 
smartly  with  both  hands;  the  right,  palm 
down,  at  the  small  of  the  stock;  the  left, 
palm  up,  at  the  balance;  barrel  up,  sloping 
to  the  left  and  crossing  opposite  the  junc- 
tion of  the  neck  with  the  left 
shoulder ;  right  forearm  hori- 
Fig.  2  zontal;  left  forearm  resting 

Present  arms  •     ^  ^u     t,   j       ^u        • 

agamst  the  body;  the  piece 

in  a  vertical  plane  parallel  to  the  front. 

80.  Being  at  present  arms:  i.  Port,  2. 
ARMS. 

Carry  the  piece  diagonally  across  the 
body  and  take  the  position  of  port  arms. 

81.  Being  at  port  arms:  i.  Present,  2. 
ARMS, 

Carry  the  piece  to  a  vertical  position  in 
front  of  the  center  of  the  body  and  take 
the  position  of  present  arms. 

82.  Being  at  present  or  port  arms:  i.  Or- 
der, 2.  ARMS. 

Let  go  with  the  right  hand;  lower  and 
carry  the  piece  to  the  right  with  the  left 
hand;  regrasp  it  with  the  right  hand  just      Port^arms 


INFANTRY    DRILL 


33 


above  the  lower  band ;  let  go  with  the  left  hand,  and  take 
the  next  to  the  last  position  in  coming  to  the  order. 
{TWO)  Complete  the  order. 

83.  Being  at  order  arms:  i.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the  piece  diag- 
onally across  the  body;  carry  the  right  hand  quickly  to 
the  butt,  embracing  it,  the  heel  between  the  first  two 
fingers.  (TWO)  Without  changing  the  grasp  of  the 
right  hand,  place  the  piece  on  the  right  shoulder,  barrel 
up  and  inclined  at  an  angle  of  about  45°  from  the  hori- 
zontal, trigger  guard  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder,  right 
elbow  near  the  side,  the  piece  in  a  vertical  plane  perpen- 
dicular to  the  front;  carry  the  left  hand,  thumb  and  fin- 
gers extended  and  joined,  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  tip 
of  the  forefinger  touching  the  cocking  piece,  wrist  straight 
and  elbow  down.  (THREE) 
Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

84.  Being  at  right  shoulder 
arms:  i.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 

Press  the  butt  down  quickly 
and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 
across  the  body,  the  right  hand 
retaining  the  grasp  of  the  butt. 
(TWO),  (THREE)  Execute  or- 
der arms  as  described  from  port 
arms. 

85.  Being  at  port  arms:  I. 
Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 

Change  the  right  hand  to  the 
butt.  (TWO),  (THREE)  As  in 
right  shoulder  arms  from  order 
arms. 

86.  Being  at  right  shoulder 
arms :  i.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

.4 


Fig.  4. — Next  to  the  last 

movement  in  right 

shoulder  arms 


34         THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Press  the  butt  down  quickly  and  throw  the  piece  diag- 
onally across  the  body,  the  right  hand  retaining  its  grasp 
of  the  butt.  {TJVO)  Change  the  right  hand  to  the  small 
of  the  stock. 

87.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  I.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 
Execute  port  arms.     (THREE)  Execute  present  arms. 

88.  Being  at  present  arms:  i.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 
Execute  port   arms.      (TWO),    (THREE),    (FOUR) 

Execute  right  shoulder  arms  as  from  port  arms. 

89.  Being  at  port  arms:  i.  Left  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 
Carry  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  place  it  on  the 

left  shoulder,  barrel  up,  trigger  guard  in  the  hollow  of 
the  shoulder;  at  the  same  time  grasp  the  butt  with  the 
left  hand,  heel  between  first  and  second  fingers,  thumb 
and  fingers  closed  on  the  stock.  (TWO)  Drop  the  right 
hand  by  the  side. 

Being  at.  left  shoulder  arms:  i.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

Grasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the 
stock.  (TWO)  Carry  the  piece  to  the  right  with  the 
right  hand,  regrasp  it  with  the  left,  and  take  the  position 
of  port  arms. 

Left  shoulder  arms  may  be  ordered  directly  from  the 
order,  right  shoulder  or  present,  or  the  reverse.  At  the 
command  arms  execute  port  arms  and  continue  in  cadence 
to  the  position  ordered. 

90.  Being  at  order  arms:  i.  Parade,  2.  REST, 
Carry  the  right  foot  6  inches  straight  to  the  rear,  left 

knee  slightly  bent;  carry  the  muzzle  in  front  of  the  cen- 
ter of  the  body,  barrel  to  the  left;  grasp  the  piece  with 
the  left  hand  just  below  the  stacking  swivel,  and  with 
the  right  hand  below  and  against  the  left. 

Being  at  parade  rest:  i.  Squad,  2.  ATTENTION. 

Resume  the  order,  the  left  hand  quitting  the  piece 
opposite  the  right  hip. 


INFANTRY   DRILL 


35 


91.  Being  at  order  arms:  i.  Trail,  2. 
^ARMS. 

Raise  the  piece,  right  arm  slightly  bent, 
and  incline  the  muzzle  forward  so  that  the 
barrel  makes  an  angle  of  about  30°  with 
the  vertical. 

When  it  can  be  done  without  danger  or 
inconvenience  to  others,  the  piece  may  be 
grasped  at  the  balance  and  the  muzzle  low- 
ered until  the  piece  is  horizontal;  a  similar 
position  in  the  left  hand  may  be  used. 

92.  Being  at  trail  arms:  i.  Order,  2. 
'ARMS. 

Lower  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and 
resume  the  order. 


Rifle  Salute 


Fig.  6 

Rifle  salute  at 
right  shoulder 
arms 


Fig.  5 
Parade  rest 

93.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  i. 
Rifle,  2.  SALUTE. 

Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  small 
of  the  stock,  forearm  horizontal,  palm  of 
hand  down,  thumb  and  fingers  extended 
and  joined,  forefinger  touching  end  of 
cocking  piece ;  look  toward  the  person  sa- 
luted. {TWO)  Drop  left  hand  by  the 
side ;  turn  head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 

94.  Being  at  order  or  trail  arms:  i. 
Rifle,  2.  SALUTE. 

Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  right 
side,  palm  of  the  hand  down,  thumb  and 
fingers  extended  and  joined,  forefinger 
against  piece  near  the  muzzle ;  look  toward 


36  THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

the  person  saluted.     (TWO)  Drop  the  left  hand  by  the 
side;  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 

For  rules  governing  salutes,  see  "Honors  and  Salutes" 
(pars.  758-765). 

The  Bayonet 

95.  Being  at  order  arms:  i.  Fix,  2.  BAYONET. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  belt:  Execute 
parade  rest;  grasp  the  bayonet  with  the  right  hand, 
tack  of  hand  toward  the  body;  draw  the  bayonet  from 
the  scabbard  and  fix  it  on  the  barrel,  glancing  at  the 
muzzle;  resume  the  order. 

If  the  bayonet  is  carried  on  the  haverseick:  Draw  the 
bayonet  with  the  left  hand  and  fix  it  in  the  most  con- 
venient  manner. 

96.  Being  at  order  arms:  I.  Unfix,  2.  BAYONET. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  belt:  Ex- 
ecute parade  rest ;  grasp  the  handle  of  the  bayonet  firmly 
with  the  right  hand,  pressing  the  spring  with  the  fore- 
finger of  the  right  hand;  raise  the  bayonet  until  the 
handle  is  about  12  inches  above  the  muzzle  of  the  piece; 
drop  the  point  to  the  le'ft,  back  of  the  hand  toward  the 
body,  and,  glancing  at  the  scabbard,  return  the  bayonet, 
the  blade  passing  between  the  left  arm  and  the  body; 
regrasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  resume  the 
order. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  haversack: 
Take  the  bayonet  from  the  rifle  with  the  left  hand  and 
return  it  to  the  scabbard  in  the  most  convenient  man- 
ner. 

If  marching  or  lying  down,  the  bayonet  is  fixed  and 
unfixed  in  the  most  expeditious  and  convenient  manner 
and  the  piece  returned  to  the  original  position. 


INFANTRY   DRILL  37 

Fix  and  unfix  bayonet  are  executed  with  promptness 
and  regularity  but  not  in  cadence. 

97.  CHARGE  BAYONET.  Whether  executed  at  halt 
or  in  motion,  the  bayonet  is  held  toward  the  opponent  as 
in  the  position  of  guard  in  the  "Manual  for  Bayonet  Ex- 
ercise." 

Exercises  for  instruction  in  bayonet  combat  are  pre- 
scribed in  the  "Manual  for  Bayonet  Exercise." 

The  Inspection 

98.  Being  at  order  arms:  i.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS. 
At  the  second  command  take  the  position  of  port  arms. 

(TWO)  Seize  the  bolt  handle  with  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger of  the  right  hand,  turn  the  handle  up,  draw  the 
bolt  back,  and  glance  at  the  chamber.  Having  found  the 
chamber  empty,  or  having  emptied  it,  raise  the  head  and 
eyes  to  the  front. 

99.  Being  at  inspection  arms:  i.  Order  (Right  shoul- 
der, port),  2.  ARMS. 

At  the  preparatory  command  push  the  bolt  forward, 
turn  the  handle  down,  pull  the  trigger,  and  resume  port 
arms.  At  the  command  arms,  complete  the  movement 
ordered. 

To  Dismiss  the  Squad 

100.  Being  at  halt:  i.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3.  Port,  4. 
ARMS,  5.  DISMISSED, 


CHAPTER  V 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD 

The  squad  is  the  smallest  unit  in  the  military  organ- 
ization. The  man  directly  responsible  'for  the  squad  is 
the  corporal,  who  should  be  a  real  leader  of  his  men. 
The  spirit  of  comradeship  should  be  ever  present,  and 
every  man  in  the  squad  should  consider  it  his  duty  to 
make  his  squad  the  best  in  the  company. 

If  each  man  in  the  squad  will  consider  the  rights  of 
every  other  man  and  get  the  pull-together-spirit,  the 
squad  will  virtually  be  one  loyal  little  family,  and  your 
life  as  a  soldier  will  be  much  pleasanter  and  you'll  be 
much  happier. 

As  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  make  yourself  thorough- 
ly familiar  with  the  squad  movements.  This  done,  you 
will  have  laid  the  foundation  "for  all  military  drill. 

loi.  Soldiers  are  grouped  into  squads  for  purposes  of 
instruction,  discipline,  control,  and  order. 

102.  The  squad  proper  consists  of  a  corporal  and  seven 
privates. 

The  movements  in  the  "School  of  the  Squad"  are  de- 
signed to  make  the  squad  a  fixed  unit  and  to  facilitate 
the  control  and  movement  of  the  company.  If  the  num- 
ber of  men  grouped  is  more  than  3  and  less  than  12, 
they  are  'formed  as  a  squad  of  4  files,  the  excess  above 

38 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SQUAD  3^ 

8  being  posted  as  file  closers.  If  the  number  grouped 
is  greater  than  11,  2  or  more  squads  are  formed,  with 
blank  file  in  rear  rank  if  necessary,  and  the  group  is 
termed  a  platoon. 

For  the  instruction  of  recruits,  when  the  manual  of 
arms  and  the  facings  are  to  be  given,  the  men  should  be 
placed  in  a  single  rank. 

103.  The  corporal  is  the  squad  leader,  and  when  absent 
is  replaced  by  a  designated  private.  If  no  private  is 
designated,  the  senior  in  length  of  service  acts  as  leader. 

The  corporal,  when  in  ranks,  is  posted  as  the  left  man 
in  the  'front  rank  of  the  squad. 

When  the  corporal  leaves  the  ranks  to  lead  his  squad, 
his  rear-rank  man  steps  into  the  front  rank,  and  the  file 
remains  blank  until  the  corporal  returns  to  his  place  in 
ranks,  when  his  rear-rank  man  steps  back  into  the  rear 
rank. 

104.  In  battle  officers  and  sergeants  endeavor  to  pre- 
serve the  integrity  of  squads;  they  designate  new  leaders 
to  replace  those  disabled,  organize  new  squads  when 
necessary,  and  see  that  every  man  is  placed  in  a  squad. 

Men  should  always  remain  with  the  squad  to  which 
they  belong,  but  in  case  it  be  broken  up  or  they  become 
separated  therefrom,  they  should  attach  themselves  to 
the  nearest  squad  and  platoon  leaders,  whether  these  be 
of  their  own  or  of  another  organization. 

105.  The  squad  executes  the  halt,  rests,  facings,  steps- 
and  marchings,  and  the  manual  of  arms  as  explained  in 
the  School  of  the  Soldier. 


40  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 


To  Form  the  Squad 

io6.  To  form  the  squad  the  instructor  places  himself 
3  paces  in  front  of  where  the  center  is  to  be  and  com- 
mands: FALL  IN. 

The  men  assemble  at  attention,  pieces  at  the  order,  and 
are  arranged  by  the  corporal  in  double  rank,  as  nearly 
as  practicable  in  order  of  height  from  right  to  left,  each 
man  dropping  his  left  hand  as  soon  as  the  man  on  his  left 
has  his  interval.  The  rear  rank  forms  with  distance  of 
40  inches  from  the  front  rank. 

An  easy  way  to  judge  this  distance  is  to  remember  that 
it  is  about  the  same  as  the  length  of  the  rifle. 

The  instructor  then  commands:  COUNT  OFF. 

At  this  command  all  except  the  right  file  executes  eyes 
right,  and  beginning  on  the  right,  the  men  in  each  rank 
count  one,  two,  three,  four;  each  man  turns  his  head  and 
eyes  to  the  front  as  he  counts. 

Pieces  are  then  inspected. 


Alignments 

107.  To  align  the  squad,  the  base  file  or  files  having 
been  established:  i.  Right  {Left),  2.  DRESS,  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  dress  all  men  place  the  left  hand  upon 
the  hip  (whether  dressing  to  the  right  or  left)  ;  each 
man,  except  the  base  file,  when  on  or  near  the  new  line 
executes  eyes  right,  and,  taking  steps  of  2  or  3  inches, 
places  himself  so  that  his  right  arm  rests  lightly  against 
the  arm  of  the  man  on  his  right,  and  so  that  his  eyes  and 
shoulders  are  in  line  with  those  of  the  men  on  his  right; 
the  rear-rank  men  cover  in  file. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SQUAD  41 

The  instructor  verifies  the  alignment  of  both  ranks 
from  the  right  flank  and  orders  up  or  back  such  men 
as  may  be  in  rear,  or  in  advance,  of  the  line;  only  the 
men  designated  move. 

At  the  command  front,  given  when  the  ranks  are 
aligned,  each  man  turns  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front 
and  drops  his  left  hand  by  his  side. 

In  the  first  drills  the  basis  of  the  alignment  is  estab- 
lished on,  or  parallel  to,  the  front  of  the  squad;  after- 
ward, in  oblique  directions. 

Whenever  the  position  of  the  base  file  or  files  neces- 
sitates a  considerable  movement  by  the  squad,  such  move- 
ment will  be  executed  by  marching  to  the  front  or  ob- 
lique, to  the  flank  or  backward,  as  the  case  may  be, 
without  other  command,  and  at  the  trail. 

108.  To  preserve  the  alignment  when  marching: 
GUIDE  RIGHT  (LEFT). 

The  men  preserve  their  intervals  from  the  side  of  the 
guide,  yielding  to  pressure  from  that  side  and  resisting 
pressure  from  the  opposite  direction;  they  recover  in- 
tervals, if  lost,  by  gradually  opening  out  or  closing  in; 
they  recover  alignment  by  slightly  lengthening  or  short- 
ening the  step;  the  rear-rank  men  cover  their  file  lead- 
ers at  40  inches. 

In  double  rank,  the  front-rank  man  on  the  right,  or 
designated  flank,  conducts  the  march;  when  marching 
faced  to  the  flank,  the  leading  man  of  the  front  rank 
is  the  guide. 

To  Take  Intervals  and  Distances 

109.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt:  i.  Take  interval,  2.  To  the 
right   (left),  3.  MARCH,  4.  Squad,  5.  HALT. 


42  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

J.J.JL    T    4,±±1.    t     <4  p  |20         |1 


4 

^J-J-i.       oooo 


±±±±  |4   |3   |2o  |l 

B  C 


|4  |3  1^  ,1 

4pac9S      4pac^s      4paces 


\t,^ ,P        I* 

4paces 


D 

(Take  interval) 


V     Represents  a  corporal. 

—    Represents  a  private. 

1^,3,4    Represents  the  number  of  each  man  in  the  front  and 
rear   ranks. 


Fig.  7. — A  shows  the  squad  in  ranks  at  attention.  B  shows 
the  squad  after  the  rear  rank  have  marched  backward  four 
steps — the  O  representing  the  original  position  of  the  men  in 
the  rear  rank.  C  shows  the  squad  faced  to  the  right,  No.  i 
of  each  rank  having  stepped  off  four  paces.  D  shows  the 
squad  when  "Take  Interval"  has  been  executed. 


(VJ 


13     .Jt!;: 

w  C  O  (U 

J_l     5/5  .rt    4-1 

^  o  ^.^ 

2.  iMt 

oooo      5,  '^^^4 

rt      (^      C\J      T-*  «■    .2^  §  '^ 

—  —  —  I     ^  oj  f  Q 

<=•    "^  15        ^^     CO 

^  ^*         ^     CO  a-d  ^ 

^■»  ^  ^  c  u, 

C  ^  rt  3 


cr 


j:: 


~  21.  ^  2.  <i^o^.S 

9  rt  2  a 


0000 


rrOOO         1. 1*  Is 

o       ^  ^  X 


^     m      r>j      '-I 

43 


44  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

At  the  second  command  the  rear-rank  men  march  back- 
ward 4  steps  and  halt ;  at  the  command  march  all  'face  to 
the  right  and  the  leading  man  of  each  rank  steps  off; 
the  other  men  step  off  in  succession,  each  following  the 
preceding  man  at  4  paces,  rear-rank  men  marching  abreast 
of  their  file  leaders. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  when  all  have  their  inter- 
vals, all  halt  and  face  to  the  front. 

no.  Being  at  intervals,  to  assemble  the  squad:  i.  As- 
semble to  the  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

The  front-rank  man  on  the  right  stands  fast,  the  rear- 
rank  man  on  the  right  closes  to  40  inches.  The  other 
men  face  to  the  right,  close  by  the  shortest  line,  and  'face 
to  the  front. 

111.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt  and  having  counted  off:  i. 
Take  distance,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

At  the  command  march  No.  i  of  the  front  rank  moves 
straight  to  the  front;  Nos.  2,  3,  and  4  of  the  front  rank 
and  Nos.  i,  2,  3,  and  4  of  the  rear  rank,  in  the  order 
named,  move  straight  to  the  front,  each  stepping  off  so 
as  to  'follow  the  preceding  man  at  4  paces.  The  com- 
mand halt  is  given  when  all  have  their  distances. 

In  case  more  than  one  squad  is  in  line,  each  squad  exe- 
cutes the  movement  as  above.  The  guide  of  each  rank  of 
numbers  is  right. 

112.  Being  at  distances,  to  assemble  the  squad:  i.  As- 
semble, 2.  MARCH. 

No.  I  of  the  front  rank  stands  fast ;  the  other  numbers 
move  forward  to  their  proper  places  in  line. 

To  Stack  and  Take  Arms 

113.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt:  STACK  ARMS. 

Each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  piece 
with  the  left  hand  at  the  upper  band  and  rests  the  butt 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SQUAD  45 

between  his  feet,  barrel  to  the  front,  muzzle  inclined 
slightly  to  the  front  and  opposite  the  center  of  the 
interval  on  his  right,  the  thumb  and  forefinger  raising 
the  stacking  swivel;  each  even  number  of  the  rear  rank 
then  passes  his  piece,  barrel  to  the  rear,  to  his  file 
leader,  who  grasps  it  between  the  bands  with  his  right 
hand  and  throws  the  butt  about  2  feet  in  advance  of 
that  of  his  own  piece  and  opposite  the  right  of  the 
interval,  the  right  hand  slipping  to  the  upper  band,  the 
thumb  and  forefinger  raising  the  stacking  swivel,  which 
he  engages  with  that  o*f  his  own  piece;  each  odd  num- 
ber of  the  front  rank  raises  his  piece  with  the  right  hand, 
carries  it  well  forward,  barrel  to  the  front;  the  left 
hand,  guiding  the  stacking  swivel,  engages  the  lower 
hook  of  the  swivel  of  his  own  piece  with  the  free  hook 
of  that  o'f  the  even  number  of  the  rear  rank;  he  then 
turns  the  barrel  outward  into  the  angle  formed  by  the 
other  two  pieces  and  lowers  the  butt  to  the  ground,  to 
the  right  of  and  against  the  toe  of  his  right  shoe. 

The  stacks  made,  the  loose  pieces  are  laid  on  them  by 
the  even  numbers  of  the  front  rank. 

When  each  man  has  finished  handling  pieces,  he  takes 
the  position  of  the  soldier. 

114.  Being  in  line  behind  the  stacks:  TAKE  ARMS, 

The  loose  pieces  are  returned  by  the  even  numbers  of 
the  front  rank;  each  even  number  o'f  the  front  rank 
grasps  his  own  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  piece  of  his 
rear-rank  man  with  his  right  hand,  grasping  both  between 
the  bands;  each  odd  number  of  the  front  rank  grasps 
his  piece  in  the  same  way  with  the  right  hand,  disengages 
it  by  raising  the  butt  from  the  ground  and  then,  turning 
the  piece  to  the  right,  detaches  it  from  the  stack;  each 
even  number  of  the  front  rank  disengages  and  detaches 
his  piece  by  turning  it  to  the  left,  and  then  passes  the 


46  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

piece  of  his  rear-rank  man  to  him,  and  all  resume  the 
order. 

115.  Should  any  squad  have  Nos.  2  and  3  blank  files. 
No.  I  rear  rank  takes  the  place  of  No.  2  rear  rank  in 
making  and  breaking  the  stack;  the  ^stacks  made  or 
broken,  he  resumes  his  post. 

Pieces  not  used  in  making  the  stack  are  termed  loose 
pieces. 

Pieces  are  never  stacked  with  the  bayonet  fixed. 

The  Oblique  March 

116.  For  the  instruction  of  recruits,  the  squad  being 
in  column  or  correctly  aligned,  the  instructor  causes  the 
squad  to  face  half  right  or  half  left,  points  out  to  the 
men  their  relative  positions,  and  explains  that  these  are 
to  be  maintained  in  the  oblique  march. 

117.  I.  Right    (Left)    oblique,   2.   MARCH. 

Each  man  steps  off  in  a  direction  45°  to  the  right  of 
his  original  'front.  He  preserves  his  relative  position, 
keeping  his  shoulders  parallel  to  those  of  the  guide  (the 
man  on  the  right  front  of  the  line  or  column),  and  so 
regulates  his  steps  that  the  ranks  remain  parallel  to  their 
original  front. 

At  the  command  halt  the  men  halt  faced  to  the  front. 

To  resume  the  original  direction:  I.  Forward,  2. 
MARCH. 

The  men  half  face  to  the  left  in  marching  and  then 
move  straight  to  the  front. 

H  at  half  step  or  mark  time  while  obliquing,  the  ob- 
lique march  is  resumed  by  the  commands:  i.  Oblique,  2. 
MARCH, 

To  Turn  on  Moving  Pivot 

118.  Being  in  line:  i.  Right  (Left),  turn,  2.  MARCH, 


SCHOOL 

OF 

THE  SQUAD 

2. 

TT7"  T 

& 

B 

# 
^ 

<14 

//■ 

|2 

^  ^  ^ 

M 

1^ 

47 


.4321  4321 


^4     3     2     1 

E 
(Right  turn) 


I 


1 


Fig.  9. — A  shows  the  squad  in  ranks  at  attention.  B  shows 
No.  I  of  the  front  rank  after  he  has  faced  to  the  right  in 
marching  and  is  taking  the  half  step.  C  shows  Nos.  2,  3  and 
4  of  the  front  rank  after  each  has  taken  the  right  oblique 
position,  the  dotted  lines  showing  the  direction  and  distance 
each  takes  at  the  right  oblique.  Then,  having  arrived  op- 
posite his  position  in  the  line,  each  man  executes  a  second 
right  oblique  and  marches  straight  to  the  front,  taking  up 
the  half  step  when  abreast  of  No.  i  man,  as  shown  in  D. 
E  shows  the  front  rank  taking  the  half  step,  and  also  shows 
the^  rear  rank  having  taken  the  right  oblique  position  from 
which  the  movement  is  executed  exactly  as  the  front  rank  did. 


48  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

The  movement  is  executed  by  each  rank  successively 
and  on  the  same  ground.  At  the  second  command,  the 
pivot  man  of  the  front  rank  faces  to  the  right  in  march- 
ing and  takes  the  half  step;  the  other  men  of  the  rank 
oblique  to  the  right  until  opposite  their  places  in  line, 
then  execute  a  second  right  oblique  and  take  the  hal*f 
step  on  arriving  abreast  of  the  pivot  man.  AH  glance 
toward  the  marching  flank  while  at  half  step  and  take 
the  full  step  without  command  as  the  last  man  arrives 
on  the  line. 

Right  (Left)  half  turn  is  executed  in  a  similar  man- 
ner. The  pivot  man  makes  a  half  change  of  direction 
to  the  right  and  the  other  men  make  quarter  changes  in 
obliquing. 

To  Turn  on  Fixed  Pivot 

119.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  and  march:  I.  Squad  rights 
(left),  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  second  command,  the  right-flank  man  in  the 
front  rank  'faces  to  the  right  in  marching  and  marks 
time;  the  other  front-rank  men  oblique  to  the  right,  place 
themselves  abreast  of  the  pivot,  and  mark  time.  In  the 
rear  rank  the  third  man  from  the  right,  followed  in  col- 
umn by  the  second  and  first,  moves  straight  to  the  front 
until  in  rear  of  his  front-rank  man,  when  all  face  to  the 
right  in  marching  and  mark  time;  the  other  number  of 
the  rear  rank  moves  straight  to  the  front  four  paces 
and  places  himself  abreast  of  the  man  on  his  right.  Men 
on  the  new  line  glance  toward  the  marching  flank  while 
marking  time  and,  as  the  last  man  arrives  on  the  line, 
both  ranks  execute  forward,  march,  without  command. 

120.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  and  halt:  I.  Squad  right 
(left),  2.  MARCH,  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

The   third   command   is   given   immediately   after  the 


SCHOOL   OF  THE    SQUAD  49 

4      3      2      1  4      3      2," 

^^ 5;7' |1 

d.  J.  -i.  J:.  JL-2.^J^ 

A  B 


4     3 

I        I 


4**    3^   2 


4  <1*  I*  <* 

-       |3  |3    |3 


^       I 


E  P 

(Squad  right) 

Fig.  10. — A  shows  the  squad  in  ranks  at  attention.  B  shows 
No.  I  of  the  front  rank  or  pivot  after  he  has  faced  to  the 
right  and  is  marking  time.  C  shows  Nos.  2,  3  and  4  of  the 
front  rank  after  taking  the  right  oblique  position — the  dotted 
lines  showing  the  direction  each  man  will  take  to  place  him- 
self abreast  of  No.  i  or  pivot.  D  shows  the  front  rank  in 
the  new  position,  Nos.  3  and  4  of  the  rear  rank  moving 
straight  to  the  front,  and  Nos.  2  and  i  of  the  rear  rank 
faced  to  the  left  and  following  in  column  No.  3  of  the  rear 
rank.  E  shows  No.  4  of  the  rear  rank  after  he  has  moved 
straight  to  the  front  four  paces  and  Nos.  3,  2  and  1  of  the 
rear  rank  after  they  have  arrived  in  the  rear  of  their  front- 
rank  man  or  file  leader.  F  shows  the  squad  after  the  rear- 
rank  men  have  faced  to  the  right  in  marching,  "Squad  Right" 
having  been  executed. 
5 


so  THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

second.  The  turn  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  pre- 
ceding paragraph  except  that  all  men,  on  arriving  on 
the  new  line,  mark  time  until  the  fourth  command  is 
given,  when  all  halt.  The  fourth  command  should  be 
given  as  the  last  man  arrives  on  the  line. 

121.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  about  and  march:  I.  Squad 
right  (left)  about,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  second  command,  the  front  rank  twice  executes 
squad  right,  initiating  the  second  squad  right  when  the 
man  on  the  marching  flank  has  arrived  abreast  of  the 
rank.  In  the  rear  rank  the  third  man  from  the  right, 
followed  by  the  second  and  first  in  column,  moves  straight 
to  the  front  until  on  the  prolongation  of  the  line  to  be 
occupied  by  the  rear  rank;  changes  direction  to  the  right; 
moves  in  the  new  direction  until  in  rear  of  his  front- 
rank  man,  when  all  face  to  the  right  in  marching,  mark 
time,  and  glance  toward  the  marching  flank.  The  'fourth 
man  marches  on  the  left  of  the  third  to  his  new  position; 
V  as  he  arrives  on  the  line,  both  ranks  execute  forward, 
march,  without  command. 

122.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  about  and  halt:  i.  Squad 
right  (left)  about,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

The  third  command  is  given  immediately  after  the  sec- 
ond. The  turn  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  preced- 
ing paragraph  except  that  all  men,  on  arriving  on  the 
new  line,  mark  time  until  the  fourth  command  is  given, 
when  all  halt.  The  fourth  command  should  be  given  as 
the  last  man  arrives  on  the  line. 

To  Follow  the  Corporal 

123.  Being  assembled  or  deployed,  to  march  the  squad 
without  unnecessary  commands,  the  corporal  places  him- 
self in  front  of  it  and  commands:  FOLLOW  ME, 


SCHOOL   OF  THE    SQUAD  51 

If  in  line  or  skirmish  line,  No.  2  of  the  front  rank  'fol- 
lows in  the  trace  of  the  corporal  at  about  3  paces;  the 
other  men  conform  to  the  movements  of  No.  2,  guiding 
on  him  and  maintaining  their  relative  positions. 

If  in  column,  the  head  of  the  column  follows  the  cor- 
poral. 

To  Deploy  as  Skirmishers 

124.  Being  in  anyformation,  assembled:  i.  As  skirmish- 
ers, 2.  MARCH. 

The  corporal  places  himself  in  front  of  the  squad,  if 
not  already  there.  Moving  at  a  run,  the  men  place  them- 
selves abreast  of  the  corporal  at  half-pace  intervals,  Nos. 
I  and  2  on  his  right,  Nos.  3  and  4  on  his  left,  rear-rank 
men  on  the  right  of  their  file  leaders,  extra  men  on  the 
left  of  No.  4;  all  then  conform  to  the  corporal's  gait. 


Corporal 


JJ2fiCLees_ 


4.321  4321  £4      33  22li^ 

5;^—    —  —  •—    —   —    —  ^     ^     ^    y^    ^     .^^      ym 


VM?  2//,''', 

O  9  O/O/' 

Odd 

3    2     1 

A  B  C 

(As  skirmishers) 

Fig.  II. — A  shows  the  squad  in  close-order.  B  shows  the 
corporal  3  paces  in  front  of  his  squad.  C  shows  by  the  O  the 
original  position  of  the  men;  the  dotted  lines  show  the  path 
each  man  has  taken  to  get  to  his  position  on  the  skirmish  line. 

When  the  squad  is  acting  alone,  skirmish  line  is  simi- 
larly formed  on  No.  2  of  the  front  rank,  who  stands 
fast  or  continues  the  march,  as  the  case  may  be;  the  cor- 


$2         THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

poral  places  himself  in  front  of  the  squad  when  ad- 
vancing and  in  rear  when  halted. 

When  deployed  as  skirmishers,  the  men  march  at  ease, 
pieces  at  the  trail  unless  otherwise  ordered. 

The  corporal  is  the  guide  when  in  the  line;  otherwise 
No.  2  front  rank  is  the  guide. 

125.  The  normal  interval  between  skirmishers  is  one- 
hatf  pace,  resulting  practically  in  one  man  per  yard  of 
front  The  front  of  a  squad  thus  deployed  as  skirmish- 
ers is  about  10  paces. 

To  Increase  or  Diminish  Intervals 

126.  If  assembled,  and  it  is  desired  to  deploy  at  greater 
than  the  normal  interval;  or  if  deployed,  and  it  is  de- 
sired to  increase  or  decrease  the  interval :  i.  As  skirmish- 
ers,  (so  many)   paces,  2.  MARCH. 

Intervals  are  taken  at  the  indicated  number  of  paces. 
If  already  deployed,  the  men  move  by  the  flank  toward 
or  away  from  the  guide. 

The  Assembly 

127.  Being  deployed:   i.  Assemble,  2.  MARCH. 

The  men  move  toward  the  corporal  and  form  in  their 
proper  places. 

If  the  corporal  continues  to  advance,  the  men  move  in 
double  time,  form,  and  follow  him. 

The  assembly  while  marching  to  the  rear  is  not  exe- 
cuted. 

Kneeling  and  Lying  Down 

128.  If  standing:  KNEEL. 

Half  face  to  the  right;  carry  the  right  toe  about  i 
ioot  to  the  left  rear  of  the   left  heel;  kneel  on  right 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SQUAD  53 

knee,  sitting  as  nearly  as  possible  on  the  right  heel;  left 
forearm  across  left  thigh;  piece  remains  in  position  of 
order  arms,  right  hand  grasping  it  above  the  lower  band. 

129.  If   standing  or  kneeling:  LIE  DOWN. 

Kneel,  but  with  right  knee  against  left  heel ;  carry  back 
the  left  foot  and  lie  flat  on  the  belly,  inclining  body 
about  35°  to  the  right;  piece  horizontal,  barrel  up,  muz- 
zle off  the  ground  and  pointed  to  the  front;  elbows  on 
the  ground;  left  hand  at  the  balance,  right  hand  grasping 
the  small  o'f  the  stock  opposite  the  neck.  This  is  the 
position  of  order  arms,  lying  down. 

130.  If  kneeling  or  lying  down:  RISE. 

If  kneeling,  stand  up,  faced  to  the  front,  on  the  ground 
piarked  by  the  left  heel. 

If  lying  down,  raise  body  on  both  knees;  stand  up, 
faced  to  the  front,  on  the  ground  marked  by  the  knees. 

131.  If  lying  down:  KNEEL. 

Raise  the  body  on  both  knees;  take  the  position  of 
kneeling. 

132.  In  double  rank,  the  positions  of  kneeling  and  lying 
down  are  ordinarily  used  only  for  the  better  utilization 
of  cover. 

When  deployed  as  skirmishers,  a  sitting  position  may 
be  taken  in  lieu  of  the  position  kneeling. 

LOADINGS   AND    FIRINGS 

133.  The  commands  for  loading  and  firing  are  the  same 
whether  standing,  kneeling,  or  lying  down.  The  firings 
are  always  executed  at  a  halt. 

When  kneeling  or  lying  down  in  double  rank,  the  rear 
rank  does  not  load,  aim,  or  fire. 

The  instruction  in  firing  will  be  preceded  by  a  com- 
mand for  loading. 


54  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Loadings  are  executed  in  line  and  skirmish  line  only. 

134.  Pieces  having  been  ordered  loaded  are  kept  loaded 
without  command  until  the  command  unload,  or  inspection 
arms,  fresh  clips  being  inserted  when  the  magazine  is 
exhausted. 

135.  The  aiming  point  or  target  is  carefully  pointed 
out.  This  may  be  done  before  or  after  announcing  the 
sight  setting.  Both  are  indicated  before  giving  the  com- 
mand for  firing,  but  may  be  omitted  when  the  target 
appears  suddenly  and  is  unmistakable;  in  such  case  battle 
sight  is  used  if  no  sight  setting  is  announced. 

136.  The  target  or  aiming  point  having  been  designated 
and  the  sight  setting  announced,  such  designation  or  an- 
nouncement need  not  be  repeated  until  a  change  of  either 
or  both  is  necessary. 

Troops  are  trained  to  continue  their  fire  upon  the  aim- 
ing point  or  target  designated,  and  at  the  sight  setting 
announced,  until  a  change  is  ordered. 

137.  If  the  men  are  not  already  in  the  position  of  load, 
that  position  is  taken  at  the  announcement  of  the  sight 
setting;  if  the  announcement  is  omitted,  the  position  is 
taken  at  the  first  command  for  firing. 

138.  When  deployed,  the  use  o*f  the  sling  as  an  aid  to 
accurate  firing  is  discretionary  with  each  man. 

•  To  Load 

139.  Being  in  line  or  skirmish  line  at  halt:  I,  With 
dummy  (blank  or  ball)  cartridges,  2.  LOAD. 

At  the  command  load  each  front-rank  man  or  skir- 
misher faces  half  right  and  carries  the  right  foot  to 
the  right,  about  I  foot,  to  such  position  as  will  insure 
the  greatest  firmness  and  steadiness  of  the  body;  raises, 
or  lowers,  the  piece  and  drops  it  into  the  left  hand  at 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   SQUAD  S5 

the  balance,  left  thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  muz- 
zle at  the  height  of  the  breast,  and  turns  the  cut-off  up. 
With  the  right  hand  he  turns  and  draws  the  bolt  back, 
takes  a  loaded  clip  and  inserts  the  end  in  the  clip  slots, 
places  the  thumb  on  the  powder  space  of  the  top  cartridge, 
the  fingers  extending  around  the  piece  and  tips  resting 
on  the  magazine  floor  plate;  'forces  the  cartridges  into 
the  magazine  by  pressing  down  with  the  thumb;  with- 
out removing  the  clip,  thrusts  the  bolt  home,  turning 
down  the  handle;  turns  the  safety  lock  to  the  ''safe^ 
and  carries  the  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock.  Each 
rear-rank  man  moves  to  the  right  front,  takes  a  similar 
position  opposite  the  interval  to  the  right  of  his  front- 
rank  man,  muzzle  of  the  piece  extending  beyond  the  front 
rank,  and  loads. 

A  skirmish  line  may  load  while  moving,  the  pieces 
being  held  as  nearly  as  practicable  in  the  position  of 
load.  1 , 

Pf  kneeling  or  sitting,  the  position  of  the  piece  is  simi- 
lar; if  kneeling,  the  left  forearm  rests  on  the  left  thigh; 
if  sitting,  the  elbows  are  supported  by  the  knees.  If  lying 
down,  the  left  hand  steadies  and  supports  the  piece  at  the 
balance,  the  toe  of  the  butt  resting  on  the  ground,  the 
muzzle   off  the   ground. 

For  reference,  these  positions  (standing,  kneeling,  and 
lying  down)   are  designated  as  that  o'f  load. 

140.  For  instruction  in  loading:  i.  Simulate,  2.  LOAD. 
Executed   as   above   described   except   that  the    cut-off 

remains  "off"  and  the  handling  of  cartridges  is  simu- 
lated. 

The  recruits  are  first  taught  to  simulate  loading  and 
firing;  after  a  few  lessons  dummy  cartridges  may  be  used. 
Later,  blank  cartridges  may  be  used. 

141.  The  rifle  may  be  used  as  a  single  loader  by  turn- 


S6         THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

ing  the  magazine  "off."  The  magazine  may  be  filled  in 
whole  or  in  part  while  "off"  or  "on"  by  pressing  car- 
tridges singly  down  and  back  until  they  are  in  the  proper 
place.  The  use  of  the  rifle  as  a  single  loader  is,  how- 
ever, to  be  regarded  as  exceptional. 

To  Unload 

142.  UNLOAD. 

Take  the  position  of  load,  turn  the  safety  lock  up  and 
move  bolt  alternately  back  and  forward  until  all  the  car- 
tridges are  ejected.  After  the  last  cartridge  is  ejected 
the  chamber  is  closed  by  first  thrusting  the  bolt  slightly 
forward  to  'free  it  from  the  stud  holding  it  in  place  when 
the  chamber  is  open,  pressing  the  follower  down  and 
back  to  engage  it  under  the  bolt  and  then  thrusting  the 
bolt  home;  the  trigger  is  pulled.  The  cartridges  are  then 
picked  up,  cleaned,  and  returned  to  the  belt  and  the 
piece  is  brought  to  the  order. 

To  Set  the  Sight 

143.  RANGE,  ELEVEN  HUNDRED  {EIGHT- 
FIFTY,  etc.),  or  BATTLE  SIGHT. 

The  sight  is  set  at  the  elevation  indicated.  The  in- 
structor explains  and  verifies  sight  settings. 

To  Fire  by  Volley 

144.  I.  READY,  2.  AIM,  3.  Squad,  4.  FIRE. 

At  the  ^command  ready  turn  the  safety  lock  to  the 
"ready";  at  the  command  aim  raise  the  piece  with  both 
hands  and  support  the  butt  firmly  against  the  hollow  of 
the  right  shoulder,  right  thumb  clasping  the  stock,  barrel 
horizontal,  left  elbow  well  under  the  piece,  right  elbow 
as  high  as  the  shoulder;  incline  the  head  slightly   for- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   SQUAD  57 

ward  and  a  little  to  the  right,  cheek  against  the  stock, 
left  eye  closed,  right  eye  looking  through  the  notch  of 
the  rear  sight  so  as  to  perceive  the  object  aimed  at, 
second  joint  of  forefinger  resting  lightly  against  the  front 
of  the  trigger  and  taking  up  the  slack;  top  of  front  sight 
is  carefully  raised  into,  and  held  in,  the  line  o'f  sight. 

Each  rear-rank  man  aims  through  the  interval  to  the 
right  of  his  file  leader  and  leans  slightly  forward  to  ad- 
vance the  muzzle  of  his  piece  beyond  the  front  rank. 

In  aiming  kneeling,  the  left  elbow  rests  on  the  left 
knee,  point  of  elbow  in  front  o'f  kneecap.  In  aiming  sit- 
ting, the  elbows  are  supported  by  the  knees. 

In  aiming  lying  down,  raise  the  piece  with  both  hands; 
rest  on  both  elbows  and  press  the  butt  firmly  against  the 
right  shoulder. 

At  the  command  fire  press  the  finger  against  the  trig- 
ger; fire  without  deranging  the  aim  and  without  lower- 
ing or  turning  the  piece;  lower  the  piece  in  the  position 
of  Load  and  load. 

145.  To  continue  the  firing:  i,  AIM,  2.  Squad,  3. 
FIRE. 

Each  command  is  executed  as  previously  explained. 
Load  ('from  magazine)  is  executed  by  drawing  back  and 
thrusting  home  the  bolt  with  the  right  hand,  leaving  the 
safety  lock  at  the  "ready." 

To  Fire  at  Will 

146.  FIRE  AT  WILL, 

Each  man,  independently  of  the  others,  comes  to  the 
ready,  aims  carefully  and  deliberately  at  the  aiming  point 
or  target,  fires,  loads,  and  continues  the  firing  until  or- 
dered to  suspend  or  cease  firing. 

147.  To  increase  (decrease)  the  rate  of  fire  in  prog- 
ress the  instructor  shouts:  FASTER  {SLOWER), 


58  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Men  are  trained  to  fire  at  the  rate  of  about  three  shots 
per  minute  at  effective  ranges  and  five  or  six  at  close 
ranges,  devoting  the  minimum  o'f  time  to  loading  and 
the  maximum  to  deliberate  aiming.  To  illustrate  the 
necessity  for  deliberation,  and  to  habituate  men  to  com- 
bat conditions,  small  and  comparatively  indistinct  targets 
are  designated. 

To  Fire  by  Clip 

148.  CLIP  FIRE. 

Executed  in  the  same  manner  as  fire  at  will,  except 
that  each  man,  after  having  exhaused  the  cartridges  then 
in  the  piece,  suspends  firing. 

To  Suspend  Firing 

149.  The  instructor  blows  a  long  blast  of  the  whistle 
and  repeats  same,  if  necesary,  or  commands:  SUSPEND 
FIRING. 

Firing  stops;  pieces  are  held,  loaded  and  locked,  in 
a  position  of  readiness  for  instant  resumption  of  firing, 
rear  sights  unchanged.  The  men  continue  to  observe 
the  target  or  aiming  point,  or  the  place  at  which  the 
target  disappeared,  or  at  which  it  is  expected  to  reap- 
pear. 

The  whistle  signal  may  be  used  as  a  preliminary  to 
cease  firing. 

To  Cease  Firing 

150.  CEASE  FIRING. 

Firing  stops;  pieces  not  already  there  are  brought  to 
the  position  of  load;  those  not  loaded,  are  loaded;  sights 
are  laid,  pieces  are  locked  and  brought  to  the  order. 

Cease  firing  is  used  for  long  pauses,  to  prepare  'for 
changes  of  position,  or  to  steady  the  men. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SQUAD  59 

151.  Commands  for  suspending  or  ceasing  fire  may  be 
given  at  any  time  after  the  preparatory  command  for 
firing  whether  the  firing  has  actually  commenced  or  not. 

THE   USE   OF   COVER 

152.  The  recruit  should  be  given  careful  instruction  in 
the  individual  use  of  cover. 

It  should  be  impressed  upon  him  that,  in  taking  advan- 
tage of  natural  cover,  he  must  be  able  to  fire  easily  and 
effectively  upon  the  enemy;  if  advancing  on  an  enemy, 
he  must  do  so  steadily  and  as  rapidly  as  possible;  he 
must  conceal  himsel'f  as  much  as  possible  while  firing 
and  while  advancing.  While  setting  his  sight,  he  should 
be  under  cover  or  lying  prone. 

153.  To  teach  him  to  fire  easily  and  effectively,  at  the 
same  time  concealing  himself  from  the  view  of  the 
enemy,  he  is  practiced  in  simulated  firing  in  the  prone, 
sitting,  kneeling,  and  crouching  positions,  from  behind 
hillocks,  trees,  heaps  of  earth  or  rocks,  'from  depressions, 
gullies,  ditches,  doorways,  or  windows.  He  is  taught  to 
fire  around  the  right  side  of  his  concealment  whenever 
possible,  or,  when  this  is  not  possible,  to  rise  enough  to 
fire  over  the  top  of  his  concealment. 

When  these  details  are  understood,  he  is  required  to 
select  cover  with  reference  to  an  assumed  enemy  and  to 
place  himself  behind  it  in  proper  position  for  firing. 

154.  The  evil  of  remaining  too  long  in  one  place,  how- 
ever good  the  concealment,  should  be  explained.  He 
should  be  taught  to  advance  from  cover  to  cover,  select- 
ing cover  in  advance  before  leaving  his  concealment. 

It  should  be  impressed  upon  him  that  a  man  running 
rapidly  toward  an  enemy  furnishes  a  popr  target.  He 
should  be  trained  in  springing  from  a  prone  position  be- 
hind  concealment,   running   at  top   speed  to   cover  and 


6o         THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

throwing  himself  behind  it.  He  should  also  be  practiced 
in  advancing  from  cover  to  cover  by  crawling,  or  by 
lying  on  the  left  side,  rifle  grasped  in  the  right  hand, 
and  pushing  himself  forward  with  the  right  leg. 

155.  He  should  be  taught  that,  when  fired  on  while  act- 
ing independently  he  should  drop  to  the  ground,  seek 
cover,  and  then  endeavor  to  locate  his  enemy. 

156.  The  instruction  of  the  recruit  in  the  use  of  cover 
is  continued  in  the  combat  exercises  of  the  company,  but 
he  must  then  be  taught  that  the  proper  advance  of  the 
platoon  or  company  and  the  effectiveness  of  its  fire  is 
cri  greater  importance  than  the  question  of  cover  for 
individuals.  He  should  also  be  taught  that  he  may  not 
move  about  or  shift  his  position  in  the  firing  line  except 
the  better  to  see  the  target. 

OBSERVATION 

157.  The  ability  to  use  his  eyes  accurately  is  of  great 
importance  to  the  soldier.  The  recruit  should  be  trained 
in  observing  his  surroundings  from  positions  and  when 
on  the  march. 

He  should  be  practiced  in  pointing  out  and  naming 
military  features  of  the  ground ;  in  distinguishing  between 
living  beings;  in  counting  distant  groups  of  objects  or 
beings;  in  recognizing  colors  and  forms. 

158.  In  the  training  of  men  in  the  mechanism  of  the 
firing  line,  they  should  be  practiced  in  repeating  to  one 
another  target  and  aiming-point  designations  and  in 
quickly  locating  and  pointing  out  a  designated  target. 
They  should  be  taught  to  distinguish,  "from  a  prone  posi- 
tion, distant  objects,  particularly  troops,  both  with  the 
naked  eye  and  with  field  glasses.  Similarly,  they  should 
be  trained  in  estimating  distances. 


CHAPTER   VI 

SCHOOL  OF  THE    COMPANY 

Each  member  of  the  squad  should  remember  that  the 
cquad  is  the  unit  in  making  up  the  company.  For  ex- 
ample, when  the  command  squads  RIGHT  is  given,  each 
squad  executes  the  movement  precisely  as  in  the  School 
of  the  Squad.  If  each  squad  executes  the  movement 
correctly,  then  the  movement  will  be  correct  for  the 
entire   company. 

Corporals  should  always  see  that  their  squads  execute 
each  movement  correctly.  The  sergeants  should  also 
remember  that  they  are  not  figureheads,  but  have  a  very 
important  duty  to  perform.  They  should  be  alert  and 
see  that  the  men  of  their  platoon  correctly  execute  each 
movement. 

The  lieutenants  can  be  of  especial  help  to  the  captain 
by  being  ever  on  the  watch  to  assist  and  instruct  the  non- 
commissioned officers.  'The  captain  will  do  well  to  give 
his  lieutenants  plenty  of  leeway  and  then  hold  them 
responsible  for  results. 

^  159.  The  captain  is  responsible  for  the  theoretical  and 
practical  instruction  of  his  officers  and  noncommissioned 
officers,  not  only  in  the  duties  of  their  respective  grades, 
but  in  those  of  the  next  higher  grades. 

160.  The  company  in  line  is  formed  in  double  rank 
with  the  men  arranged,  as  far  as  practicable,  according 
to  height  from  right  to  left,  the  tallest  on  the  right. 

The  original  division  into  squads  is  effected  by  the 
command:  COUNT  OFF.    The  squads,  successively  from 

1  Corresponds  to  the  paragraph  numbers  in  the  Infantry 
Drill  Regulations. 

61 


62 
46 


THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


LINE    (l6Sqds..4PiaT^  *  [ 

i'-R-AT.  3-PLAT.  3 


"   I   'I    I    I   I   I   I   I   I  1   I   I   I  I   I       I   I    I   I    I   I   II  j   1    It   1  I   I   t    I   I   I   I   I    I   I   I   I   I   I   I    I   I   t   I   I   T  I   I   H 

2 


CX)LUMNor 

1  ■»    ^  Plats) 


SQOS  COLUMN 


I 


I  I  I  I  I 

tri  I  1  U> 
Fl  I  1  Itl 


(1  I  1  H 


L^   I   t  t 

■'■'■— 


Of  PLATOONS 


41  OOSqds 


2  Plots) 


Qfl^ilVliiL^iiMiiL^iiaa 

M  I  1  1  I  I  I  M  1  1  I  1,1  I  I  1  I  n 
2 
S  (t  (S  * 


aa^  M  LI  M  ti  1 1  ir^  rrPT 
1 '  I'  III''  I  ■','«''' ' 

2 


Rate  II. 
THE.  COMPANY 

CAPTAIN  I 

l»'OCUT  I 

f^CuT.  I 

I"  StRGT.  I 

lXADeR.y»PUlT,  I 

cuioe  I 

SQuAOiXAOCM  I 

MuSlCiAN  I 

OTmCRS  in  ONt 

Of  fiiX-CtOStHS  I 


PRIVATC  O 

>Si<_Mv/<CC%<ki_S    AAC   Oi&« 
TAIStCES     I'M    PM^CES     ■ 


UNEor  PLATOONS 


3 

r*«^AT 


(liSqds.-6Piats) 


<  I  I  I  > 


SKIRMISH    UNE: -HALTED.  (16  SqdS. -4Pk3ts) 
***»OT.  ypukr  2-«\AT 


T   r 

••      I  Am 


9« 


Fig.  13 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   COMPANY  63 

the  right,  count  off  as  in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  cor- 
porals placing  themselves  as  Nos.  4  of  the  front  rank. 
If  the  left  squad  contains  less  than  six  men,  it  is  either 
increased  to  that  number  by  transfers  from  other  squads 
or  is  broken  up  and  its  members  assigned  to  other  squads 
and  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers.  These  squad  organ- 
izations are  maintained,  by  transfers  if  necessary,  until 
the  company  becomes  so  reduced  in  numbers  as  to  neces- 
sitate a  new  division  into  squads.  No  squad  will  contain 
less  than  six  men. 

161.  The  company  is  further  divided  into  two,  three, 
or  four  platoons,  each  consisting  of  not  less  than  two  nor 
more  than  four  squads.  In  garrison  or  ceremonies  the 
strength  of  platoons  may  exceed  four  squads. 

162.  At  the  formation  of  the  company  the  platoons  or 
squads  are  numbered  consecutively  from  right  to  left 
and  these  designations  do  not  change. 

For  convenience  in  giving  commands  and  for  reference, 
the  designations,  right,  center,  left,  when  in  line,  and 
leading,  center,  rear,  when  in  column,  are  applied  to 
platoons  or  squads.  These  designations  apply  to  the 
actual  right,  left,  center,  head,  or  rear,  in  whatever  direc- 
tion the  company  may  be  facing.  The  center  squad  is 
the  middle  or  right  middle  squad  of  the  company. 

The  designation  "So-and-so's"  squad  or  platoon  may 
also  be  used. 

163.  Platoons  are  assigned  to  the  lieutenants  and  non- 
commissioned officers,  in  order  of  rank,  as  follows:  I, 
right;  2,  left;  3,  center   (right  center)  ;  4,  left  center. 

The  noncommissioned  officers  next  in  rank  are  assigned 
as  guides,  one  to  each  platoon.  If  sergeants  still  remain, 
they  are  assigned  to  platoons  as  additional  guides.  When 
the  platoon  is  deployed,  its  guide,  or  guides,  accompany 
the  platoon  leader. 


64         THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

During  battle,  these  assignments  are  not  changed; 
vacancies  are  filled  by  noncommissioned  officers  of  the 
platoon,  or  by  the  nearest  available  officers  or  noncom- 
missioned officers  arriving  with  reenforcing  troops. 

164.  The  first  sergeant  is  never  assigned  as  a  guide. 
When  not  commanding  a  platoon,  he  is  posted  as  a  file 
closer  opposite  the  third  file  from  the  outer  flank  of  the 
first  platoon;  and  when  the  company  is  deployed  he 
accompanies  the  captain. 

The  quartermaster  sergeant,  when  present,  is  assigned 
according  to  his  rank  as  a  sergeant. 

Enlisted  men  below  the  grade  of  sergeant,  armed  with 
the  rifle,  are  in  ranks  unless  serving  as  guides ;  when  not 
so  armed,  they  are  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers. 

Musicians,  when  required  to  play,  are  at  the  head  of 
the  column.  When  the  company  is  deployed,  they  accom- 
pany the  captain. 

165.  The  company  executes  the  halt,  rests,  facings,  steps 
and  marchings,  manual  of  arms,  loadings  and  firings, 
takes  intervals  and  distances  and  assembles,  increases  and 
diminishes  intervals,  resumes  attention,  obliques,  resumes 
the  direct  march,  preserves  alignments,  kneels,  lies  down, 
rises,  stacks  and  takes  arms,  as  explained  in  the  Schools 
of  the  Soldier  and  the  Squad,  substituting  in  the  com- 
mands company  for  squad. 

The  same  rule  applies  to  platoons,  detachments,  details, 
etc.,  substituting  their  designation  for  squad  in  the  com- 
mands. In  the  same  manner  these  execute  the  movements 
prescribed  for  the  company,  whenever  possible,  substi- 
tuting their  designation  for  company  in  the  commands. 

166.  A  company  so  depleted  as  to  make  division  into 
platoons  impracticable  is  led  by  the  captain  as  a  single 
platoon,  but  retains  the  designation  of  company.  The 
lieutenants  and  first  sergeant  assist  in  fire  control;  the 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY  65 

other  sergeants  place  themselves  in  the  firing  line  as  skir- 
mishers. 

CLOSE    ORDER 

Rules 

167.  The  guides  of  the  right  and  left,  or  leading  and 
rear,  platoons,  are  the  right  and  left,  or  leading  and  rear, 
guides,  respectively,  of  the  company  when  it  is  in  line 
or  in  column  of  squads.  Other  guides  are  in  the  line  of 
file  closers. 

In  platoon  movements  the  post  of  the  platoon  guide  is 
at  the  head  of  the  platoon,  if  the  platoon  is  in  column, 
and  on  the  guiding  flank  if  in  line.  When  a  platoon  has 
two  guides  their  original  assignment  to  flanks  of  the 
platoon  does  not  change. 

168.  The  guides  of  a  column  of  squads  place  themselves 
on  the  flank  opposite  the  file  closers.  To  change  the 
guides  and  file  closers  to  the  other  flank,  the  captain  com- 
mands: I.  File  closers  on  left  (right)  flank;  2.  MARCH. 
The  file  closers  dart  through  the  column;  the  captain, 
and  guides  change. 

In  columns  of  squads,  each  rank  preserves  the  align- 
ment toward  the  side  of  the  guide. 

169.  Men  in  the  line  of  file  closers  do  not  execute  the 
loadings  or  firings. 

Guides  and  enlisted  men  in  the  line  of  file  closers  exe- 
cute the  manual  of  arms  during  the  drill  unless  specially 
excused,  when  they  remain  at  the  order.  During  cere- 
monies they  execute  all  movements. 

170.  In  taking  intervals  and  distances,  unless  otherwise 
directed,  the  right  and  left  guides,  at  the  first  command, 
place  themselves  in  the  line  of  file  closers,  and,  with 
them,  take  a  distance  of  4  paces  from  the  rear  rank.  In 
taking  intervals,  at  the  command  march,  the  file  closers 

6 


66  THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

face  to  the  flank  and  each  steps  off  with  the  file  nearest 
him.  In  assembling  the  guides  and  file  closers  resume 
their  positions  in  line. 

171.  In  movements  executed  simultaneously  by  platoons 
(as  platoons  right  or  platoons,  column  right),  platoon 
leaders  repeat  the  preparatory  command  {platoon  right, 
etc.),  applicable  to  their  respective  platoons.  The  com- 
mand of  execution  is  given  by  the  captain  only. 

To  Form  the  Company 

172.  At  the  sounding  of  the  assembly  the  first  sergeant 
take  position  6  paces  in  front  of  where  the  center  of 
the  company  is  to  be,  f^ces  it,  draws  saber,  and  com- 
mands: FALL  IN, 

The  right  guide  of  the  company  places  himself,  facing 
to  the  front,  where  the  right  of  the  company  is  to  rest, 
and  at  such  point  that  the  center  of  the  company  will  be 
6  paces  from  and  opposite  the  first  sergeant;  the  squads 
form  in  their  proper  places  on  the  left  of  the  right  guide, 
superintended  by  the  other  sergeants,  who  then  take  their 
posts. 

The  first  sergeant  commands:  REPORT.  Remaining 
in  position  at  the  order,  the  squad  leaders,  in  succession 
from  the  right,  salute  and  report:  All  present;  or.  Pri- 
vate {s)  absent.    The  first  sergeant  does  not  return 

the  salute  of  the  squad  leaders;  he  then  commands: 
I.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3.  Order,  4.  ARMS,  faces  about, 
salutes  the  captain,  reports:  Sir,  all  present  or  accounted 
for,  or  the  names  of  the  unauthorized  absentees,  and, 
without  command,  takes  his  post. 

If  the  company  can  not  be  formed  by  squads,  the  first 
sergeant  commands:  i.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3.  Right 
shoulder,  4.  ARMS,  and  calls  the  roll.  Each  man,  as  his 
name  is  called,  answers  here  and  executes  order  arms. 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   COMPANY  67 

The  sergeant  then  effects  the  division  into  squads  and 
reports  the  company  as  prescribed  above. 

The  captain  places  himself  12  paces  in  front  of  the 
center  of,  and  facing,  the  company  in  time  to  receive  the 
report  of  the  first  sergeant,  whose  salute  he  returns,  and 
then  draws  saber. 

The  lieutenants  take  their  posts  when  the  first  sergeant 
has  reported  and  draws  saber  with  the  captain.  The 
company,  if  not  under  arms,  is  formed  in  like  manner, 
omitting  reference  to  arms. 

173.  For  the  instruction  of  platoon  leaders  and  guides, 
the  company,  when  small,  may  be  formed  in  single  rank. 
In  this  formation  close  order  movements  only  are  exe- 
cuted. The  single  rank  executes  all  movements  as  ex- 
plained for  the  front  rank  of  a  company. 

To  Dismiss  the  Company 

174.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  the  captain  directs  the 
first  sergeant:  Dismiss  the  Company.  The  officers  fall 
out;  the  first  sergeant  places  himself  faced  to  the  front, 
3  paces  to  the  front  and  2  paces  from  the  nearest  flank 
of  the  company,  salutes,  faces  toward  opposite  flank  of 
the  company,  and  commands:  i.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS, 
3.  Port,  4.  ARMS,  5.  DISMISSED. 

Alignments 

175.  The  alignments  are  executed  as  prescribed  in  the 
School  of  the  Squad,  the  guide  being  established  instead 
of  the  flank  file.  The  rear-rank  man  of  the  flank  file  keeps 
his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front  and  covers  his  file  leader. 

At  each  alignment  the  captain  places  himself  in  pro- 
longation of  the  line,  2  paces  from  and  facing  the  flank 
toward  which  the  dress  is  made,  verifies  the  alignment, 
and  commands:  FRONT, 


68  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Platoon  leaders  take  a  like  position  when  required  to 
verify  alignments. 

Movements  on  the  Fixed  Pivot 
176.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  the  company:  i.  Company 
right   (left),  2.  MARCH,  3.   Company,  4.  HALT;  or, 
3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH. 


.     f    *   . 


*    f    f    *    t     '    .' 


/    ''  '    '  /   /   /   /  '     '   , 

r /////////  /., 


.'  * 


f   *  * 
*   f   » 


t   * 


bL*  V  X'X'fcL  N  V  \  H  \'  V  N'fci:  \  V  V  fci  \  \     I 

A 
(Company  right) 

Fig.  13.— a  shows  No.  i  of  the  front  rank  or  the  right-flank 
man  faced  to  the  right  in  marching,  and  marking  time.  It 
also  shows  the  other  men  of  the  front  rank  faced  to  the  right 
oblique,  the  dotted  lines  showing  the  path  each  takes  to  place 
himself  abreast  of  the  right-flank  man.  The  rear  rank  are 
shown  in  their  original  position. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY  69 

At  the  second  command  the  right-flank  man  in  the 
front  rank  faces  to  the  right  in  marching  and  marks 
time ;  the  other  front-rank  men  obHque  to  the  right,  place 
themselves  abreast  of  the  pivot,  and  mark  time ;  in  the 
rear  rank  the  third  man  from  the  right,  follov^^ed  in 
column  by  the  second  and  first,  moves  straight  to  the  ^* 
front  until  in  rear  of  his  front-rank  man,  when  all 
face  to  the  right  in  marching,  and  mark  time ;  the  re-  ij 
maining  men  of  the  rear  rank  move  straight  to  the  ^4 
front  4  paces,  oblique  to  the  right,  place  themselves  \y 
abreast  of  the  third  man,  cover  their  file  leaders,  and  U 
mark  time;  the  right  guide  steps  back,  takes  post  on  U 
the  flank,  and  marks  time.  y 

The  fourth  command  is  given  when  the  last  man  is  .^ 
I  pace  in  rear  of  the  new  line.  u 

The  command  halt  may  be  given  at  any  time  after  ^4 
the  new  position.  Each  of  the  others  halts  upon  ar-  J3 
riving  on  the  line,  aligns  himself  to  the  right,  and  1 2 
executes  front  without  command.  J^ 

177.  Being  in  line,  to  form  columns  of  platoons,        . 
or    the    reverse:     i.    Platoons    right     (left),    2.       jj 

\i 

^__  <4 


X  ^      " 

000000000000000000000000 

492143214321432143214321 

B 
(Company  right) 

Fig.  13.---B  shows  the  front  rank  after  having  executed 
Company  right.  It  also  shows  No.  3  of  rear  rank  from  the 
right  marching  straight  to  the  front  until  in  the  rear  of  his 
front-rank  man,  followed  in  column  by  Nos.  2  and  i.  The 
rest  of  the  rear  rank  are  shown  after  they  have  marched 
straight  to  the  front  four  paces;  the  O's  represent  the  origi- 
nal position  of  the  rear  rank. 


70  THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

MARCH,  3.  Company,  4.  HALT;  or,  3.  Forward,  4. 
MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  company. 

Before  forming  line  the  captain  sees  that  the  guides 
on  the  flank  toward  which  the  movement  is  to  be  exe- 

/         3 1 

3| 
2| 
li 
4< 

3| 
Z\ 
ll 

3| 
Z\ 


yy. 


C 
(Company  right) 

Fig.  13. — C  shows  Nos.  i,  2  and  3  of  the  rear  rank  from 
the  right  faced  to  the  right  and  marking  time.  It  also  shows 
the  rest  of  the  rear  rank  after  they  have  marched  straight  to 
the  front  four  paces  and  taken  the  right  oblique  position, 
the  dotted  lines  showing  the  path  each  takes  to  place  him- 
self abreast  of  the  No.  3  man  from  the  right  in  the  rear  rank. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY  71 

Company  in  Line 

3r(/ P/atoon  2n<f  P/atooo  1st  P/atoon 

A 


/////      ////'      /y/// 

fct'xVVk' W  I  fci'\  VVk'x'x'' I   fci'x'vx'fci'x'x  I 


■"  *"*"    ' 

" 

B 

< 

< 

<r 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

<1 

< 

< 

T 

1    ■ 

"t" 

1 

T.     ! 

T 

1 

T 

1 

T       1 

T 

1 

t 

1 

t        1 

00000000 

000 

00000000 

c 

(Plat( 

3ons  right) 

Fig.  14. — A  shows  the  company  in  line  with  three  platoons 
of  two  squads  each.  B  shows  the  right-flank  man  of  each 
platoon  faced  in  marching  and  marking  time.  It  also  shows 
the  other  front-rank  men  of  each  platoon  after  they  have 
taken  the  right  oblique,  the  dotted  lines  showing  the  path 
each  takes  to  place  himself  abreast  of  the  right-flank  man, 
C  shows  the  front-rank  men  of  each  platoon  in  proper  posi- 
tion. It  also  shows  the  third  man  in  the  rear  rank  from 
the  right  in  each  platoon  after  he  has  marched  straight  to 
the  front,  followed  in  column  by  Nos.  2  and  i  of  the  rear 
rank  until  opposite  their  file  leaders.  This  figure  also  shows 
the  rest  of  the  rear-rank  men  after  they  have  marched 
straight  to  the  front  four  paces. 


72 


THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 


cuted  are  covering.     This  is  effected  by  previously  an- 
nouncing the  guide  to  that  flank. 


////   • 

I  I 
t  I 
I    I 


xn'x'x'V   < 


l_. 


I  < 
I  I 
I  I 
I  I 
I  < 
I  I 
\  I 
I  I 

E 


VN'NX  X' 


I 
I 
I 

I  I 
I  I 
I      I 


!^ 


(Platoons  right) 

Fig.  14.— D  shows  the  three  men  on  the  right  in  the  rear 
rank  in  each  platoon  faced  to  the  right  and  marking  time  in 
place.  It  also  shows  the  other  men  of  the  rear  rank  after 
having  marched  straight  to  the  front  four  paces  and  taken 
the  right  oblique  position,  the  dotted  lines  showing  the  path 
each  takes  to  reach  his  position  in  the  new  line.  E  shows 
the  three  platoons  in  column  of  platoons  after  "Platoons 
right"  has  been  executed. 

178.  Being  in  line,  to  form  column  of  squads,  or  the 
reverse;  or,  being  in  line  of  platoons,  to  form  column 
of    platoons,    or   the    reverse:    i.    Squads   right    (left), 

2.  MARCH;  or,    i.  Squads  right    (left),  2.  MARCH, 

3.  Company,  4.  HALT. 


SCHOOL   OF  THE    COMPANY  73 

Executed  by  each  squad  as  described  in  the  "School  of 
the  Squad." 

If  the  company  or  platoons  be  formed  in  line  toward 
the  side  of  the  file  closers,  they  dart  through  the  column 
and  take  posts  in  rear  of  the  company  at  the  second  com- 
mand. If  the  column  of  squads  be  formed  from  line, 
the  file  closers  take  posts  on  the  pivot  flank,  abreast  of 
and  4  inches  from  the  nearest  rank. 

Movements  on  the  Moving  Pivot 

179.  Being  in  line,  to  change  direction:  i.  Right  (Left) 
turn,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH. 

Executed  as  described  in  the  "School  of  the  Squad," 
except  that  the  men  do  not  glance  toward  the  marching 
flank  and  that  all  take  the  full  step  at  the  fourth  com- 
mand. The  right  guide  is  the  pivot  of  the  front  rank. 
Each  rear-rank  man  obliques  on  the  same  ground  as  his 
file  leader. 

180.  Being  in  column  of  platoons,  to  change  direction: 
I.  Column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  leading  platoon 
commands:  Right  turn.  At  the  command  march  the 
leading  platoon  turns  to  the  right  on  moving  pivot;  its 
leader  commands:  i.  Forward,  2.  MARCH,  on  comple- 
tion of  the  turn.  Rear  platoons  march  squarely  up  to  the 
turning  point  of  the  leading  platoon  and  turn  at  command 
of  their  leaders. 

181.  Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  change  direction: 
I.  Column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  second  command  the  front  rank  of  the  leading 
squad  turns  to  the  right  on  moving  pivot  as  in  the  School 
of  the  Squad;  the  other  ranks,  without  command,  turn 
successively  on  the  same  ground  and  in  a  similar  manner. 


74  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

182.  Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  form  line  of  pla- 
toons or  the  reverse:  i.  Platoons,  column  right  (left), 
2.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  company. 

183.  Being  in  line,  to  form  column  of  squads  and  change 
direction:  i.  Squads  right  (left),  column  right  (left), 
2.  MARCH;  or,  i.  Right  (left)  by  squads,  2.  MARCH. 

In  the  first  case  the  right  squad  initiates  the  column 
right  as  soon  as  it  has  completed  the  squad  right. 

In  the  second  case,  at  the  command  march,  the  right 
squad  marches  forzuard;  the  remainder  of  the  company 
executes  squads  right,  column  left,  and  follows  the  right 
squad.  The  right  guide,  when  he  has  posted  himself  in 
front  of  the  right  squad,  takes  four  short  steps,  then  re- 
sumes the  full  step;  the  right  squad  conforms. 

184.  Being  in  line,  to  form  line  of  platoons:  i.  Squads 
right  (left),  platoons,  column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH; 
or,  I.  Platoons,  right  (left)  by  squads,  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  company 
in  the  preceding  paragraph. 


Facing  or  Marching  to  the  Rear 

185.  Being  in  line,  line  of  platoons,  or  in  column  of 
platoons  or  squads,  to  face  or  march  to  the  rear:  i.  Squads 
right  (left)  about,  2.  MARCH;  or,  i.  Squads  right  (left) 
about,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Company,  4.  HALT. 

Executed  by  each  squad  as  described  in  the  "School  of 
the  Squad.'' 

If  the  company  or  platoons  be  in  column  of  squads,  the 
file  closers  turn  about  toward  the  column  and  take  their 
posts;  if  in  line,  each  darts  through  the  nearest  interval 
between  squads. 


Ill    / 1  I  I  I  I  I  I  I 

X.-nV  /  I    I  I    I    I    I    I    I  „ 

\y/i  I  I  I  I  I  I  I 

iii  /  >  I  >  I  >j  >  I 

2    5  5     w     2 


;,l-M.,^H  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  M    s 

\VP*M   I  I   I   I   I   M   I  I     3 

V?M  I  I  I  I  I  M  I  r^ 

■■^l»>  I  U   LI   fe^l   fe.1     ^ 

3     S  S     3     *2     iS 


I   I  i   I  I   I  I   I  I   I    I   I 

1   I  I   t  I   I  I    i  I   I    I   I 

I   I  I   I  I   I  I   I  I   I    I   I'i 

>j  >j  LI  y  y  >3i 

^             CO  O  ^  u*      -    ^ 


^  ^i  o   ^^  H 


^  S  O  rt 


O   >  <u 
<u       u 


o 

P.  >< 


^  w  jH   O  CO 
c   !«  u  u"*-. 

B      ""-OS 


°  ^  '^  "^  ><  g" 

<  ti  o  c  G 

o  <u  >  *y  f. 

•^  (u  <u  «2  (11 


75 


76  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

i86.  To  march  to  the  rear  for  a  few  paces:  i.  About, 
2.  FACE,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH. 

If  in  line,  the  guides  place  themselves  in  the  rear  rank, 
now  the  front  rank;  the  file  closers,  on  facing  about, 
maintain  their  relative  positions.  No  other  movement  is 
executed  until  the  line  is  faced  to  the  original  front. 

On  Right  (Left)  into  Line 

187.  Being  in  column  of  platoons  or  squads,  to  form 
line  on  right  or  left:  i.  On  right  (left)  into  line,  2. 
MARCH,  3.  Company,  4.  HALT,  5.  FRONT. 

At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  leading  unit 
commands :  Right  turn.  The  leaders  of  the  other  units 
command :  Forward,  if  at  a  halt.  At  the  second  command 
the  leading  unit  turns  to  the  right  on  moving  pivot.  The 
command  halt  is  given  when  the  leading  unit  has  ad- 
vanced the  desired  distance  in  the  new  direction ;  it  halts ; 
its  leader  then  commands:  Right  dress. 

The  units  in  rear  continue  to  march  straight  to  the 
front;  each,  when  opposite  the  right  of  its  place  in  line, 
executes  right  turn  at  the  command  of  its  leader;  each 
is  halted  on  the  line  at  the  command  of  its  leader,  who 
then  commands:  Right  dress.  *M1  dress  on  the  first  unit 
in  line. 

If  executed  in  double  time,  the  leading  squad  marches 
in  double  time  until  halted. 

Front  into  Line 

188.  Being  in  column  of  platoons  or  squads,  to  form 
line  to  the  front:  i.  Right  (Left)  front  into  line, 
2.  MARCH,  3.  Company,  4.  HALT,  5.  FRONT. 

At  the  first  command  the  leaders  of  the  units  in  rear 
of  the  leading  one  command :  Right  oblique.    If  at  a  halt, 


t 


(2) ^t 


B 


-  —  — 

Ts) 

T7 

_t_ 

"" 

~6T 

ruZZZi:         /»'/'  (2)ZZIZ 

'^\\\\  ^\',XX,K,  <3)^'^/^^y 

,>\\\  ^fc^»X.  ^^Vx'Vx' 

^^\\\\  *^VXX,X,  v'v'v' 

(6)^'^^'^  r«\^»>/  <^lv'vV' 


F 

(Right  front  into  line) 

Fig.  i6. — A  shows  the  company  in  column  of  squads.  B 
shows  the  leading  squad  marching  straight  to  the  front  and 
all  the  other  squads  after  they  have  taken  the  right  oblique 
position.  C  shows,  in  addition,  the  path  each  man  takes  along 
the  dotted  lines.  D  shows  the  second  squad  after  they  have 
resumed  the  original  direction,  being  opposite  their  positions 
in  line.  It  also  shows  the  others  still  obliquing  to  the  right. 
E  shows  all  of  the  squads  faced  in  the  original  direction  and 
marching  to  their  place  in  the  line.  F  shows  the  company 
after  Right  front  into  line  has  been  executed. 

77 


78  THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

the  leader  of  the  leading  unit  commands:  Forward.  At 
the  second  command  the  leading  unit  moves  straight  for- 
ward; the  rear  units  oblique  as  indicated.  The  command 
halt  is  given  when  the  leading  unit  has  advanced  the 
desired  distance ;  it  halts ;  its  leader  then  commands :  Left 
dress.  Each  of  the  rear  units,  when  opposite  its  place 
in  line,  resumes  the  original  direction  at  the  command 
of  its  leader;  each  is  halted  on  the  line  at  the  command 
of  its  leader,  who  then  commands:  Left  dress.  All  dress 
on  the  first  unit  in  line. 

189.  Being  in  column  of  squads  to  form  column  of 
platoons,  or  being  in  line  of  platoons,  to  form  the  com- 
pany in  line:  i.  Platoons,  right  (left)  front  into  line, 
2.  MARCH,  3.  Company,  4.  HALT,  5.  FRONT. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  com- 
pany. In  forming  the  company  in  line,  the  dress  is  on 
the  left  squad  of  the  left  platoon.  If  forming  column  of 
platoons,  platoon  leaders  verify  the  alignment.before  tak- 
ing their  posts;  the  captain  commands  front  when  the 
alignments  have  been  verified. 

When  front  into  line  is  executed  in  double  time  the 
commands  for  halting  and  aligning  are  omitted  and  the 
guide  is  toward  the  side  of  the  first  unit  in  line. 


AT  EASE  AND   ROUTE   STEP 

190.  The  column  of  squads  is  the  habitual  column  of 
route,  but  route  step  and  at  ease  are  applicable  to  any 
marching  formation. 

191.  To  march  at  route  step:  i.  Route  step,  2.  MARCH. 
Sabers  are  carried  at  will  or  in  the  scabbard;  the  men 

carry  their  pieces  at  will,  keeping  the  muzzles  elevated; 
they  are  not  required  to  preserve  silence,  nor  to  keep  the 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY  79 

step.     The  ranks  cover  and  preserve  their  distance.     If 
halted  from  route  step,  the  men  stand  at  rest. 

192.  To  march  at  ease:  i.  At  ease,  2.  MARCH. 

The  company  marches  as  in  route  step,  except  that 
silence  is  preserved ;  when  halted,  the  men  remain  at  ease. 

193.  Marching  at  route  step  or  at  ease:  i.  Company, 
2.  ATTENTION. 

At  the  command  attention  the  pieces  are  brought  to 
the  right  shoulder  and  the  cadenced  step  in  quick  time  is 
resumed. 


TO   DIMINISH  THE   FRONT   OF  A  COLUMN   OF 
SQUADS 

194.  Being  in  column  of  squads:  i.  Right  {Left)  by 
twos,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  all  files  except  the  tv^o  right 
files  of  the  leading  squad  execute  in  place  halt;  the  two 
left  files  of  the  leading  squad  oblique  to  the  right  when 
disengaged  and  follow  the  right  files  at  the  shortest  prac- 
ticable distance.  The  remaining  squads  follow  succes- 
sively in  like  manner. 

195.  Being  in  column  of  squads  or  twos:  I.  Right 
{Left)  by  file,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  all  files  execute  in  place  halt, 
except  the  right  file  of  the  leading  two  or  squad.  The 
left  file  or  files  of  the  leading  two  or  squad  oblique  suc- 
cessively to  the  right  when  disengaged  and  each  follows 
the  file  on  its  right  at  the  shortest  practicable  distance. 
The  remaining  twos  or  squads  follow  successively  in  like 
manner. 

196.  Being  in  column  of  files  or  twos,  to  form  column 
of  squads :  or,  being  in  column  of  files,  to  form  column  of 


8o         THE  CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

twos:   I.  Squads    {Twos),  right    {left)    front  into  line, 

2.  MARCH.  

At  the  command  march,  the  leading  ^ 

file  or  files  halt.    The  remainder  of  the  

squad,  or  two,  obliques  to  the  right  and  ^— 

halts  on  line  with  the  leading  file  or  files.  __ 

The  remaining  squads  or  twos  close  up  —  — 

and   successively   form  —  — 

in  rear  of  the  first  in                  ^  j^  ^  — 


like  manner. 


.1)1::  I        "^ 


(4)^-       -  (4)^ 


(5)3111        (5)3: 


C 


Fig.  17. — A  shows  the  company  in  column  of  squads.  B 
shows  the  first  squad  executing  right  by  twos.  Observe  that 
Nos.  I  and  2  of  both  front  and  rear  rank  keep  the  same  di- 
rection, that  is,  straight  to  the  front,  as  in  column  of  squads, 
while  Nos.  3  and  4  of  both  ranks  oblique  to  the  right,  Nos. 
3  and  4  of  the  front  rank  moving  as  indicated  by  the  dotted 
lines  into  positions  in  the  rear  of  Nos.  i  and  2  of  the  rear 
rank,  and  Nos.  3  and  4  of  the  rear  rank  moving  similarly  and 
taking  up  positions  in  the  rear  of  Nos.  3  and  4  of  the  front 
rank.  Each  squad  executes  this  movement  in  the  same  man- 
ner. C  shows  the  company  in  column  of  twos.  To  reform 
column  of  squads,  each  squad  executes  left  front  into  line. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY  8i 

The  movement  described  in  this  paragraph  will  be 
ordered  right  or  left,  so  as  to  restore  the  files  to  their 
normal  relative  positions  in  the  two  or  squad. 

197.  The  movements  prescribed  in  the  three  preceding 
paragraphs  are  difficult  of  execution  at  attention  and  have 
no  value  as  disciplinary  exercises. 

198.  Marching  by  twos  or  files  can  not  be  executed 
without  serious  delay  and  waste  of  road  space.  Every 
reasonable  precaution  will  be  taken  to  obviate  the  neces- 
sity for  these  formations. 

EXTENDED    ORDER 
Rules  for  Deployment 

199.  The  command  guide  right  {left  or  center)  indi- 
cates the  base  squad  for  the  deployment;  if  in  line  it 
designates  the  actual  right  {left  or  center)  squad;  if  in 
column  the  command  guide  right  {left)  designates  the 
leading  squad,  and  the  command  guide  center  designates 
the  center  squad.  After  the  deployment  is  completed, 
the  guide  is  center  without  command,  unless  otherwise 
ordered. 

200.  At  the  preparatory  command  for  forming  skirmish 
line,  from  either  column  of  squads  or  line,  each  squad 
leader  (except  the  leader  of  the  base  squad,  when  his 
squad  does  not  advance),  cautions  his  squad,  follow  me 
or  hy  the  right  {left)  flank,  as  the  case  may  be;  at  the 
command  march,  he  steps  in  front  of  his  squad  and  leads 
it  to  its  place  in  line. 

201.  Having  given  the  command  for  forming  skirmish 
line,  the  captain,  if  necessary,  indicates  to  the  corporal 
of  the  base  squad  the  point  on  which  the  squad  is  to 
march;  the  corporal  habitually  looks  to  the  captain  for 
such  directions. 

7 


32  THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

202.  The  base  squad  is  deployed  as  soon  as  it  has  suffi- 
cient interval.  The  other  squads  are  deployed  as  they 
arrive  on  the  general  line;  each  corporal  halts  in  his 
place  in  line  and  commands  or  signals,  as  skirmishers; 
the  squad  deploys  and  halts  abreast  of  him. 

If  tactical  considerations  demand  it,  the  squad  is  de- 
ployed before  arriving  on  the  line. 

203.  Deployed  lines  preserve  a  general  alignment 
toward  the  guide.  Within  their  respective  fronts,  indi- 
viduals or  units  march  so  as  best  to  secure  cover  or  to 
facilitate  the  advance,  but  the  general  and  orderly  prog- 
ress of  the  whole  is  paramount. 

On  halting,  a  deployed  line  faces  to  the  front  (direc- 
tion of  the  enemy)  in  all  cases  and  takes  advantage  of 
cover,  the  men  lying  down  if  necessary. 

204.  The  company  in  skirmish  line  advances,  halts, 
moves  by  the  flank,  or  to  the  rear,  obliques,  resumes  the 
direct  march,  passes  from  quick  to  double  time  and  the 
reverse  by  the  same  commands  and  in  a  similar  manner 
as  in  close  order ;  if  at  a  halt,  the  movement  by  the  flank 
or  to  the  rear  is  executed  by  the  same  commands  as  when 
marching.  Company  right  {left,  half  right,  half  left)  is 
executed  as  explained  for  the  front  rank,  skirmish  inter- 
vals being  maintained. 

205.  A  platoon  or  other  part  of  the  company  is  de- 
ployed and  marched  in  the  same  manner  as  the  company, 
substituting  in  the  commands,  platoon  {detachment,  etc.) 
for  company. 

Deployments 

206.  Being  in  line,  to  form  skirmish  line  to  the  front: 
I.  As  skirmishers,  guide  right  {left  or  center),  2. 
MARCH. 

If   marching,   the   corporal   of  the   base   squad  moves 


1'5.-M  bfl«« 


K  —  —                                                                 C)  bp:S  e  5* 

i  ^  lU   rt  c  c 

I  2  w  S  i!  S 

P  I    —  —                                                        c    Wj2  c  bo  a> 

1  —                                                    2        ^  "2  cxi 

I  ^-^^'  —  —                                               ^-x^  ^Ji  2 


*t  — 


O  1n   ,„   rt   5 


I                                                     P  2.     §  o  rt  rt  o 

I  i ^—  bo     "5rtbp^ 

I  .    O    «.    4> 


I  I  I   M   I  I   I   I   t  I   I  M  I      i-So^gg 

j       ^1  I   I   I   I   I   I  I   I  I   I  I   I  I      ".-S^l^l 

I  >l   >l   >!   >l   >l   M   tl         tePlI 


83 


84         THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

straight  to  the  front;  when  that  squad  has  advanced  the 
desired  distance,  the  captain  commands:  i.  Company, 
2.  HALT.  If  the  guide  be  right  (left),  the  other  cor- 
porals move  to  the  left  (right)  front,  and,  in  succession 
from  the  base,  place  their  squads  on  the  line;  if  the  guide 
be  center,  the  other  corporals  move  to  the  right  or  left 
front,  according  as  they  are  on  the  right  or  left  of  the 
center  squad,  and  in  succession  from  the  center  squad 
place  their  squads  on  the  line. 

If  at  a  halt,  the  base  squad  is  deployed  without  ad- 
vancing; the  other  squads  may  be  conducted  to  their 
proper  places  by  the  flank;  interior  squads  may  be  moved 
when  squads  more  distant  from  the  base  have  gained 
comfortable  marching  distance. 

207.  Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  form  skirmish  line 
to  the  front:  i.  As  skirmishers,  guide  right  (left  or  cen- 
ter), 2.  MARCH. 

If  marching,  the  corporal  of  the  base  squad  deploys  it 
and  moves  straight  to  the  front;  if  at  a  halt,  he  deploys 
his  squad  Without  advancing.  If  the  guide  be  right  (left), 
the  other  corporals  move  to  the  left  (right)  front,  and, 
in  succession  from  the  base,  place  their  squads  on  the 
line;  if  the  guide  be  center,  the  corporals  in  front  of 
the  center  squad  move  to  the  right  (if  at  a  halt,  to  the 
right  rear),  the  corporals  in  rear  of  the  center  squad 
move  to  the  left  front,  and  each,  in  succession  from  the 
base,  places  his  squad  on  the  line. 

The  column  of  twos  or  files  is  deployed  by  the  same 
commands  and  in  like  manner. 

208.  The  company  in  line  or  in  column  of  squads  may 
be  deployed  in  an  oblique  direction  by  the  same  com- 
mands. The  captain  points  out  the  desired  direction ;  the 
corporal  of  the  base  squad  moves  in. the  direction  indi- 
cated; the  other  corporals  conform. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY  85 

209.  To  form  skirmish  line  to  the  flank  or  rear  the  line 
or  the  column  of  squads  is  turned  by  squads  to  the  flank 
or  rear  and  then  deployed  as  described. 

210.  The  intervals  between  men  are  increased  or  de- 
creased as  described  in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  adding 
to  the  preparatory  command,  guide  right  {left  or  center) 
if  necessary. 

The  Assembly 

211.  The  captain  takes  his  post  in  front  of,  or  desig- 
nates, the  element  on  which  the  company  is  to  assemble 
and  commands:  i.  Assemble,  2.  MARCH. 

If  in  skirmish  line  the  men  move  promptly  toward  the 
designated  point  and  the  company  is  reformed  in  line. 
If  assembled  by  platoons,  these  are  conducted  to  the 
designated  point  by  platoon  leaders,  and  the  company  is 
re-formed  in  line. 

Platoons  may  be  assembled  by  the  command:  i.  Pla- 
toons, assemble,  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  company. 

One  or  more  platoons  may  be  assembled  by  the  com- 
mand: I.  Such  platoon  (s),  assemble,  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  the  designated  platoon  or  platoons  as  de- 
scribed for  the  company. 

The  Advance 

212.  The  advance  of  a  company  into  an  engagement 
(whether  for  attack  or  defense)  is  conducted  in  close 
order,  preferably  column  of  squads,  until  the  probability 
of  encountering  hostile  fire  makes  it  advisable  to  deploy. 
After  deployment,  and  before  opening  fire,  the  advance 
of  the  company  may  be  continued  in  skirmish  line  or 
other  suitable  formation,  depending  upon  circumstances. 


.5 

£ 


I    I    >  I    I    I    I    I 
I    I    I    >  I    I    I    I 


u 

CO 
V) 

a 
o 


I  I  M  I   I  I  I 


I  I  I  >  I   I  I  I 


I 
•s  . 

U 

■4-> 


86 


SCHOOL   OF  THE    COMPANY  87 

The  advance  may  often  be  facilitated,  or  better  advantage 
taken  of  cover,  or  losses  reduced  by  the  employment  of 
the  platoon  or  squad  columns,  or  by  the  use  of  a  succes- 
sion of  thin  lines.  The  selection  of  the  method  to  be 
used  is  made  by  the  captain  or  major,  the  choice  depend- 
ing upon  conditions  arising  during  the  progress  of  the 
advance.  If  the  deployment  is  found  to  be  premature,  it 
will  generally  be  best  to  assemble  the  company  and  pro- 
ceed in  close  order. 

Patrols  are  used  to  provide  the  necessary  security 
against  surprise. 

213.  Being  in  skirmish  line:  I.  Platoon  columns^ 
2.  MARCH. 

The  platoon  leaders  move  forward  through  the  center 
of  their  respective  platoons;  men  to  the  right  of  the 
platoon  leader  march  to  the  left  and  follow  him  in  file; 
those  to  the  left  march  in  like  manner  to  the  right;  each 
platoon  leader  thus  conducts  the  march  of  his  platoon  in 
double  column  of  files;  platoon  guides  follow  in  rear  of 
their  respective  platoons  to  insure  prompt  and  orderly 
execution  of  the  advance. 

214.  Being  in  skirmish  line:  i.  Squad  columns,  2. 
MARCH. 

Each  squad  leader  moves  to  the  front;  the  members  of 
each  squad  oblique  toward  and  follow  their  squad  leader 
in  single  file  at  easy  marching  distances. 

215.  Platoon  columns  are  profitably  used  where  the 
ground  is  so  difficult  or  cover  so  limited  as  to  make  it 
desirable  to  take  advantage  of  the  few  favorable  routes; 
no  two  platoons  should  march  within  the  area  of  burst 
of  a  single  shrapnel.^  Squad  columns  are  of  value  prin- 
cipally in  facilitating  the  advance  over  rough  or  brush- 

1  Ordinarily  about  20  yards  wide. 


M  I   I  I  I  I  I 


t>  I  I  I  I  I  I  i 


>  I  I  I  I  I  I  I 


t>  I  I  i  1  1  1  I 


ss 


^     si 


E 


^ 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY  89 

grown    ground;    they    afford    no    material    advantage    in 
securing  cover. 

216.  To  deploy  platoon  or  squad  columns:  i.  As  skir- 
mishers, 2.  MARCH. 

Skirmishers  move  to  the  right  or  left  front  and  suc- 
cessively place  themselves  in  their  original  positions  on 
the  line. 

217.  Being  in  platoon  or  squad  columns:  i.  Assemble, 
2.  MARCH. 

The  platoon  or  squad  leaders  signal  assemble.  The 
men  of  each  platoon  or  squad,  as  the  case  may  be,  advance 
and,  moving  to  the  right  and  left,  take  their  proper  places 
in  line,  each  unit  assembling  on  the  leading  element  of 
the  column  and  re-forming  in  line.  The  platoon  or  squad 
leaders  conduct  their  units  toward  the  element  or  point 
indicated  by  the  captain,  and  to  their  places  in  line;  the 
company  is  re-formed  in  line. 

218.  Being  in  skirmish  line,  to  advance  by  a  succession 
of  thin  lines:  i.   (Such  numbers),  forward,  2.  MARCH, 

The  captain  points  out  in  advance  the  selected  posi- 
tion in  front  of  the  line  occupied.  The  designated  num- 
ber of  each  squad  moves  to  the  front;  the  line  thus 
formed  preserves  the  original  intervals  as  nearly  as  prac- 
ticable; when  this  line  has  advanced  a  suitable  distance 
(generally  from  100  to  250  yards,  depending  upon  the 
terrain  and  the  character  of  the  hostile  fire),  a  second  is 
sent  forward  by  similar  commands,  and  so  on  at  irregular 
distances  until  the  whole  line  has  advanced.  Upon 
arriving  at  the  indicated  position,  the  first  line  is  halted. 
Successive  lines,  upon  arriving,  halt  on  line  with  the  first 
and  the  men  take  their  proper  places  in  the  skirmish  line. 

Ordinarily  each  line  is  made  up  of  one  man  per  squad 
and  the  men  of  a  squad  are  sent  forward  in  order  from- 
right  to  left  as  deployed.     The  first  line  is  led  by  the 


go  THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

platoon  leader  of  the  right  platoon,  the  second  by  the 
guide  of  the  right  platoon,  and  so  on  in  order  from  right 
to  left. 

The  advance  is  conducted  in  quick  time  unless  condi- 
tions demand  a  faster  gait. 

The  company  having  arrived  at  the  indicated  position, 
a  farther  advance  by  the  same  means  may  be  advisable. 

219.  The  advance  in  a  succession  of  thin  lines  is  used 
to  cross  a  wide  stretch  swept,  or  likely  to  be  swept,  by 
artillery  fire  or  heavy,  long-range  rifle  fire  which  can 
not  profitably  be  returned.  Its  purpose  is  the  building  up 
of  a  strong  skirmish  line  preparatory  to  engaging  in  a 
fire  fight.  This  method  of  advancing  results  in  serious 
(though  temporary)  loss  of  control  over  the  company. 
Its  advantage  lies  in  the  fact  that  it  offers  a  less  definite 
target,  hence  is  less  likely  to  draw  fire. 

220.  The  above  are  suggestions.  Other  and  better  for- 
mations may  be  devised  to  fit  particular  cases.  The  best 
formation  is  the  one  which  advances  the  line  farthest 
with  the  least  loss  of  men,  time,  and  control. 


The  Fire  Attack 

221.  The  principles  governing  the  advance  of  the  firing 
line  in  attack  are  considered  in  the  "School  of  the  Bat- 
talion." 

When  it  becomes  impracticable  for  the  company  to 
advance  as  a  whole  by  ordinary  means,  it  advances  by 
rushes. 

222.  Being  in  skirmish  line:  i.  By  platoon  (two  pla- 
toons, squad,  four  men,  etc.),  from  the  right  (left), 
2.  RUSH. 

■    The   platoon    leader  on   the    indicated   flank   carefully 
arranges  the  details  for  a  prompt  and  vigorous  execution 


SCHOOL   OF  THE    COMPANY  91 

of  the  rush  and  puts  it  into  effect  as  soon  as  practicable. 
If  necessary,  he  designates  the  leader  for  the  indicated 
fraction.  When  about  to  rush,  he  causes  the  men  of 
the  fraction  to  cease  firing  and  to  hold  themselves  flat, 
but  in  readiness  to  spring  forward  instantly.  The  leader 
of  the  rush  (at  the  signal  of  the  platoon  leader,  if  the 
latter  be  not  the  leader  of  the  rush)  commands:  Follow 
me,  and,  running  at  top  speed,  leads  the  fraction  to  the 
new  line,  where  he  halts  it  and  causes  it  to  open  fire. 
The  leader  of  the  rush  selects  the  new  line  if  it  has  not 
been  previously  designated. 

The  first  fraction  having  established  itself  on  the  new 
line,  the  next  like  fraction  is  sent  forward  by  its  platoon 
leader,  without  further  command  of  the  captain,  and  so 
on,  successively,  until  the  entire  company  is  on  the  line 
established  by  the  first  rush. 

If  more  than  one  platoon  is  to  join  in  one  rush,  the 
junior  platoon  leader  conforms  to  the  action  of  the  senior. 

A  part  of  the  line  having  advanced,  the  captain  may 
increase  or  decrease  the  size  of  the  fractions  to  complete 
the  movement. 

223.  When  the  company  forms  a  part  of  the  firing  line, 
the  rush  of  the  company  as  a  whole  is  conducted  by  the 
captain,  as  described  for  a  platoon  in  the  preceding  para- 
graph. The  captain  leads  the  rush;  platoon  leaders  lead 
their  respective  platoons;  platoon  guides  follow  the  line 
to  insure  prompt  and  orderly  execution  of  the  advance. 

224.  When  the  foregoing  method  of  rushing,  by  run- 
ning, becomes  impracticable,  any  method  of  advance  that 
brings  the  attack  closer  to*  the  enemy,  such  as  crawling, 
should  be  employed. 

For  regulations  governing  the  charge,  see  paragraphs 
318  and  319,  "I.  D.  R." 


92  THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

The  Company  in  Support 

225.  To  enable  it  to  follow  or  reach  the  firing  line,  the 
support  adopts  suitable  formations,  following  the  prin- 
ciples explained  in  paragraphs  212-218. 

The  support  should  be  kept  assembled  as  long  as  prac- 
ticable. If  after  deploying  a  favorable  opportunity  arises 
to  hold  it  for  some  time  in  close  formation,  it  should  be 
reassembled.     It  is  redeployed  when  necessary. 

226.  The  movements  of  the  support  as  a  whole  and 
the  dispatch  of  reenforcements  from  it  to  the  firing  line 
are  controlled  by  the  major. 

A  reenforcement  of  less  than  one  platoon  has  little 
influence  ind  will  be  avoided  whenever  practicable. 

The  captain  of  a  company  in  support  is  constantly  on 
the  alert  for  the  major's  signals  or  commands. 

227.  A  reenforcement  sent  to  the  firing  line  joins  it 
deployed  as  skirmishers.  The  leader  of  the  reenforce- 
ment places  it  in  an  interval  in  the  line,  if  one  exists,  and 
commands  it  thereafter  as  a  unit.  If  no  such  suitable 
interval  exists,  the  reenforcement  is  advanced  with  in- 
creased intervals  between  skirmishers;  each  man  occu- 
pies the  nearest  interval  in  the  firing  line,  and  each  then 
obeys  the  orders  of  the  nearest  squad  leader  and  platoon 
leader. 

228.  A  reenforcement  joins  the  firing  line  as  quickly  as 
possible  without  exhausting  the  men. 

229.  The  original  platoon  division  of  the  companies  in 
the  firing  line  should  be  maintained  and  should  not  be 
broken  up  by  the  mingling  of  reenforcements. 

Upon  joining  the  firing  line,  ofllicers  and  sergeants  ac- 
companying a  reenforcement  take  over  the  duties  of  others 
of  like  grade  who  have  been  disabled,  or  distribute  them- 
selves so  as  best  to  exercise  their  normal  'functions.    Con- 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY  93 

ditions  will  vary  and  no  rules  can  be  prescribed.  It  is 
essential  that  all  assist  in  mastering  the  increasing  dif- 
ficulties of  control. 


The  Company  Acting  Alone 

230.  In  general,  the  company  when  acting  alone  is  em- 
ployed according  to  the  principles  applicable  to  the  battal- 
ion acting  alone;  the  captain  employs  platoons  as  the 
major  employs  companies,  making  due  allowance  for  the 
difference  in  strength. 

The  support  may  be  smaller  in  proportion  or  may  be 
dispensed  with. 

231.  The  company  must  be  well  protected  against  sur- 
prise. Combat  patrols  on  the  flanks  are  specially  impor- 
tant. Each  leader  of  a  flank  platoon  details  a  man  to 
watch  for  the  signals  of  the  patrol  or  patrols  on  his  flank. 

FIRE 

232.  Ordinarily  pieces  are  loaded  and  extra  ammunition 
is  issued,  before  the  company  deploys  for  combat. 

In  close  order  the  company  executes  the  firings  at  the 
command  o'f  the  captain,  who  posts  himself  in  rear  of  the 
center  of  the  company. 

Usually  the  firings  in  close  order  consist  of  saluting  vol- 
leys only. 

233.  When  the  company  is  deployed,  the  men  execute 
the  firings  at  the  command  of  their  platoon  leaders;  the 
latter  give  such  commands  as  are  necessary  to  carry  out 
the  captain's  directions,  and,  from  time  to  time,  add  such 
further  commands  as  are  necessary  to  continue,  correct, 
and  control  the  fire  ordered. 

234.  The  voice  is  generally  inadequate  for  giving  com- 
mands during  fire  and  must  be  replaced  by  signals  of  such 


94  THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

character  that  proper  fire  direction  and  control  is  as- 
sured. To  attract  attention,  signals  must  usually  be  pre- 
ceded by  the  whistle  signal  (short  blast).  A  "fraction  of 
the  firing  line  about  to  rush  should,  if  practicable,  avoid 
using  the  long  blast  signal  as  an  aid  to  cease  firing.  Offi- 
cers and  men  behind  the  firing  line  can  not  ordinarily 
move  freely  along  the  line,  but  must  depend  on  mutual 
watchfulness  and  the  proper  use  of  the  prescribed  sig- 
nals. All  should  post  themselves  so  as  to  see  their  im- 
mediate  superiors  and  subordinates. 

235.  The  musicians  assist  the  captain  by  observing  the 
enemy,  the  target,  and  the  fire  effect,  by  transmitting 
commands  or  signals,  and  by  watching  for  signals. 

236.  Firing  with  blank  cartridges  at  an  outlined  or  rep- 
resented enemy  at  distances  of  less  than  100  yards  is  pro- 
hibited. 

237.  The  effect  of  fire  and  the  influence*  of  the  ground 
in  relation  thereto,  and  the  individual  and  collective  in- 
struction in  marksmanship,  are  treated  in  the  "Small-Arms 
Firing  Manual." 

Ranges 

238.  For  convenience  of  reference  ranges  are  classified 
as  follows: 

o  to  600  yards,  close  range. 
600  to  1,200  yards,  effective  range. 
1,200  to  2,000  yards,  long  range. 
2,000  yards  and  over,  distant  range. 

239.  The  distance  to  the  target  must  be  determined  as 
accurately  as  possible  and  the  sights  set  accordingly. 
Aside  from  training  and  morale,  this  is  the  most  impor- 
tant single  factor  in  securing  effective  fire  at  the  longer 
ranges. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY  95 

240.  Except  in  a  deliberately  prepared  defensive  posi- 
tion, the  most  accurate  and  only  practicable  method  of  de- 
termining the  range  will  generally  be  to  take  the  mean  of 
several  estimates. 

Five  or  six  officers  or  men,  selected  "from  the  most  ac- 
curate estimators  in  the  company,  are  designated  as  range 
estimators  and  are  specially  trained  in  estimating  dis- 
tances. 

Whenever  necessary  and  practicable,  the  captain  assem- 
bles the  range  estimators,  points  out  the  target  to  them, 
and  adopts  the  mean  of  their  estimates.  The  range  esti- 
mators then  take  their  customary  posts. 

Classes  of  Firing 

241.  Volley  firing  has  limited  application.  In  defense 
it  may  be  used  in  the  early  stages  of  the  action  if  the 
enemy  presents  a  large,  compact  target.  It  may  be  used 
by  troops  executing  fire  of  position.  When  the  ground 
near  the  target  is  such  that  the  strike  of  bullets  can  be 
seen  from  the  firing  line,  ranging  volleys  may  be  used  to 
correct  the  sight  setting. 

In  combat,  volley  firing  is  executed  habitually  by  pla- 
toon. 

242.  Fire  at  will  is  the  class  of  fire  normally  employed 
in  attack  or  defense. 

243.  Clip  fire  has  limited  application.  It  is  principally 
used:  i.  In  the  early  stages  of  combat,  to  steady  the  men 
by  habituating  them  to  brief  pauses  in  firing.  2.  To  pro- 
duce a  short  burst  of  fire. 

The  Target 

244.  Ordinarily  the  major  v^^ill  assign  to  the  company 
an  objective  in  attafck  or  sector  in  defense;  the  company's 


96  THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

target  will  lie  within  the  limits  so  assigned.  In  the 
choice  of  target,  tactical  considerations  are  paramount; 
the  nearest  hostile  troops  within  the  objective  or  sector 
will  thus  be  the  usual  target.  This  will  ordinarily  be 
the  hostile  firing  line ;  troops  in  rear  are  ordinarily  proper 
targets  for  artillery,  machine  guns,  or,  at  times,  infantry 
employing  fire  of  position. 

Change  of  target  should  not  be  made  without  excellent 
reasons  therefor,  such  as  the  sudden  appearance  of  hos- 
tile troops  under  conditions  which  make  them  more  to  be 
feared  than  the  troops  comprising  the  former  target. 

245.  The  distribution  of  fire  over  the  entire  target  is  of 
special   importance. 

The  captain  allots  a  part  of  the  target  to  each  platoon, 
or  each  platoon  leader  takes  as  his  target  that  part  which 
corresponds  to  his  position  in  the  company.  Men  are  so 
instructed  that  each  fires  on  that  part  of  the  target  which 
is  directly  opposite  him. 

246.  All  parts  of  the  target  are  equally  important. 
Care  must  be  exercised  that  the  men  do  not  slight  its  less 
visible  parts.  A  section  of  the  target  not  covered  by  fire 
represents  a  number  of  the  enemy  permitted  to  fire  coolly 
and  effectively. 

247.  If  the  target  can  not  be  seen  with  the  naked  eye, 
platoon  leaders  select  an  object  in  front  of  or  behind  it, 
designate  this  as  the  aiming  target,  and  direct  a  sight  set- 
ting which  will  carry  the  cone  of  fire  into  the  target. 

Fire  Direction 

248.  When  the  company  is  large  enough  to  be  divided 
into  platoons,  it  is  impracticable  for  the  captain  to  com- 
mand it  directly  in  combat.  His  efficiency  in  managing 
the  firing  line  is  measured  by  his  ability  to  enforce  his 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY  97 

will  through  the  platoon  leaders.  Having  indicated  clear- 
ly what  he  desires  them  to  do,  he  avoids  interfering 
except  to  correct  serious  errors  or  omissions. 

249.  The  captain  directs  the  fire  of  the  company  or  of 
designated  platoons.  He  designates  the  target,  and,  when 
practicable,  allots  a  part  of  the  target  to  each  platoon. 
Before  beginning  the  fire  action  he  determines  the  range, 
announces  the  sight  setting,  and  indicates  the  class  of  fire 

.to  be  employed  and  the  time  to  open  fire.  Thereafter,  he 
observes  the  fire  effect,  corrects  material  errors  in  sight 
setting,  prevents  exhaustion  of  the  ammunition  supply, 
and  causes  the  distribution  of  such  extra  ammunition 
as  may  be  received  from  the  rear. 

Fire  Control 

250.  In  combat  the  platoon  is  the  fire  unit.  From  20  to 
35  rifles  are  as  many  as  one  leader  can  control  effectively. 

251.  Each  platoon  leader  puts  into  execution  the  com- 
mands or  directions  of  the  captain,  having  first  taken  such 
precautions  to  insure  correct  sight  setting  and  clear  de- 
scription of  the  target  or  aiming  target  as  the  situation 
permits  or  requires;  thereafter,  he  gives  such  additional 
commands  or  directions  as  are  necessary  to  exact  com- 
pliance with  the  captain's  will.  He  corrects  the  sight 
setting  when  necessary.  He  designates  an  aiming  target 
when  the  target  can  not  be  seen  with  the  naked  eye. 

252.  In  general,  platoon  leaders  observe  the  target  and 
the  effect  of  their  fire  and  are  on  the  alert  for  the  cap- 
tain's commands  or  signals ;  they  observe  and  regulate  the 
rate  of  fire.  The  platoon  guides  watch  the  firing  line 
and  check  every  breach  of  fire  discipline.  Squad  leaders 
transmit  commands  and  signals  when  necessary,  observe 
the  conduct  of  their  squads  and  abate  excitement,  assist 

8 


98  THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

in  enforcing  fire  discipline  and  participate  in  the  firing. 

253.  The  best  troops  are  those  that  submit  longest  to 
fire  control.  Loss  of  control  is  an  evil  which  robs  suc- 
cess of  its  greatest  results.  To  avoid  or  delay  such  loss 
should  be 'the  constant  aim  of  all.    , 

Fire  control  implies  the  ability  to  stop  firing,  change 
the  sight  setting  and  target,  and  resume  a  well-directed 
fire. 

Fire  Discipline 

254.  "Fire  discipline  implies,  besides  a  habit  of  obedi- 
ence, a  control  of  the  rifle  by  the  soldier,  the  result  of 
training,  which  will  enable  him  in  action  to  make  hits 
instead  of  misses.  It  embraces  taking  advantage  of  the 
ground;  care  in  setting  the  sight  and  delivery  of  fire; 
constant  attention  to  the  orders  of  the  leaders,  and  care- 
ful observation  of  the  enemy;  an  increase  of  fire  when 
the  target  is  favorable,  and  a  cessation  of  fire  when  the 
enemy  disappears;  economy  of  ammunition."  ("Small- 
Arms  Firing  Manual.") 

In  combat,  shots  which  graze  the  enemy's  trench  or 
position  and  thus  reduce  the  effectiveness  of  his  fire  have 
the  approximate  value  of  hits;  such  shots  only,  or  actual 
hits,  contribute  toward  fire  superiority. 

Fire  discipline  implies  that,  in  a  firing  line  without 
leaders,  each  man  retains  his  presence  of  mind  and  directs 
effective  fire  upon  the  proper  target. 

255.  To  create  a  correct  appreciation  of  the  require- 
ments of  fire  discipline,  men  are  taught  that  the  rate  of 
fire  should  be  as  rapid  as  is  consistent  with  accurate  aim- 
ing; that  the  rate  will  depend  upon  the  visibility,  prox- 
imity, and  size  of  the  target;  and  that  the  proper  rate 
will  ordinarily  suggest  itself  to  each  trained  man,  usu- 
ally rendering  cautions  or  commands  unnecessary. 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   COMPANY  99 

In  attack  the  highest  rate  of  fire  is  employed  at  the 
halt  preceding  the  assault,  and  in  pursuing  fire. 

256.  In  an  advance  by  rushes,  leaders  of  troops  in  fir- 
ing positions  are  responsible  for  the  delivery  of  heavy 
fire  to  cover  the  advance  of  each  rushing  fraction.  Troops 
are  trained  to  change  slightly  the  direction  of  fire  so  as 
not  to  endanger  the  flanks  of  advanced  portions  of  the 
firing  line. 

257.  In  defense,  v^^hen  the  target  disappears  behind 
cover,  platoon  leaders  suspend  fire,  prepare  their  platoons 
to  fire  upon  the  point  where  it  is  expected  to  reappear, 
and  greet  its  reappearance  instantly  with  vigorous  ^fire. 

In  preparing  for  the  firing  line  it  is  the  big  things  that 
count.  Don't  quibble  over  little  things.  It  is  action  with 
head  wprk  that  will  win  the  scrap. 


CHAPTER  VII 
INSPECTIONS    AND    MUSTER 

Company  Inspection 

745.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt:  i.  Open  ranks,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march  the  front  rank  executes  right 
dress;  the  rear  rank  and  the  file  closers  march  backward 
4  steps,  halt  and  execute  right  dress;  the  lieutenants 
pass  around  their  respective  flanks  and  take  post,  facing 
to  the  front,  3  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  their  re- 
spective platoons.  The  captain  aligns  the  front  rank, 
rear  rank,  and  file  closers,  takes  post  3  paces  in  front  of 
the  right  guide,  facing  to  the  left,  and  commands:  I. 
FRONT,  2.  PREPARE  FOR  INSPECTION. 

At  the  second  command  the  lieutenants  carry  saber; 
the  captain  returns  saber  and  inspects  them,  after  which 
they  face  about,  order  saber,  and  stand  at  ease;  upon 
the  completion  of  the  inspection  they  carry  saber,  face 
about,  and  order  saber.  The  captain  may  direct  the 
lieutenants  to  accompany  or  assist  him,  in  which  case 
they  return  saber  and,  at  the  close  of  the  inspection, 
resume  their  posts  in  front  of  the  company,  draw  and 
carry  saber. 

Having  inspected  the  lieutenants,  the  captain  proceeds 
to  the  right  of  the  company.  Each  man,  as  the  captain 
approaches  him,  executes  inspection  arms. 

The  captain  takes  the  piece,  grasping  it  with  his  right 
hand  just  above  the  rear  sight,  the  man  dropping  his 
hands.     The   captain   inspects  the  piece,   and,   with  the 

100 


INSPECTIONS   A10,  MXJSTfEfc    ;      $01 

hand  and  piece  in  the  same  position  as  in  receiving  it, 
hands  it  back  to  the  man,  who  takes  it  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  balance  and  executes  order  arms. 

As  the  captain  returns  the  piece  the  next  man  executes 
inspection  arms,  and  so  on  through  the  company. 

Should  the  piece  be  inspected  without  handling,  each 
man  executes  order  arms  as  soon  as  the  captain  passes  to 
the  next  man. 

The  inspection  is  from  right  tc  left  in  fi*ont,  and  from 
left  to  right  in  rear,  of  each  rank  and  of  the  line  of  file 
closers. 

When  approached  by  the  captain  the  first  sergeant 
executes  inspection  saber.  Enlisted  men  armed  with  the 
pistol  execute  inspection  pistol  by  drawing  the  pistol 
from  the  holster  and  holding  it  diagonally  across  the 
body,  barrel  up,  and  6  inches  in  front  of  the  neck,  muz- 
zle pointing  up  and  to  the  left.  The  pistol  is  returned 
to  the  holster  as  soon  as  the  captain  passes. 

Upon  completion  of  the  inspection  the  captain  takes 
post  facing  to  the  left  in  front  o*f  the  right  guide  and 
on  line  with  the  lieutenants  and  commands:  I.  Close 
ranks,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march  the  lieutenants  resume  their 
posts  in  line;  the  rear  rank  closes  to  40  inches,  each  man 
covering  his  file  leader;  the  file  closers  close  to  2  paces 
from  the  rear  rank. 

746.  If  the  company  is  dismissed,  rifles  are  put  away. 
In  quarters,  headdress  and  accouterments  are  removed 
and  the  men  stand  near  their  respective  bunks;  in  camp 
they  stand  covered,  but  without  accouterments,  in  front 
of  their  tents. 

If  the  personal  field  equipment  has  not  been  inspected 
in  ranks  and  its  inspection  in  quarters  or  camp  is  or- 
dered, each  man  will  arrange  the  prescribed  articles  on 


102        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

his  bunk,  if  in  quarters  or  permanent  camp,  or  in  front 
of  his  half  of  the  tent,  if  in  shelter  tent  camp,  in  the 
same  relative  order  as  directed  in  paragraph  747. 

The  captain,  accompanied  by  the  lieutenants,  then  in- 
spects the  quarters  or  camp.  The  first  sergeant  *  pre- 
cedes the  captain  and  calls  the  men  to  attention  on  en- 
tering each  squad  room  or  on  approaching  the  tents;  the 
men  stand  at  attention  but  do  not  salute. 

747.  If  the  inspection  is  to  include  an  examination  of 
the  equipment  while  in  ranks,  the  captain,  after  closing 
ranks,  causes  the  company  to  stack  arms,  to  march  back- 
ward until  4  paces  in  rear  of  the  stacks  and  to  take  in- 
tervals. He  then  commands:  i.  UNSUNG  EQUIP- 
MENT.   2.  OPEN  PACKS. 

At  the  first  command,  each  man  unslings  his  equip- 
ment and  places  it  on  the  ground  at  his  'feet,  haversack 
to  the  front  end  of  the  pack  i  foot  in  front  of  toes. 

At  the  second  command,  pack  carriers  are  unstrapped, 
packs  removed  and  unrolled,  the  longer  edge  of  the  pack 
along  the  lower  edge  of  the  cartridge  belt.  Each  man 
exposes  shelter  tent  pins,  removes  meat  can,  knife,  fork, 
and  spoon  from  the  meat-can  pouch,  and  places  them 
on  the  right  of  the  haversack,  knife,  fork,  and  spoon  in 
the  open  meat  can;  removes  the  canteen  and  cup  from 
the  cover  and  places  them  on  the  left  side  of  the  haver- 
sack; unstraps  and  spreads  out  haversack  so  as  to  ex- 
pose its  contents;  'folds  up  the  carrier  to  uncover  the 
cartridge  pockets;  opens  same;  unrolls  toilet  articles  and 
places  them  on  the  outer  flap  of  the  haversack;  places 
underwear  carried  in  pack  on  the  left  half  of  the  open 
pack,  with  round  fold  parallel  with  front  edge  of  pack; 
opens  first-aid  pouch  and  exposes  contents  to  view.  Spe- 
cial articles  carried  by  individual  men,  such  as  flag  kit, 
field  glasses,  compass,  steel  tape,  notebook,  etc.,  will  be 


INSPECTIONS   AND    MUSTER 


103 


arranged  on  the  right  half  o'f  the  open  pack.  Each  man 
then  resumes  the  attention.  Figure  21  shows  the  relative 
position  of  all  articles  except  underwear  and  special  arti- 
cles. 

The  captain  then  passes  along  the  ranks  and  file  closers 
as  before,  inspects  the  equipment,  returns  to  the  right, 
and  commands:  CLOSE  PACKS. 


(Pack  closed) 


Fig.  21. 


(Pack  open) 


Each  man  rolls  up  his  toilet  articles  and  underwear, 
straps  up  his  haversack  and  its  contents,  replaces  the  meat 
can,  knife,  fork,  and  spoon,  and  the  canteen- and  cup; 
closes  cartridge  pockets  and  first-aid  pouch;  restores  spe- 
cial articles  to  their  proper  receptacles;  rolls  up  and  re- 
places pack  in  carrier;  and,  leaving  the  equipment  in  its 
position  on  the  ground,  resumes  the  attention. 


I04        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

All  equipments  being  packed,  the  captain  commands: 
SLING  EQUIPMENT. 

The  equipments  are  slung  and  belts  fastened. 

The  captain  then  causes  the  company  to  assemble  and 
take  arms.  The  inspection  is  completed  as  already  ex- 
plained. 

748.  Should  the  inspector  be  other  than  the  captain,  the 
latter,  after  commanding  front,  adds  REST,  and  'faces 
to  the  front.  When  the  inspector  approaches,  the  captain 
faces  to  the  left,  brings  the  company  to  attention,  faces 
to  the  front,  and  salutes.  The  salute  acknowledged,  the 
captain  carries  saber,  faces  to  the  le'ft,  commands:  PRE- 
PARE FOR  INSPECTION,  and  again  faces  to  the  front. 

The  inspection  proceeds  as  before;  the  captain  returns 
saber  and  accompanies  the  inspector  as  soon  as  the  latter 
passes  him. 

MUSTER 

Company  Muster 

755.  Muster  is  preceded  by  an  inspection,  and,  when 
practicable,  by  a  review. 

The  adjutant  is  provided  with  the  muster  roll  of  the 
field,  staff,  and  band,  the  surgeon  with  the  hospital  roll; 
each  captain  with  the  roll  of  his  company.  A  list  of 
absentees,  alphabetically  arranged,  showing  cause  and 
place  of  absence,  accompanies  each  roll. 

756.  Being  in  column  o*f  companies  at  open  ranks,  each 
captain,  as  the  mustering  officer  approaches,  brings  his 
company  to  right  shoulder  arms,  and  commands:  AT' 
TENTION  TO  MUSTER. 

The  mustering  officer  or  captain  then  calls  the  names 
on  the  roll;  each  man,  as  his  name  is  called,  answers 
Here  and  brings  his  piece  to  order  arms. 


INSPECTIONS   AND    MUSTER  105 

After  muster,  the  mustering  officer,  accompanied  by  the 
company  commanders  and  such  other  officers  as  he  may 
designate,  verifies  the  presence  of  the  men  reported  in 
hospital,  on  guard,  etc. 

757.  A  company  may  be  mustered  in  the  same  manner 
on  its  own  parade  ground,  the  muster  to  follow  the  com- 
pany inspection. 


CHAPTER   VIII 

HONORS   AND    SALUTES 

758.  Further  rules  governing  honors,  courtesies,  etc., 
are  prescribed  in  "Army  Regulations." 

759.  (i)  Salutes  shall  be  exchanged  between  officers 
and  enlisted  men  not  in  a  military  formation,  nor  at  drill, 
work,  games,  or  mess,  on  every  occasion  of  their  meet- 
ing, passing  near  or  being  addressed,  the  officer  junior  in 
rank  or  the   enlisted  man   saluting  first. 

(2)  When  an  officer  enters  a  room  where  there  are 
several  enlisted  men,  the  word  "attention"  is  given  by 
some  one  who  perceives  him,  when  all  rise,  uncover,  and 
remain  standing  at  attention  until  the  officer  leaves  the 
room  or  directs  otherwise.  Enlisted  men  at  meals  stop 
eating  and  remain  seated  at  attention. 

(3)  An  enlisted  man,  if  seated,  rises  on  the  approach 
of  an  officer,  faces  toward  him,  stands  at  attention,  and 
salutes.  Standing,  he  faces  an  officer  for  the  same  pur- 
pose. If  the  parties  remain  in  the  same  place  or  on  the 
same  ground,  such  compliments  need  not  be  repeated. 
Soldiers  actually  at  work  do  not  cease  work  to  salute  an 
officer  unless  addressed  by  him. 

(4)  Before  addressing  an  officer,  an  enlisted  man  makes 
the  prescribed  salute  with  the  weapon  with  which  he  is 
armed,  or,  if  unarmed,  with  the  right  hand.  He  also 
makes  the  same  salute  after  receiving  a  reply. 

(5)  In  uniform,  covered  or  uncovered,  but  not  in 
formation,  officers  and  enlisted  men  salute  military  per- 

106 


HONORS   AND    SALUTES  107 

sons  as  follows :  With  arms  in  hand,  the  salute  prescribed 
for  that  arm  (sentinels  on  interior  guard  duty  excepted)  ; 
without  arms,  the  right-hand  salute. 

(6)  In  civilian  dress,  covered  or  uncovered,  officers 
and  enlisted  men  salute  military  persons  with  the  right- 
hand  salute. 

(7)  Officers  and  enlisted  men  will  render  the  prescribed 
salutes  in  a  military  manner,  the  officer  junior  in  rank, 
or  the  enlisted  men,  saluting  first.  When  several  officers 
in  company  are  saluted,  all  entitled  to  the  salute  shall 
return   it. 

(8)  Except  in  the  field  under  campaign  or  simulated 
campaign  conditions,  a  mounted  officer  (or  soldier)  dis- 
mounts before  addressing  a  superior  officer  not  mounted. 

(9)  A  man  in  formation  should  not  salute  when  di- 
rectly addressed,  but  shall  come  to  attention  if  at  rest 
or   at   ease. 

(10)  Saluting  distance  is  that  within  which  recogni- 
tion is  easy.     In  general,  it  does  not  exceed  30  paces. 

(11)  When  an  officer  entitled  to  the  salute  passes  in 
rear  of  a  body  of  troops,  it  is  brought  to  attention  while 
he  is  opposite  the  post  of  the  commander. 

(12)  In  public  conveyances,  such  as  railway  trains  and 
street  cars,  and  in  public  places,  such  as  theaters,  hon- 
ors and  personal  salutes  may  be  omitted  when  palpably 
inappropriate  or  apt  to  disturb  or  annoy  civilians  pres- 
ent. ' 

(13)  Soldiers  at  all  times  and  in  all  situations  pay 
the  same  compliments  to  officers  of  the  Army,  Navy,  Ma- 
rine Corps,  and  to  officers  of  the  National  Guard  Re- 
serve as  to  officers  of  their  own  regiment,  corps,  or  arm 
of  service. 

(14)  Sentinels  on  post  doing  interior  guard  duty  con- 
form to  the  foregoing  principles,  but  salute  by  present- 


io8        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

ing  arms  when  armed  with  the  rifle.  They  will  not 
salute  if  it  interferes  with  the  proper  performance  of 
their  duties.  Troops  under  arms  will  salute  as  prescribed 
in  drill  regulations. 

760.  (i)  Commanders  of  detachments  or  other  com- 
mands will  salute  officers  of  grades  higher  than  the  per- 
son commanding  the  unit,  by  first  bringing  the  unit  to 
attention  and  then  saluting  as  required  by  subparagraph 
(5),  paragraph  759.  If  the  person  saluted  is  of  a  junior 
or  equal  grade,  the  unit  need  not  be  at  attention  in  the 
exchange  of  salutes. 

(2)  If  two  detachments  or  other  commands  meet,  their 
commanders  will  exchange  salutes,  both  commands  be- 
ing at  attention. 

761.  Salutes  and  honors,  as  a  rule,  are  not  paid  by 
troops  actually  engaged  in  drill,  on  the  march,  or  in  the 
field  under  campaign  or  simulated  campaign  conditions. 
Troops  on  the  service  of  security  pay  no  compliments 
whatever. 

762.  If  the  command  is  in  line  at  a  halt  (not  in  the 
field)  and  armed  with  the  rifle,  or  with  sabers  drawn,  it 
shall  be  brought  to  present  arms  or  present  sabers  before 
its  commander  salutes,  in  the  following  cases:  When  the 
National  Anthem  is  played,  or  when  To  the  color  or  To 
the  standard  is  sounded  during  ceremonies,  or  when  a 
person  is  saluted  who  is  its  immediate  or  higher  com- 
mander or  a  general  officer,  or  when  the  national  or 
regimental  color  is  saluted. 

763.  At  parades  and  other  ceremonies,  under  arms, 'the 
command  shall  render  the  prescribed  salute  and  shall 
remain  in  the  position  of  salute  while  the  National 
Anthem  is  being  played;  also  at  retreat  and  during  cere- 
monies when  To  the  color  is  played,  if  no  band  is  pres- 
ent.    If   not  under   arms,  the   organizations   should   be 


HONORS   AND    SALUTES  109 

brought  to  attention  at  the  first  note  of  the  National 
Anthem,  To  the  color  or  To  the  standard,  and  the  salute 
rendered  by  the  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  in  com- 
mand as  prescribed  in  regulations,  as  amended  herein. 

764.  Whenever  the  National  Anthem  is  played  at  any 
place  when  persons  belonging  to  the  military  service  are 
present,  all  officers  and  enlisted  men  not  in  formation 
shall  stand  at  attention  facing  toward  the  music  (except 
at  retreat,  when  they  shall  face  toward  the  flag).  If  in 
uniform,  covered  or  uncovered,  or  in  civilian  clothes,  un- 
covered, they  shall  salute  at  the  first  note  of  the  anthem, 
retaining  the  position  of  a  salute  until  the  last  note  of 
the  anthem.  If  not  in  uniform  and  covered,  they  shall 
uncover  at  the  first  note  of  the  anthem,  holding  the 
headdress  opposite  the  left  shoulder  and  so  remain  until 
its  close,  except  that  in  inclement  weather  the  headdress 
may  be  slightly  raised. 

The  same  rules  apply  when  To  the  color  or  To  the  stand- 
ard is  sounded  as  when  the  National  Anthem  is  played. 

When  played  by  an  Army  band,  the  National  Anthem 
shall  be  played  through  without  repetition  of  any  part  not 
required  to  be  repeated  to  make  it  complete. 

The  same  marks  of  respect  prescribed  for  observance 
during  the  playing  o'f  the  National  Anthem  of  the  United 
States  shall  be  shown  toward  the  national  anthem  of  any 
other  country  when  played  upon  official  occasions. 

765.  Officers  and  enlisted  men  passing  the  uncased 
color  will  render  honors  as  follows:  If  in  uniform,  they 
will  salute  as  required  by  subparagraph  (5),  paragraph 
759;  if  in  civilian  dress  and  covered,  they  will  uncover, 
holding  the  headdress  opposite  the  left  shoulder  with 
the  right  hand;  if  uncovered  they  will  salute  with  the 
right-hand  salute. 


CHAPTER   IX 

THE   COLOR 

^66.  The  word  "color"  implies  the  national  color;  it 
includes  the  regimental  color  when  both  are  present. 

The  rules  prescribing  the  colors  to  be  carried  by  regi- 
ments and  battalions  on  all  occasions  are  contained  in 
"Army  Regulations." 

767.  In  garrison  the  colors,  when  not  in  use,  are  kept 
in  the  office  or  quarters  of  the  colonel,  and  are  escorted 
thereto  and  therefrom  by  the  color  guard.  In  camp  the 
colors,  when  not  in  use,  are  in  front  of  the  colonel's  tent. 
From  reveille  to  retreat,  when  the  weather  permits,  they 
are  displayed  uncased;  from  retreat  to  reveille  and  during 
inclement  weather  they  are  cased. 

Colors  are  said  to  be  cased  when  furled  and  protected 
by  the  oil-cloth  covering. 

768.  The  regimental  color  salutes  in  the  ceremony  of 
escort  of  the  color,  and  when  saluting  an  officer  entitled 
to  the  honor,  but  in  no  other  case. 

If  marching,  the  salute  is  executed  when  at  6  paces 
from  the  officer  entitled  to  the  salute;  the  carry  is  re- 
sumed when  6  paces  beyond  him. 

The  national  color  renders  no  salute. 

The  Color  Guard 

769.  The  color  guard  consists  &i  two  color  sergeants, 
who  are  the  color  bearers,  and  two  experienced  privates 

no 


THE    COLOR  HI 

selected  by  the  colonel.  The  senior  color  sergeant  car- 
ries the  national  color;  the  junior  color  sergeant  carries 
the  regimental  color.  The  regimental  color,  when  car- 
ried, is  always  on  the  left  of  the  national  color,  in  what- 
ever direction  they  may  face. 

770.  The  color  guard  is  formed  and  marched  in  one 
rank,  the  color  bearers  in  the  center.  It  is  marched  in 
the  same  manner  and  by  the  same  commands  as  a  squad, 
substituting,  when  necessary,  guard  for  squad. 

771.  The  color  company  is  the  center  or  right  center 
company  of  the  center  or  right  center  battalion.  The 
color  guard  remains  with  that  company  unless  otherwise 
directed. 

yy2.  In  line  the  color  guard  is  in  the  interval  between 
the  inner  guides  of  the  right  and  left  center  companies. 

In  line  o'f  columns  or  in  close  line,  the  color  guard  is 
midway  between  the  right  and  left  center  companies 
and  on  line  with  the  captains. 

In  column  of  companies  or  platoons  the  color  guard  is 
midway  between  the  color  company  and  the  company  in 
rear  of  the  color  company  and  equidistant  from  the 
flanks  of  the  column. 

In  close  column  the  color  guard  is  on  the  flank  of  the 
color  company. 

In  column  of  squads  the  color  guard  is  in  the  column 
between  the  color  company  and  the  company  originally 
on  its  left. 

When  the  regiment  is  'formed  in  line  of  masses  for 
ceremonies,  the  color  guard  forms  on  the  left  of  the  lead- 
ing company  of  the  center  (right  center)  battalion.  It 
rejoins  the  color  company  when  the  regiment  changes 
from  line  of  masses. 

773.  The  color  guard,  when  with  a  battalion  that  takes 
the  battle  formation,  joins  the  regimental  reserve,  whose 


112        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

commander  directs  the  color  guard  to  join  a  certain  com- 
pany of  the  reserve. 

774.  The  color  guard  executes  neither  loadings  nor  fir- 
ings; in  rendering  honors,  it  executes  all  movements  in 
the  manual;  in  drill,  all  movements  unless  specially  ex- 
cused. 

To  Receive  the  Color 

775.  The  color  guard,  by  command  of  the  senior  color 
sergeant,  presents  arms  on  receiving  and  parting  vi^ith  the 
color.  After  parting  with  the  color,  the  color  guard  is 
brought  to  order  arms  by  command  of  the  senior  mem- 
ber who  is  placed  as  the  right  man  of  the  guard. 

yyd.  At  drills  and  ceremonies,  excepting  escort  o*f  the 
color,  the  color,  if  present,  is  received  by  the  color  com- 
pany after  its  formation. 

The  formation  of  the  color  company  completed,  the 
captain  faces  to  the  front;  the  color  guard,  conducted 
by  the  senior  sergeant,  approaches  from  the  'front  and 
halts  at  a  distance  of  10  paces  from  the  captain,  who 
then  faces  about,  brings  the  company  to  the  present, 
faces  to  the  front,  salutes,  again  faces  about  and  brings 
the  company  to  the  order.  The  color  guard  comes  to 
the  present  and  order  at  the  command  of  the  captain, 
and  is  then  marched  by  the  color  sergeant  directly  to  its 
post  on  the  left  of  the  color  company. 

yyy.  When  the  battalion  is  dismissed  the  color  guard 
escorts  the  color  to  the  office  or  quarters  o*f  the  colonel. 

Manual  of  the  Color 

778.  At  the  carry  the  heel  of  the  pike  rests  in  the 
socket  of  the  sling;  the  right  hand  grasps  the  pike  at  the 
height  of  the  shoulder. 


THE    COLOR  113 

At  the  order  the  heel  of  the  pike  rests  on  the  ground 
near  the  right  toe,  the  right  hand  holding  the  pike  in  a 
vertical  position. 

At  parade  rest  the  heel  of  the  pike  is  on  the  ground,  as 
at  the  order;  the  pike  is  held  with  both  hands  in  front 
of  the  center  of  the  body,  left  hand  uppermost. 

The  order  is  resumed  at  the  command  attention. 

The  left  hand  assists  the  right  when  necessary. 

The  carry  is  the  habitual  position  when  the  troops  are 
at  a  shoulder,  port,  or  trail. 

The  order  and  parade  rest  are  executed  with  the 
troops. 

The  color  salute:  Being  at  a  carry,  slip  the  right  hand 
up  the  pike  to  the  height  of  the  eye,  then  lower  the  pike 
by  straightening  the  arm  to  the  front. 


CHAPTER  X 

TENT   PITCHING 
Shelter  Tents 

792.  Being  in  line  or  in  column  of  .platoons,  the  cap- 
tain commands:  FORM  FOR  SHELTER  TENTS. 

The  officers,  first  sergeant,  and  guides  fall  out;  the 
cooks  form  a  file  on  the  flank  o'f  the  company  nearest 
the  kitchen,  the  first  sergeant  and  right  guide  fall  in, 
forming  the  right  file  of  the  company;  blank  files  are 
filled  by  the  file  closers  or  by  men  taken  from  the  front 
rank;  the  remaining  guide,  or  guides  and  file  closers 
form  on  a  convenient  flank.  Before  forming  column 
of  platoons,  preparatory  to  pitching  tents,  the  company 
may  be  redivided  into  two  or  more  platoons,  regardless 
of  the  size  of  each. 

793.  The  captain  then  causes  the  company  to  take  in- 
tervals as  described  in  the  "School  of  the  Squad,"  and  com- 
mands :  PITCH  TENTS. 

At  the  command  pitch  tents,  each  man  steps  off  ob- 
liquely to  the  right  with  the  right  foot  and  lays  his  rifle 
on  the  ground,  the  butt  of  the  rifle  near  the  toe  o'f  the 
right  foot,  muzzle  to  the  front,  barrel  to  the  left,  and 
steps  back  into  his  place ;  each  front-rank  man  then  draws 
his  bayonet  and  sticks  it  in  the  ground  by  the  outside  of 
the  right  heel. 

Equipments  are  unslung,  packs  opened,  shelter  half  and 
pins  removed;   each  man  then  spreads  his  shelter  hal'f, 

114 


TENT   PITCHING  115 

small  triangle  to  the  rear,  flat  upon  the  ground  the  tent 
is  to  occupy,  the  rear-rank  man's  half  on  the  right.  The 
halves  are  then  buttoned  together;  the  guy  loops  at 
both  ends  of  the  lower  half  are  passed  through  button- 
holes provided  in  lower  and  upper  halves;  the  whipped 
end  of  the  guy  rope  is  then  passed  through  both  guy 
loops  and  secured,  this  at  both  ends  of  the  tent.  Each 
front-rank  man  inserts  the  muzzle  of  his  rifle  under  the 
front  end  of  the  ridge  and  holds  the  rifle  upright,  sling 
to  the  front,  heel  of  butt  on  the  ground  beside  the  bayo- 
net. His  rear-rank  man  pins  down  the  front  corners  of 
the  tent  on  the  line  of  bayonets,  stretching  the  tent  taut; 
he  then  inserts  a  pin  in  the  eye  of  the  front  guy  rope 
and  drives  the  pin  at  such  a  distance  in  'front  of  the 
rifle  as  to  hold  the  rope  taut;  both  men  go  to  the  rear  of 
the  tent,  each  pins  down  a  corner,  stretching  the  sides 
and  rear  of  the  tent  before  securing;  the  rear-rank  man 
then  inserts  an  intrenching  tool,  or  a  bayonet  in  its  scab- 
bard, under  the  rear  end  of  the  ridge  inside  the  tent, 
the  front-rank  man  pegging  down  the  end  of  the  rear 
guy  ropes;  the  rest  of  the  pins  are  then  driven  by  both 
men,  the  rear-rank  man  working  on  the  right. 

The  front  flaps  of  the  tent  are  not  fastened  down,  but 
are  thrown  back  on  the  tent. 

As  soon  as  the  tent  is  pitched  each  man  arranges  his 
equipment  and  the  contents  of  his  pack  in  the  tent  and 
stands  at  attention  in  front  of  his  own  half  on  the  line 
with  the  front  guy-rope  pin. 

To  have  a  uniform  slope  when  the  tents  are  pitched, 
the  guy  ropes  should  all  be  of  the  same  length. 

In  shelter-tent  camps,  in  localities  where  suitable  ma- 
terial is  procurable,  tent  poles  may  be  improvised  and  used 
in  lieu  o'f  the  rifle  and  bayonet  or'  intrenching  tool  as 
supports  for  the  shelter  tent. 


ii6        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

794.  When  the  pack  is  not  carried  the  company  is 
formed  for  shelter  tents,  intervals  are  taken,  arms  are 
laid  aside  or  on  the  ground,  the  men  are  dismissed  and 
proceed  to  the  wagon,  secure  their  packs,  return  to  their 
places,  and  pitch  tents  as  heretofore  described. 

795.  Double  shelter  tents  may  be  pitched  by  first  pitch- 
ing one  tent  as  heretofore  described,  then  pitching  a  sec- 
ond tent  against  the  opening  of  the  first,  using  one  rifle 
to  support  both  tents,  and  passing  the  front  guy  ropes 
over  and  down  the  sides  o"f  the  opposite  tents.  The  front 
corner  of  one  tent  is  not  pegged  down,  but  is  thrown 
back  to  permit  an  opening  into  the  tent. 

Single  Sleeping  Bag 

796.  Spread  the  poncho  on  the  ground,  buttoned  end  at 
the  feet,  buttoned  side  to  the  left;  fold  the  blanket  once 
across  its  short  dimension  and  lay  it  on  the  poncho,  folded 
side  along  the  right  side  of  the  poncho;  tie  the  blanket 
together  along  the  left  side  by  means  o'f  the  tapes  pro- 
vided; fold  the  left  half  of  the  poncho  over  the  blanket 
and  button  it  together  along  the  side  and  bottom. 

Double  Sleeping  Bag 

797.  Spread  one  poncho  on  the  ground,  buttoned  end 
at  the  feet,  buttoned  side  to  the  left;  spread  the  blankets 
on  top  O'f  the  poncho;  tie  the  edges  of  the  blankets  to- 
gether with  the  tapes  provided,  spread  a  second  poncho 
on  top  of  the  blankets,  buttoned  end  at  the  feet,  but- 
toned side  to  the  right ;  button  the  two  ponchos  together 
along  both  sides  and  across  the  end. 

To  Strike  Shelter  Tents 

798.  The  men  standing  in  front  of  their  tents :  STRIKE 
TENTS. 


TENT   PITCHING  ii; 

Equipments  and  rifles  are  removed  from  the  tent;  the 
tents  are  lowered,  packs  made  up,  and  equipments  slung, 
and  the  men  stand  at  attention  in  the  places  originally 
occupied  after  taking  intervals. 


To  Pitch  Tents 

799.  To  pitch  all  types  of  army  tents,  except  shelter 
and  conical  v^^all  tents :  Mark  line  of  tents  by  driving 
a  wall  pin  on  the  spot  to  be  occupied  by  the  right  (or 
le'ft)  corner  of  each  tent.  For  pyramidal  tents  the  in- 
terval between  adjacent  pins  should  be  about  30  feet, 
which  will  give  a  passage  of  two  feet  between  tents. 
Spread  tripod  on  the  ground  where  the  center  of  tent  is 
to  be,  if  tripod  is  used.  Spread  the  tent  on  the  ground 
to  be  occupied,  door  to  the  front,  and  place  the  right 
(or  left)  front  wall  loop  over  the  pin.  The  door  (or 
doors  i'f  more  than  one)  being  fastened  and  held  to- 
gether at  the  bottom,  the  left  (or  right)  corner  wall 
loop  is  carried  to  the  left  (or  right)  as  far  as  it  will  go 
and  a  wall  pin  driven  through  it,  the  pin  being  placed 
in  line  with  the  right  (or  left)  corner  pins  already 
driven.  At  the  same  time  the  rear  corner  wall  loops 
are  pulled  to  the  rear  and  outward  so  that  the  rear  wall 
of  the  tent  is  stretched  to  complete  the  rectangle.  Wall 
pins  are  then  driven  through  these  loops.  Each  corner 
pin  should  be  directly  in  rear  of  the  corresponding  front 
corner  pin,  making  a  rectangle.  Unless  the  canvas  be 
wet,  a  small  amount  of  slack  should  be  allowed  before 
the  corner  pins  are  driven.  According  to  the  size  of 
the  tent  one  or  two  men,  crawling  under  the  tent  if 
necessary,  fit  each  pole  or  ridge  or  upright  into  the  ring 
or  ridge  pole  holes,  and  such  accessories  as  hood,  fly 
and  brace   ropes  are  adjusted.     If  a  tripod  be  used  an 


ii8        THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

additional  man  will  go  under  the  tent  to  adjust  it.  The 
tent,  steadied  by  the  remaining  men,  one  at  each  corner 
guy  rope,  will  then  be  raised.  If  the  tent  is  a  ward  or 
storage  type,  corner  poles  will  now  be  placed  at  the  four 
corners.  The  four  corner  guy  ropes  are  then  placed 
over  the  lower  notches  o'f  the  large  pins  driven  in  pro- 
longation of  the  diagonals  at  such  distance  as  to  hold 
the  walls  and  ends  of  the  tent  vertical  and  smooth  when 
the  guy  ropes  are  drawn  taut.  A  wall  pin  is  then  driven 
through  each  remaining  wall  loop  and  a  large  pin  for 
each  guy  rope  is  driven  in  line  with  the  corner  guy  pins 
already  driven.  The  guy  ropes  of  the  tent  are  placed 
over  the  lower  notches,  while  the  guy  ropes  of  the  fly 
are  placed  over  the  upper  notches,  and  are  then  drawn 
taut.  Brace  ropes,  when  used,  are  then  secured  to  stakes 
or  pins  suitably  placed. 

800.  Rescinded. 

Conical  Wall  Tent 

801.  Drive  the  door  pin  and  center  pin  8  feet  3  inches 
apart.  Using  the  hood  lines  with  center  pin  as  center, 
describe  two  concentric  circles  with  radii  8  feet  3  inches 
and  II  'feet  3  inches.  In  the  outer  circle  drive  two  door 
guy  pins  3  feet  apart.  At  intervals  of  about  3  feet  drive 
the  other  guy  pin. 

In  other  respects  conical  tents  are  erected  practically 
as  in  the  case  of  pyramidal  tents. 

To  Strike  Common,  Wall,  Pyramidal,  and  Conical  Wall 

Tents 

802.  STRIKE  TENTS, 

The  men  first  remove  all  pins  except  those  of  the  four 
corner  guy  ropes,  or  the  four  quadrant  guy  ropes  in  the 


TENT   PITCHING  119 

case  o'f  the  conical  wall  tent.     The  pins  are  neatly  piled 
or  placed  in  their  receptacle. 

One  man  holds  each  guy,  and  when  the  ground  is  clear 
the  tent  is  lowered,  folded,  or  rolled  and  tied,  the  poles 
or  tripod  and  pole  fastened  together,  and  the  remaining 
pins  collected. 

To  Fold  Tents 

803.  For  folding  common,  wall,  hospital,  and  storage 
tents:  Spread  the  tent  flat  on  the  ground,  folded  at  the 
ridge  so  that  bottoms  of  side  walls  are  even,  ends  of  tent 
forming  triangles  to  the  right  and  left;  fold  the  triangu- 
lar ends  of  the  tent  in  toward  the  middle,  making  it  rec- 
tangular in  shape;  fold  the  top  over  about  9  inches;  fold 
the  tent  in  two  by  carrying  the  top  fold  over  clear  to  the 
foot;  fold  again  in  two  'from  the  top  to  the  foot;  throw 
all  guys  on  tent  except  the  second  from  each  end;  fold 
the  ends  in  so  as  to  cover  about  two-thirds  of  the  sec- 
ond cloths;  fold  the  left  end  over  to  meet  the  turned-in 
edge  o'f  the  right,  end,  then  fold  the  right  end  over  the 
top,  completing  the  bundle;  tie  with  the  two  exposed 
guys. 

Method  of  Folding  Pyramidal  Tent 

The  tent  is  thrown  toward  the  rear  and  the  back  wall 
and  roof  canvas  pulled  out  smooth.  This  may  be  most 
easily  accomplished  by  leaving  the  rear-corner  wall  pins 
in  the  ground  with  the  wall  loops  attached,  one  man  at 
each  rear-corner  guy,  and  one  holding  the  square  iron 
in  a  perpendicular  position  and  pulling  the  canvas  to  its 
limit  away  from  the  former  front  of  the  tent.  This 
leaves  the  three  remaining  sides  of  the  tent  on  top  of 
the  rear  side,  with  the  door  side  in  the  middle. 


I20        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Now  carry  the  right-front  corner  over  and  lay  it  on 
the  left-rear  corner.  Pull  all  canvas  smooth,  throw  guys 
toward  square  iron,  and  put  bottom  edges  even.  Then 
take  the  right-front  corner  and  return  to  the  right,  cover- 
ing the  right-rear  corner.  This  folds  the  right  side  of 
the  tent  on  itself,  with  the  crease  in  the  middle  and  un- 
der the  'front  side  of  tent. 

Next  carry  the  left-front  corner  to  the  right  and  back 
as  described  above;  this  when  completed  will  leave  the 
front  and  rear  sides  of  the  tent  lying  smooth  and  flat  and 
the  two  side  walls  folded  inward,  each  on  itself. 

Place  the  hood  in  the  square  iron  which  has  been 
folded  downward  toward  the  bottom  o'f  tent,  and  con- 
tinue to  fold  around  the  square  iron  as  a  core,  pressing 
all  folds  down  flat  and  smooth,  and  parallel  with  the 
bottom  of  the  tent.  If  each  fold  is  compactly  made  and 
the  canvas  kept  smooth,  the  last  fold  will  exactly  cover 
the  lower  edge  of  the  canvas.  Lay  all  exposed  guys 
along  the  folded  canvas  except  the  two  on  the  center 
•width,  which  should  be  pulled  out  and  away  from  bottom 
edge  to  their  extreme  length  for  tying.  Now,  beginning 
at  one  end,  fold  toward  the  center  on  first  seam  (that 
joining  first  and  second  widths)  and  fold  again  toward 
the  center  so  that  the  already  folded  canvas  will  come 
to  within  about  3  inches  of  the  middle  width.  Then  fold 
over  to  opposite  edge  of  middle  width  of  canvas.  Then 
begin  folding  from  opposite  end,  folding  the  first  width 
in  half,  then  making  a  second  'fold  to  come  within  about 
4  or  5  inches  of  that  already  folded;  turn  this  fold  en- 
tirely over  that  already  folded.  Take  the  exposed  guys 
and  draw  them  taut  across  each  other;  turn  bundle  over 
on  the  under  guy;  cross  guys  on  top  of  bundle,  drawing 
tight.  Turn  bundle  over  the  crossed  guys  and  tie  length- 
wise. 


TENT   PITCHING  121 

When  properly  tied  and  pressed  together  this  will  make 
a  package  11  by  23  by  34  inches,  requiring  about  8,855 
cubic  inches  to  store  or  pack. 

Stencil  the  organization  designation  on  the  lower  half 
of  the  middle  width  of  canvas  in  the  back  wall. 


CHAPTER   XI 


SIGNALS    AND    SIGNALING 


43. 


Arm  Signals 

The  following  arm  signals  are  prescribed.  In  mak- 
ing signals  either  arm  may  be  used. 
Officers  who  receive  signals  on  the 
firing  line  "repeat  back"  at  once  to 
prevent  misunderstanding. 

Forward,  march.  Carry  the  hand 
to  the  shoulder ;  straighten  and  hold 
the  arm  horizontally,  thrusting  it  in 
direction  of  march. 

This  signal  is  also  used  to  execute 
quick  time  from  double  time. 


Forward 


Fig.  22 


Halt.  Carry  the  hand  to  the 
shoulder;  thrust  the  hand  upward 
and  hold  the  arm  vertically. 

Double  time,  march.  Carry  the 
hand  to  the  shoulder ;  rapidly  thrust 
the  hand  upward  the  full  extent  of 
the  arm  several  times. 


122 


Halt:  Arm  held  stationary. 

Double  Time:  Arm  moved 

up  and  down  several  times. 

Fig.  23 


SIGNALS   AND    SIGNALING 


123 


Squads  right,  march.  Raise 
the  arm  laterally  until  hori- 
zontal; carry  it  to  a  vertical 
position  above  the  head  and 
swing  it  several  times  be- 
tween the  vertical  and  hori- 
zontal positions. 

Squads  left,  march.  Raise 
the  arm  laterally  until  hori- 


Souads 
Left 


Fig.  25 

Squads  right  about, 
march  (if  in  close  order) 
or,  To  the  rear,  march  (if 
in  skirmish  line).  Extend 
the  arm  vertically  above 
the  head ;  carry  it  laterally 
downward  to  the  side  and 
swing  it  several  times  be- 
tween the  vertical  and 
downward  positions. 


Squads 
Right 


Fig.  24 

zontal,  carry  it  downward 
to  the  side  and  swing  it 
several  times  between  the 
downward  and  horizontal 
positions. 


To  the 
rear 

Squads 
Right  About 

Fig.  26 


124        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 


Change  direction  or 
Column  right  (left), 
march.  The  hand  on 
the  side  toward  which 
the  change  of  direc- 
tion is  to  be  made  is 
carried  across  the 
body  to  the  opposite 
shoulder,  forearm 
horizontal;    then 


swing  in  a  hori- 
zontal plane, 
arm  extended, 
pointing  in  the 
new  direction. 

As  skirmish- 
ers,  march. 
Raise  both  arms 
laterally  until 
horizontal. 


^s:^ 


U^ 


AsSkirmJaht 
Fig.  28 


As  Skirmishers     GLilde  Center 
Fia  29 


As  skirmish- 
ers,  guide  cen- 
ter,  march , 
Raise  both  arms 
laterally  until 
horizontal; 
swing  both  sim- 
ultaneously up- 
ward until  ver- 
tical and  return 
to  the  horizon- 
tal; repeat  sev- 
eral times. 


SIGNALS   AND   SIGNALING 


125 


As  skirmishers,  guide  right  (left),  march.  Raise  both 
arms  laterally  until  horizontal;  hold  the  arm  on  the  side 
of  the  guide  steadily  in  the  horizontal  position ;  swing  the 
other  upward  until  vertical  and  return  it  to  the  horizontal  • 
repeat  several  times. 


As  Skirmishers 
Guide  Right 


Fig.  30 


Assemble,  march.  Raise 
the  arm  vertically  to  its 
full  extent  and  describe 
horizontal  circles. 

Range,  or  Change  Ele- 
vati  on.  To  announce 
range,  extend  the  arm  to- 
ward the  leaders  or  men 
for  whom  the  signal  is  in- 
tended, fist  closed;  by 
keeping  the  fist  closed 
battle  sight  is  indicated; 
by  opening  and  closing 
the  fist,  expose  thumb  and 
fingers  to  a  number  equal 
to  the  hundreds  of  yards; 


-rAssemble 


Fig.  31 


126        THE   CANTONMENT    MANUAL 


<  troopg 


To  announce  range 
Battle  sight 

Fig.  32 


to  add  50  yards  de- 
scribe a  short  hori- 
zontal line  with  fore- 
finger. To  change 
elevation,  indicate  the 
amount  of  increase  or 
decrease  by  fingers  as 
above ;  point  upward 
to  indicate  increase 
and  downward  to  in- 
dicate decrease. 


What  range  are  you  using?  or 
What  is  the  range  f  Extend  the  arms 
toward  the  person  addressed,  one 
hand  open,  palm  to  the  front,  resting 
on  the  other  hand,  fist  closed. 


What  range  are 
you  using  or: 
What  l5  the  range 

Fig.  33 


Are  you  ready 
or:  I  am  ready 


Fig.  34 


Are  you  ready?  or  /  am  ready. 
Raise  the  hand,  fingers  extended  and 
joined,  palm  toward  the  person  ad- 
dressed. 


SIGNALS   AND   SIGNALING 


Commence  firing. 
Move  the  arm  extended 
in  full  length,  hand 
palm  down,  several 
times  through  a  hori- 
zontal arc  in  front  of 
the  body. 

Fire  faster.  Execute 
rapidly  the  signal 
^'Commence  firing." 

Fire  slower.  Execute 
slowly  the  signal  "Com- 
mence firing." 

To  swing  the  cone  of 
fire  to  the  right,  or  left. 
Extend  the  arm  in  full 


Commence  Rr'mg 

Fig.  35 


To  swing  cone  of  fire  to  right 

Fix  bayonet.     Simulate 
hand  in  "Fix  bayonet." 

Fig.  36 


length  to  the  front, 

palm  to  the  right 
(left)  ;  swing  the 
arm  to  the  right 
(left),  and  point 
in  the  direction  of 
the  new  target. 

Fix  Bayonet 
Simulate  the  move- 
ment of  the  right 
hand  in  "Fix  bay- 
onet" (paragraph 
95). 


128        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Suspend  firing.  Raise  and  hold 
the  forearm  steadily  in  a  hori- 
zontal position  in  front  of  the 
forehead,  palm  of  the  hand  to 
the  front. 

Cease  firing.  Raise  the  fore- 
arm as  in  suspend  firing  and 
swing  it  up  and  down  several 
times  in  front  of  the  face. 


Suspend  firing. 

For  Cease  firing - 
Swing  arm  up  and 
down  several  times* 

Fig.  37 

Platoon.  Extend  the  arm 
horizontally  toward  the  platoon 
leader;  describe  small  circles 
with  the  hand.    (See  par.  44.) 


KmJ 

Platoon 

Fig.  38 


^ 


Fig.  39 


Squad.  Extend  the  arm  hori- 
zontally tdward  the  platoon  leader ; 
swing  the  hand  up  and  down 
from  the  wrist.     (  See  par .  44. ) 


Rush.    Same  as  douhle  time. 

44.  The  signals  pl<itoon  and  squad  are  intended  pri- 
marily for  communication  between  the  captain  and  his 
platoon  leaders.     The  signal  platoon  or  squad  mdicates 


SIGNALS   AND    SIGNALING  129 

that  the  platoon  commander  is  to  cause  the  signal  which 
follows  to  be  executed  by  platoon  or  squad. 

Whistle.     One  short  blast  means  attention  to  orders; 
one  long  blast  of  the  whistle  means  cease  firing. 

SIGNALS    AND    CODES 
General  Service  Code.     (International   Morse   Code) 


A    .  — 

N   —  . 

B    —  .  .    . 

0 

C    —  .  —  . 

P    . . 

D   —  .  . 

Q  --.- 

E    . 

R    .  —  . 

F    .  .  —  . 

S    .  .  . 

G . 

T    — 

H   .  .  .  . 

U   .  .  — 

V   .  .  .  — 

J     • 

W  . 

K   —  .  — 

X   —  .  .  — 

L    .  —  .  . 

Y    —  . 

M 

Z .  . 

Numerals 

I   . 

6  —  ...  . 

2  .  . 

7 •  •  • 

3  .  .  • 

8 .  . 

4  ....  — 

9 . 

5 

0 

Punctuation 

Period 

Comma   

Interrrogation  .. 



10 

I30        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 


The  More  Important  Conventional  Flag  Signals 

For  communication  between  the  firing  line  and  the 
reserve  or  commander  in  rear.  In  transmission,  their 
concealment  from  the  enemy's  view  should  be  insured. 
In  the  absence  of  signal  flags  the  headdress  or  other 
substitute  may  be  used. 


Letter  of 
alphabet 


AD  F 

C  C  C 

C    F 

D  T 

F 

F   B 

F   L 

G     

H   H   H 

K    

L   T 

O     

(Ardois  X  sem- 
aphore   only.) 

(All  m  e  t  h  o  d  R 
but  ardois  and 
semaphore.) 

P     

P    

R   N 

R    T 

8   8   8 

8  U  F 

T    


If    signaled     from    the 

rear    to    the    firing 

line 


Ammunition  going  for- 
ward      

Charge  (mandatory  at 
all  times)    

Cease   firing    

Double   time  or  "rush" 

Commence   firing    

Fix  bayonets    

Artillery  fire  is  causing 

us  losses    

Move  forward    

Halt     

Negative    

Left    

What  is  the  (R  N, 
etc. )  ?    Interrogatory 


What     is     the     (R     N. 
etc.)  ?    Interrogatory 


Affirmative    

Aclcnowledgment    

Range    

Right   

Support  going   forward 

Suspend   firing    

Target 


If     signaled     from    the 

firing    line    to    the 

rear 


Ammunition    required. 

Am  about  to  charge  if 
no  instructions  to  the 
contrary. 

Cease    firing. 

Double  time  or  "rush." 

Commence    firing. 

Fix  bayonets. 

Artillery  fire  Is  causing 
us  losses. 

Preparing  to  move  for- 
ward. 

Halt. 

Negative. 

Left. 

What  is  the  (R  N. 
etc.)?    Interrogatory. 


What     is    the     (R     N. 
etc.)  ?    Interrogatory. 


Affirmative. 

Aclcnowledgment. 

Range. 

Right. 

Support  needed. 

Suspend    firing. 

Target.    


SIGNALS   AND    SIGNALING 


131 


THE  TVro-ABM  SSlCAPHORS  CODE. 


ERROR 


NEGA' 


PREPARATORY 


ANNULLING 


Z     M    5     J      IM^   O      O 


INTElRROGAtORY 


Fig.  40-A 


132        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 


U 


ACKNOWLE.DCC 


rr 


w 


INTERVAL 


Th 


NUMERALS 


Fig.  40- B 


CHAPTER   XII 

INTERIOR    GUARD    DUTY 

Sergeant  of  the  Guard 

In  this  chapter  the  authors  have  included  the  portions 
of  the  Manual  of  Interior  Guard  Duty  of  the  U.  S.  Army 
which  refer  to  the  noncommissioned  officers  and  pri- 
vates. The  paragraph  numbers  are  the  same  as  those  in 
the  Interior  Guard  Manual. 

Note. — The  following  is  taken  from  the  Manual  of 
Interior  Guard  Duty  of  the  U.  S.  Army. 

80.^  The  senior  noncommissioned  officer  of  the  guard 
always  acts  as  sergeant  of  the  guard,  and,  if  there  be  no 
officer  of  the  guard,  will  perform  the  duties  prescribed 
for  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

81.  The  sergeant  of  the  guard  has  general  supervision 
over  the  other  noncommissioned  officers  and  the  musi- 
cians and  privates  of  the  guard,  and  must  be  thoroughly 
familiar  with  all  of  their  orders  and  duties. 

82.  He  is  directly  responsible  for  the  property  under 
charge  of  the  guard,  and  will  see  that  it  is  properly  cared 
for.  He  will  make  lists  of  articles  taken  out  by  working 
parties,  and  see  that  all  such  articles  are  duly  returned. 
If  they  are  not,  he  will  immediately  report  the  fact  to 
the  commander  of  the  guard. 

1  These  numbers  correspond  to  the  paragraph  numbers 
of  the  Manual  of  Interior  Guard  Duty. 

133 


134        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

83.  Immediately  after  guard  mounting  he  will  prepare 
duplicate  lists  of  the  names  of  all  noncommissioned 
officers,  musicians,  and  privates  of  the  guard,  showing 
the  relief  and  post  or  duties  of  each.  One  list  will  be 
handed  as  soon  as  possible  to  the  commander  of  the 
guard;  the  other  will  be  retained  by  the  sergeant. 

84.  He  will  see  that  all  reliefs  are  turned  out  at  the 
proper  time,  and  that  the  corporals  thoroughly  understand, 
and  are  prompt  and  efficient  in,  the  discharge  of  their 
duties. 

85.  During  the  temporary  absence  from  the  guardhouse 
of  the  sergeant  of  the  guard,  the  next  in  rank  of  the  non- 
commissioned officers  will  perform  his  duties. 

86.  Should  the  corporal  whose  relief  is  on  post  be 
called  away  from  the  guardhouse,  the  sergeant  of  the 
guard  will  designate  a  noncommissioned  officer  to  take 
the  corporal's  place  until  his  return. 

87.  The  sergeant  of  the  guard  is  responsible  at  all  times 
for  the  proper  police  of  the  guardhouse  or  guard  tent, 
including  the  ground  about  them  and  the  prison  cells. 

88.  At  ''first  sergeant's  call"  he  will  proceed  to  the 
adjutant's  office  and  obtain  the  guard  report  book. 

89.  When  the  national  or  regimental  colors  are  taken 
from  the  stacks  of  the  color  line,  the  color  bearer  and 
guard,  or  the  sergeant  of  the  guard,  unarmed,  and  two 
armed  privates  as  a  guard,  will  escort  the  colors  to  the 
colonel's  quarters,  as  prescribed  for  the  color  guard  in 
the  drill  regulations  of  the  arm  of  the  service  to  which 
the  guard  belongs. 

90.  He  will  report  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  any 
suspicious  or  unusual  occurrence  that  comes  under  his 
notice,  will  warn  him  of  the  approach  of  any  armed  body, 
and  will  send  to  him  all  persons  arrested  by  the  guard. 

91.  When  the  guard  is  turned  out,  its  formation  will 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  135 

be  as  follows:  The  senior  noncommissioned  officer,  if 
commander  of  the  guard,  is  on  the  right  of  the  right 
guide;  if  not  commander  of  the  guard,  he  is  in  the  line  of 
file  closers,  in  rear  of  the  right  four  of  the  guard;  the 
next  in  rank  is  right  guide;  the  next  left  guide;  the  others 
in  the  line  of  file  closers,  usually,  each  in  rear  of  his 
relief;  the  field  music,  with  its  left  three  paces  to  the 
right  of  the  right  guide.  The  reliefs  form  in  the  same 
order  as  when  the  guard  was  first  divided,  except  that 
if  the  guard  consists  of  dismounted  cavalry  and  infantry, 
the  cavalry  forms  on  the  left. 

92.  The  sergeant  forms  the  guard,  calls  the  roll,  and,  if 
not  in  command  of  the  guard,  reports  to  the  commander 
of  the  guard  as  prescribed  in  drill  regulations  for  a  first 
sergeant  forming  a  troop  or  company;  the  guard  is  not 
divided  into  platoons  or  sections,  and,  except  when  the 
whole  guard  is  formed  prior  to  marching  off,  fours  are 
not  counted. 

93.  The  sergeant  reports  as  follows:  "Sir,  all  present 
or  accounted  for,"  or  "Sir,  (so-and-so)  is  absent";  or 
if  the  roll  call  has  been  omitted,  "Sir,  the  guard  is 
formed."  Only  men  absent  without  proper  authority  are 
reported  absent.  He  then  takes  his  place,  without  com- 
mand. 

94.  At  night,  the  roll  may  be  called  by  reliefs  and 
numbers  instead  of  names;  thus,  the  first  relief  being  on 
post:  Second  relief;  No.  i;  No.  2,  etc.;  Third  relief. 
Corporal;  No.  i,  etc. 

95.  Calling  the  roll  will  be  dispensed  with  in  forming 
the  guard  when  it  is  turned  out  as  a  compliment,  on  the 
approach  of  an  armed  body,  or  in  any  sudden  emergency; 
but  in  such  cases  the  roll  may  be  called  before  dismissing 
the  guard.     If  the  guard  be  turned  out  for  an  officer  en- 


136        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

titled  to  inspect  it,  the  roll  will,  unless  he  directs  other- 
wise, always  be  called  before  a  report  is  made. 

96.  The  sergeant  of  the  guard  has  direct  charge  of  the 
prisoners,  except  during  such  time  as  they  may  be  under 
the  charge  of  the  prisoner  guard  or  overseers,  and  is 
responsible  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  for  their 
security. 

97.  He  will  carry  the  keys  of  the  guardroom  and  cells, 
and  will  not  suffer  them  to  leave  his  personal  possession 
while  he  is  at  the  guardhouse,  except  as  hereinafter  pro- 
vided. (Par.  99.)  Should  he  leave  the  guardhouse  for 
any  purpose,  he  will  turn  the  keys  over  to  the  noncom- 
missioned officer  who  takes  his  place.     (Par.  85.) 

98.  He  will  count  the  knives,  forks,  etc.,  given  to  the 
prisoners  with  their  food,  and  see  that  none  of  these 
articles  remain  in  their  possession.  He  will  see  that  no 
forbidden  articles  of  any  kind  are  conveyed  to  the 
prisoners. 

99.  Prisoners,  when  paraded  with  the  guard,  are  placed 
in  line  in  its  center.  The  sergeant,  immediately  before 
forming  the  guard,  will  turn  over  his  keys  to  the  non- 
commissioned officer  at  the  guardhouse.  Having  formed 
the  guard,  he  will  divide  it  into  two  nearly  equal  parts. 
Indicating  the  point  of  division  with  his  hand,  he  com- 
mands : 

I.  Right  (or  left),  2,  FACE,  3.  Forward,  4.  'MARCH, 
5.  Guard,  6.  HALT,  7.  Left  (or  right),  8.  FACE. 

If  the  first  command  be  right  face,  the  right  half  of  the 
guard  only  will  execute  the  movements;  if  left  face, 
the  left  half  only  will  execute  them.  The  command  halt 
is  given  when  sufficient  interval  is  obtained  to  admit  the 
prisoners.  The  doors  of  the  guardroom  and  cells  are 
then  opened  by  the  noncommissioned  officer  having  the 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  137 

keys.  The  prisoners  will  file  out  under  the  supervision 
of  the  sergeant,  the  noncommissioned  officer,  and  sentinel 
on  duty  at  the  guardhouse,  and  such  other  sentinels  as 
may  be  necessary;  they  will  form  in  line  in  the  interval 
between  the  two  parts  of  the  guard. 

100.  To  return  the  prisoners  to  the  guardroom  and 
cells,  the  sergeant  commands: 

I.  Prisoners,  2.  Right  (or  left),  3.  FACE,  4.  Column 
right  (or  left),  5.  MARCH. 

The  prisoners,  under  the  same  supervision  as  before, 
return  to  their  proper  rooms  or  cells. 

loi.  To  close  the  guard,  the  sergeant  commands: 

I.  Left  (or  right),  2.  FACE,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH, 
5.  Guard,  6.  HALT,  7.  Right  (or  left),  8.  FACE. 

The  left  or  right  half  only  of  the  guard,  as  indicated, 
execute  the  movements. 

102.  If  there  be  but  few  prisoners,  the  sergeant  may 
indicate  the  point  of  division  as  above,  and  form  the 
necessary  interval  by  the  commands: 

I.  Right  (or  left)  step,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Guard,  4. 
HALT,  and  close  the  intervals  by  the  commands: 

I.  Left  (or  right)  step,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Guard,  4. 
HALT. 

103.  If  sentinels  are  numerous,  reliefs  may,  at  the 
discretion  of  the  commanding  officer,  be  posted  in  detach- 
ments, and  sergeants,  as  well  as  corporals,  required  to 
relieve  and  post  them. 

Corporal  of  the  Guard 

104.  A  corporal  of  the  guard  receives  and  obeys  orders 
from  none  but  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard 
senior  to  himself,  the  officers  of  the  guard,  the  officer  of 
the  day,  and  the  commanding  officer. 


138         THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

105.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  corporal  of  the  guard  to  post 
and  relieve  sentinels,  and  to  instruct  the  members  of  his 
relief  in  their  orders  and  duties. 

106.  Immediately  after  the  division  of  the  guard  into 
reliefs  the  corporals  will  assign  the  members  of  their 
respective  reliefs  to  posts  by  number,  and  a  soldier  so 
assigned  to  his  post  will  not  be  changed  to  another  during 
the  same  tour  of  guard  duty,  unless  by  direction  of  the 
commander  of  the  guard  or  higher  authority.  Usually, 
experienced  soldiers  are  placed  over  the  arms  of  the 
guard,  and  at  remote  and  responsible  posts. 

107.  Each  corporal  will  then  make  a  list  of  the  mem- 
bers of  his  relief,  including  himself.  This  list  will  con- 
tain the  number  of  the  relief,  the  name,  the  company,  and 
the  regiment  of  every  member  thereof,  and  the  post  to 
which  each  is  assigned.  The  list  will  be  made  in  dupli- 
cate, one  copy  to  be  given  to  the  sergeant  of  the  guard 
as  soon  as  completed,  the  other  to  be  retained  by  the 
corporal. 

108.  When  directed  by  the  commander  of  the  guard, 
the  corporal  of  the  first  relief  forms  his  relief,  and  then 
commands:  CALL  OFF. 

Commencing  on  the  right,  the  men  call  off  alternately 
rear  and  front  rank,  "one/*  "two,"  "three,"  "four"  and 
so  on;  if  in  single  rank,  they  call  oflf  from  right  to  left. 
The  corporal  then  commands: 

I.  Right,  2.  FACE,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH, 
The  corporal  marches  on  the  left,  and  near  the  rear 
file,  in  order  to  observe  the  march.  The  corporal  of  the 
old  o^uard  marches  on  the  right  of  the  leading  file,  and 
takes  command  when  the  last  one  of  the  old  sentinels 
is  relieved,  changing  places  with  the  corporal  of  the  new 
guard. 

109.  When  the  relief  arrives  at  six  paces  from  a  sen- 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  139 

tinel  (see  par.  168),  the  corporal  halts  it  and  commands, 
according  to  the  number  of  the  post:  No.  ( — ). 

Both  sentinels  execute  port  arms  or  saber;  the  new 
sentinel  approaches  the  old,  halting  about  one  pace  from 
him.     (See  par.  172.) 

no.  The  corporals  advance  and  place  themselves,  fac- 
ing each  other,  a  little  in  advance  of  the  new  sentinel,  the 
old  corporal  on  his  right,  the  new  corporal  on  his  left, 
both  at  a  right  shoulder,  and  observe  that  the  old  sentinel 
transmits  correctly  his  instructions. 

The  following  diagram  will  illustrate  the  positions 
taken : 

A 

R  D 

D    D    D    D    n 

D  D    D    D 

D 
B 

R  is  the  relief;  A,  the  new  corporal;  B,  the  old;  C,  the 
new  sentinel ;  D,  the  old. 

111.  The  instructions  relative  to  the  post  having  been 
communicated,  the  new  corporal  commands,  POST;  both 
sentinels  then  resume  the  right  shoulder,  face  toward  the 
new  corporal,  and  step  back  so  as  to  allow  the  relief  to 
pass  in  front  of  them.  The  new  corporal  then  com- 
mands, I.  Forward,  2.  MARCH;  the  old  sentinel  takes 
his  place  in  rear  of  the  relief  as  it  passes  him,  his  piece 
in  the  same  position  as  those  of  the  relief.  The  new 
sentinel  stands  fast  at  a  right  shoulder  until  the  relief 
has  passed  six  paces  beyond  him,  when  he  walks  his  post. 
The  corporals  take  their  places  as  the  relief  passes  them. 

112.  Mounted  sentinels  are  posted  and  relieved  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  same  principles. 


I40        THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

113.  On  the  return  of  the  old  relief,  the  corporal  of 
the  new  guard  falls  out  when  the  relief  halts;  the  cor- 
poral of  the  old  guard  forms  his  relief  on  the  left  of  the 
old  guard,  salutes,  and  reports  to  the  commander  of  his 
guard:  "Sir,  the  relief  is  present/*  or  "Sir,  (so  and  so) 
is  absent,"  and  takes  his  place  in  the  guard. 

114.  To  post  a  relief  other  than  that  which  is  posted 
when  the  old  guard  is  relieved,  its  corporal  commands: 

I.  (Such)  relief,  2.  FALL  IN;  and  if  arms  are  stacked, 
they  are  taken  at  the  proper  commands. 

The  relief  is  formed  facing  to  the  front,  with  arms  at 
an  order;  the  men  place  themselves  according  to  the 
numbers  of  their  respective  posts,  viz.,  two,  four,  six, 
and  so  on,  in  the  front  rank,  and  one,  three,  five,  and  so 
on,  in  the  rear  rank.  The  corporal,  standing  about  two 
paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  his  relief,  then  commands : 
CALL  OFF. 

The  men  call  off  as  prescribed.  The  corppral  then  com- 
mands: I.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3.  Order,  4.  ARMS; 
faces  the  commander  of  the  guard,  executes  the  rifle 
salute,  reports:  "Sir,  the  relief  is  present"  or  "Sir,  (so 
and  so)  is  absent";  he  then  takes  his  place  on  the  right 
at  order  arms. 

115.  When  the  commander  of  the  guard  directs  the 
corporal:  "Post  your  relief,"  the  corporal  salutes  and 
posts  his  relief  as  prescribed  (pars.  108  to  iii)  ;  the  cor- 
poral of  the  relief  on  post  does  not  go  with  the  new  relief, 
except  when  necessary  to  show  the  way. 

116.  To  dismiss  the  old  relief,  it  is  halted  and  faced  to 
the  front  at  the  guardhouse  by  the  corporal  of  the  new 
relief,  who  then  falls  out;  the  corporal  of  the  old  relief 
then  steps  in  front  of  the  relief  and  dismisses  it  by  the 
proper  commands. 

117.  Should   the   pieces  have   been  loaded  before   the 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  141 

relief  was  posted,  the  corporal  will,  before  dismissing 
the  relief,  see  that  no  cartridges  are  left  in  the  chambers 
or  magazines.  The  same  rule  applies  to  sentinels  over 
prisoners. 

118.  Each  corporal  will  thoroughly  acquaint  himself 
with  all  the  special  orders  of  every  sentinel  on  his  rehef, 
and  see  that  each  understands  and  correctly  transmits 
such  orders  in  detail  to  his  successor. 

119.  There  should  be  at  least  one  noncommissioned 
officer  constantly  on  the  alert  at  the  guardhouse,  usually 
the  corporal  whose  relief  is  on  post.  This  noncommis- 
sioned officer  takes  post  near  the  entrance  of  the  guard- 
house, and  does  not  fall  in  with  the  guard  when  it  is 
formed.     He  will  have  his  rifle  constantly  with  him. 

120.  Whenever  it  becomes  necessary  for  the  corporal 
to  leave  his  post  near  the  entrance  of  the  guardhouse,  he 
will  notify  the  sergeant  of  the  guard,  who  will  at  once 
take  his  place,  or  designate  another  noncommissioned 
officer  to  do  so. 

121.  He  will  see  that  no  person  enters  the  guardhouse, 
or  guard  tent,  or  crosses  the  posts  of  the  sentinels  there 
posted  without  proper  authority. 

122.  Should  any  sentinel  call  for  the  corporal  of  the 
guard,  the  corporal  will,  in  every  case,  at  once  and  quickly 
proceed  to  such  sentinel.  He  will  notify  the  sergeant  of 
the  guard  before  leaving  the  guardhouse. 

123.  He  will  at  once  report  to  the  commander  of  the 
guard  any  violation  of  regulations  or  any  unusual  occur- 
rence which  is  reported  to  him  by  a  sentinel,  or  which 
comes  to  his  notice  in  any  other  way. 

124.  Should  a  sentinel  call:  "The  Guard,"  the  corporal 
will  promptly  notify  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

125.  Should  a  sentinel  call:  "Relief,"  the  corporal  will 
at  once  proceed  to  the  post  of  such  sentinel,  taking  with 


142        THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

him  the  man  next  for  duty  on  that  post.  If  the  sentinel 
is  relieved  for  a  short  time  only,  the  corporal  will  again 
post  him  as  soon  as  the  necessity  for  his  relief  ceases. 

126.  When  the  countersign  is  used,  the  corporal  at 
the  posting  of  the  relief  during  whose  tour  challenging 
is  to  begin  gives  the  countersign  to  the  members  of  the 
relief,  excepting  those  posted  at  the  guardhouse. 

127.  He  will  wake  the  corporal  whose  relief  is  next 
on  post  in  time  for  the  latter  to  verify  the  prisoners,  form 
his  relief,  and  post  it  at  the  proper  hour. 

128.  Should  the  guard  be  turned  out,  each  corporal 
will  call  his  own  relief,  and  cause  its  members  to  fall  in 
promptly. 

129.  Tents  or  bunks  in  the  same  vicinity  will  be  desig- 
nated for  the  reliefs  so  that  all  the  members  of  each 
relief  may,  if  necessary,  be  found  and  turned  out  by  the 
corporal  in  the  least  time  and  with  the  least  confusion. 

130.  When  challenged  by  a  sentinel  while  posting  his 
relief,  the  corporal  commands:  i.  Relief,  2.  HALT;  to 
the  sentinel's  challenge  he  answers  "Relief"  and  at  the 
order  of  the  sentinel  he  advances  alone  to  give  the  coun- 
tersign, or  to  be  recognized.  When  the  sentinel  says, 
*' Advance  relief*'  the  corporal  commands:  i.  Forward, 
2.  MARCH. 

If  to  be  relieved,  the  sentinel  is  then  relieved  as 
prescribed, 

131.  Between  retreat  and  reveille,  the  corporal  of  the 
guard  will  challenge  all  suspicious  looking  persons  or 
parties  he  may  observe,  first  halting  his  patrol  or  relief, 
if  either  be  with  him.  He  will  advance  them  in  the  same 
manner  that  sentinels  on  post  advance  like  parties  (pars. 
191  to  197),  but  if  the  route  of  a  patrol  is  on  a  continu- 
ous chain  of  sentinels,  he  should  not  challenge  persons 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  143 

coming  near  him  unless  he  has  reason  to  believe  that  they 
have  eluded  the  vigilance  of  sentinels. 

132.  Between  retreat  and  reveille,  whenever  so  ordered 
by  an  officer  entitled  to  inspect  the  guard,  the  corporal 
will  call:  "Turn  out  the  guard,''  announcing  the  title 
of  the  officer,  and  then,  if  not  otherwise  ordered,  he  will 
salute  and  return  to  his  post. 

133.  As  a  general  rule,  he  will  advance  parties  ap- 
proaching the  guard  at  night  in  the  same  manner  that 
sentinels  on  post  advance  like  parties.  Thus,  the  sentinel 
at  the  guardhouse  challenges  and  repeats  the  answer  to 
the  corporal,  as  prescribed  hereinafter  (par.  200)  ;  the  cor- 
poral, advancing  at  "port  arms,"  says:  "Advance  (so  and 
so)  with  the  countersign,"  or  "to  be  recognised,"  if  there 
be  no  countersign  used;  the  countersign  being  correctly 
given,  or  the  party  being  duly  recognized,  the  corporal 
says:  "Advance  (so  and  so)";  repeating  the  answer  to 
the  challenge  of  the  sentinel. 

134.  When  officers  of  different  rank  approach  the 
guardhouse  from  different  directions  at  the  same  time, 
the  senior  will  be  advanced  first,  and  will  not  be  made  to 
wait  for  his  junior. 

135.  Out  of  ranks  and  under  arms,  the  corporal  salutes 
with  the  rifle  salute.  He  will  salute  all  officers  whether 
by  day  or  night. 

136.  The  corporal  will  examine  parties  halted  and  de- 
tained by  sentinels,  and  if  he  has  reason  to  believe  the 
parties  have  no  authority  to  cross  sentinel's  posts,  will 
conduct  them  to  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

137.  The  corporal  of  the  guard  will  arrest  all  suspicious 
looking  characters  prowling  about  the  post  or  camp,  all 
persons  of  a  disorderly  character  disturbing  the  peace, 
and  all  persons  taken  in  the  act  of  committing  crime 
against   the    Government    on    a   military    reservation    or 


144        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

post.  All  persons  arrested  by  corporals  of  the  guard,  or 
by  sentinels,  will  at  once  be  conducted  to  the  commander 
of  the  guard  by  the  corporal. 

Privates  of  the  Guard 

Your  duty  as  a  sentinel  is  outlined  in  the  following 
eight  suggestions  for  sentinels: 

1.  Never  let  your  rifle  out  of  your  hands. 

2.  As  a  sentinel  you  have  absolute  authority  in  en- 
forcing the  orders  given  to  you. 

3.  Be  ever  on  the  alert. 

4.  Be  sure  you  know  and  understand  the  special  orders 
of  your  post. 

5.  Use  your  common  sense. 

6.  Don't  shoot  at  your  shadow.  Too  many  young 
soldiers  on  Interior  Guard  Duty  shoot  at  the  slightest 
provocation  and  get  in  bad  as  a  result. 

7.  A  sentinel  always  salutes  by  presenting  arms. 

8.  At  night  challenge  everyone,  including  the  com- 
manding officer. 

Privates  of  the  Guard 

154.  Privates  are  assigned  to  reliefs  by  the  commander 
of  the  guard,  and  to  posts,  usually,  by  the  corporal  of 
their  relief.  They  will  not  change  from  one  relief  or  post 
to  another  during  the  same  tour  of  guard  duty  unless  by 
proper  authority. 

Orders  for  Sentinels 

155.  Orders  for  sentinels  are  of  two  classes:  General 
orders  and  special  orders.  General  orders  apply  to  all 
sentinels.  Special  orders  relate  to  particular  posts  and 
duties. 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  145 

156.  Sentinels   will   be   required   to   memorize   the   fol- 
lowing : 
.  My  general  orders  are : 

1.  To  take  charge  of  this  post  and  all  Government 
property  in  view. 

2.  To  walk  my  post  in  a  military  manner,  keeping 
always  on  the  alert  and  observing  everything  that  takes 
place  within  sight  or  hearing. 

3.  To  report  all  violations  of  orders  I  am  instructed 
to  enforce. 

4.  To  repeat  all  calls  from  posts  more  distant  from  the 
guardhouse  than  my  own. 

5.  To  quit  my  post  only  when  properly  relieved. 

6.  To  receive,  obey,  and  pass  on  to  the  sentinel  who 
relieves  me  all  orders  from  the  commanding  officer, 
officer  of  the  day,  and  officers  and  noncommissioned 
officers  of  the  guard  only. 

7.  To  talk  to  no  one  except  in  line  of  duty. 

8.  In  case  of  fire  or  disorder,  to  give  the  alarm. 

9.  To  allow  no  one  to  commit  a  nuisance  on  or  near 
m,y  post. 

10.  In  any  case  not  covered  by  instructions  to  call  the 
corporal  of  the  guard. 

11.  To  salute  all  officers  and  all  colors  and  standards 
not  cased. 

12.  To  be  especially  watchful  at  night,  and,  during  the 
time  for  challenging,  to  challenge  all  persons  on  or  near 
my  post,  and  to  allow  no  one  to  pass  without  proper 
authority. 

Regulations  Relating  to  the  General  Orders  for  Sentinels 

No.  I :   To  take  charge  of  this  post  and  all  Government 
property  in  view. 
11 


146        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

157.  All  persons,  of  whatever  rank  in  the  service,  are 
required  to  observe  respect  toward  sentinels  and  members 
of  the  guard  when  such  are  in  the  performance  of  their 
duties. 

158.  A  sentinel  will  at  once  report  to  the  corporal  of 
the  guard  every  unusual  or  suspicious  occurrence  noted. 

159.  He  will  arrest  suspicious  persons  prowling  about 
the  post  or  camp  at  any  time,  all  parties  to  a  disorder 
occurring  on  or  near  his  post,  and  all,  except  authorized 
persons,  who  attempt  to  enter  the  camp  at  night,  and  will 
turn  over  to  the  corporal  of  the  guard  all  persons  arrested. 

160.  The  number,  limits,  and  extent  of  his  post  will 
invariably  constitute  part  of  the  special  orders  of  a  sen- 
tinel on  post.  The  limits  of  his  post  should  be  so  defined 
as  to  include  every  place  to  which  he  is  required  to  go  in 
the  performance  of  his  duties. 

No.  2:  To  walk  my  post  in  a  military  manner,  keep- 
ing always  on  the  alert  and  observing  everything  that 
takes  place  within  sight  or  hearing. 

161.  A  sentinel  is  not  required  to  halt  and  change  the 
position  of  his  rifle  on  arriving  at  the  end  of  his  post,  nor 
to  execute  to  the  rear,  march,  precisely  as  prescribed  in 
the  drill  regulations,  but  faces  about  while  walking,  in 
the  manner  most  convenient  to  him,  and  at  any  part  of 
his  post  as  may  be  best  suited  to  the  proper  performance 
of  his  duties.  He  carries  his  rifle  on  either  shoulder,  and 
in  wet  or  severe  weather,  when  not  in  a  sentry  box,  may 
carry  it  at  a  secure. 

162.  Sentinels  when  in  sentry  boxes  stand  at  ease. 
Sentry  boxes  will  be  used  in  wet  weather  only,  or  at 
other  times  when  specially  authorized  by  the  commanding 
officer. 

163.  In  very  hot  weather,  sentinels  may  be  authorized 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  147 

to  stand  at  ease  on  their  posts,  provided  they  can  effect- 
ively discharge  their  duties  in  this  position,  but  they 
v^^ill  take  advantage  of  this  privilege  only  on  the  express 
authority  of  the  officer  of  the  day  or  the  commander  of 
the  guard. 

164.  A  mounted  sentinel  may  dismount  occasionally  and 
lead  his  horse  but  will  not  relax  his  vigilance. 

No.  3  :  To  report  all  violations  of  orders  I  am  instructed 
to  enforce. 

165.  A  sentinel  v^ill  ordinarily  report  a  violation  of 
orders  when  he  is  inspected  or  relieved,  but  if  the  case 
be  urgent  he  will  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard,  and  also, 
if  necessary,  will  arrest  the  offender. 

No.  4:  To  repeat  all  calls  from  posts  more  distant 
from  the  guardhouse  than  my  own. 

166.  To  call  the  corporal,  or  the  guard,  for  any  pur- 
pose other  than  relief,  fire,  or  disorder  (pars.  167  and 
173),  a  sentinel  will  call,  ''Corporal  of  the  guard,  No. 
( — ),"  adding  the  number  of  his  post.  In  no  case  will 
any  sentinel  call,  ''Never  mind  the  corporal";  nor  will 
the  corporal  heed  such  call  if  given. 

No.  5 :    To  quit  my  post  only  when  properly  relieved, 

167.  If  relief  becomes  necessary,  by  reason  of  sick- 
ness or  other  cause,  a  sentinel  will  call,  "Corporal  of  the 
guard.  No.   ( — ),  Relief,"  giving  the  number  of  his  post. 

168.  Whenever  a  sentinel  is  to  be  relieved,  he  will  halt, 
and  with  arms  at  a  right  shoulder,  will  face  toward  the 
relief  when  it  is  thirty  paces  from  him.  He  will  come 
to  a  port  arms  with  the  new  sentinel,  and  in  a  low  tone 
will  transmit  to  him  all  the  special  orders  relating  to  the 
post,  and  any  other  information  which  will  assist  him  to 
better  perform  his  duties. 

No.  6:  To  receive,  obey,  and  pass  on  to  the  sentinel 
who  relieves  me  all  orders  from  the  commanding  officer. 


148        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

officer    of    the    day,    and   officers    and   noncommissioned 
officers  of  the  guard  only. 

169.  During  this  tour  of  duty  a  soldier  is  subject  to  the 
orders  of  the  commanding  officer,  officer  of  the  day,  and 
officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard  only; 
but  any  officer  is  competent  to  investigate  apparent  vio- 

'lations  of  regulations  by  members  of  the  guard. 

170.  A  sentinel  will  quit  his  place  on  an  explicit  order 
from  any  person  from  whom  he  lawfully  receives  orders 
while  on  post;  under  no  circumstances  will  he  yield  it 
to  any  other  person.  Unless  necessity  therefor  exists,  no 
person  will  require  a  sentinel  to  quit  his  piece  even  to 
allow  it  to  be  inspected. 

171.  A  sentinel  will  not  divulge  the  countersign  (pars. 
209  to  217)  to  any  one  except  the  sentinel  who  relieves 
him,  or  to  a  person  from  whom  he  properly  receives 
orders,  on  such  person's  verbal  order  given  personally. 
Privates  of  the  guard  will  not  use  the  countersign  ex- 
cept in  the  performance  of  their  duties  while  posted  as 
sentinels. 

No.  7:   To  talk  to  no  one  except  in  line  of  duty. 

172.  When  calling  for  any  purpose,  challenging,  or 
holding  communication  with  any  person,  a  dismounted 
sentinel,  armed  with  a  rifle  or  saber,  will  take  the  position 
of  "port"  arms  or  saber.  At  night  a  dismounted  sen- 
tinel, armed  with  a  pistol,  takes  the  position  of  raise  pistol 
in  challenging  or  holding  communication.  A  mounted 
sentinel  does  not  ordinarily  draw  his  weapon  in  the  day- 
time when  challenging  or  holding  conversation;  but  if 
drawn,  he  holds  it  at  advance  rifle,  raise  pistol,  or  port 
saber,  according  as  he  is  armed  with  a  rifle,  pistol,  or 
saber.  At  night,  in  challenging  and  holding  conversation, 
his  weapon  is  drawn  and  held  as  just  prescribed,  depend- 
ing on  whether  he  is  armed  with  a  rifle,  pistol,  or  saber. 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  149 

No.  8:     In  case  of  fire  or  disorder,  to  give  the  alarm. 

173.  In  case  of  fire,  a  sentinel  will  call,  ''Fire,  No.  ( — )," 
adding  the  number  of  his  post;  if  possible,  he  will  extin- 
guish the  fire  himself.  In  case  of  disorder,  he  will  call: 
*'The  Guard,  No.  ( — ),"  adding  the  number  of  his  post. 
If  the  danger  be  great,  he  will,  in  either  case,  discharge 
his  piece  before  calling. 

No.  11:  To  salute  all  officers  and  all  colors  and  stand- 
ards not  cased. 

174.  When  not  engaged  in  the  performance  of  a  spe- 
cific duty,  the  proper  execution  of  which  would  prevent 
it,  a  member  of  the  guard  will  salute  all  officers  who  pass 
him.  This  rule  applies  at  all  hours  of  the  day  or  night, 
except  in  the  case  of  mounted  sentinels  armed  with  a 
rifle  or  pistol,  or  dismounted  sentinels  armed  with  a  pis- 
tol, after  challenging.     (See  par.  181.) 

175.  Sentinels  will  salute  as  follows:  A  dismounted 
sentinel  armed  with  a  rifle  or  saber  salutes  by  present- 
ing arms;  if  otherwise  armed,  he  salutes  with  the  right 
hand. 

A  mounted  sentinel,  if  armed  with  a  saber  and  the 
saber  be  drawn,  salutes  by  presenting  saber;  otherwise 
he  salutes  in  all  cases  with  the  right  hand. 

176.  To  salute,  a  dismounted  sentinel,  with  piece  at  a 
right  shoulder  or  saber  at  a  carry,  halts  and  faces  toward 
the  person  to  be  saluted  when  the  latter  arrives  within 
thirty  paces. 

The  limit  within  which  individuals  and  insignia  of  rank 
can  be  readily  recognized  is  assumed  to  be  about  30  paces, 
and  therefore  at  this  distance  cognizance  is  taken  of  the 
person  or  party  to  be  saluted. 

177.  The  salute  is  rendered  at  6  paces;  if  the  person 
to  be  saluted  does  not  arrive  within  that  distance,  then 
when  he  is  nearest. 


150        THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

178.  A  sentinel  in  a  sentry  box,  armed  with  a  rifle, 
stands  at  attention  in  the  doorway  on  the  approach  of  a 
person  or  party  entitled  to  salute,  and  salutes  by  present- 
ing arms  according  to  the  foregoing  rules. 

If  armed  with  a  saber,  he  stands  at  a  carry  and  salutes 
as  before. 

179.  A  mounted  sentinel  on  a  regular  post  halts,  faces, 
and  salutes  in  accordance  with  the  foregoing  rules.  If 
doing  patrol  duty,  he  salutes,  but  does  not  halt  unless 
spoken  to. 

180.,  Sentinels  salute,  in  accordance  with  the  foregoing 
rules,  all  persons  and  parties  entitled  to  compliments  from 
the  guard  (pars.  224,  227,  and  228)  :  officers  of  the  Army, 
Navy,  and  Marine  Corps;  military  and  naval  officers  of 
foreign  powers;  officers  of  volunteers,  and  militia  officers 
^hen  in  uniform. 

181.  A  sentinel  salutes  as  just  prescribed  when  an 
officer  comes  on  his  post;  if  the  officer  holds  communica- 
tion with  the  sentinel,  the  sentinel  again  salutes  when 
the  officer  leaves  him. 

During  the  hours  when  challenging  is  prescribed,  the 
£rst  salute  is  given  as  soon  as  the  officer  has  been  duly 
recognized  and  advanced.  A  mounted  sentinel  armed 
with  a  rifle  or  pistol,  or  a  dismounted  sentinel  armed 
with  a  pistol,  does  not  salute  after  challenging. 

He  stands  at  advance  rifle  or  raise  pistol  until  the 
officer  passes. 

182.  In  case  of  the  approach  of  an  armed  party  of  the 
guard,  the  sentinel  will  halt  when  it  is  about  30  paces 
from  him,  facing  toward  the  party  with  his  piece  at  the 
right  shoulder.  If  not  himself  relieved,  he  will,  as  the 
party  passes,  place  himself  so  that  the  party  will  pass  in 
front  of  him ;  he  resumes  walking  his  post  when  the  party 
has  reached  6  paces  beyond  him. 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  151 

183.  An  officer  is  entitled  to  the  compliments  pre- 
scribed, whether  in  uniform  or  not. 

184.  A  sentinel  in  communication  with  an  officer  will 
not  interrupt  the  conversation  to  salute.  In  the  case  of 
seniors  the  officer  will  salute,  whereupon  the  sentinel  will 
salute. 

185.  When  the  flag  is  being  lowered  at  retreat,  a  sen- 
tinel on  post  and  in  view  of  the  flag  will  face  the  flag, 
and,  at  the  first  note  of  the  "Star  Spangled  Banner"  or 
To  the  colors,  will  come  to  a  present  arms.  At  the  sound- 
ing of  the  last  note  he  will  resume  walking  his  post. 

No.  12:  To  he  especially  watchful  at  night  and  during 
the  time  for  challenging,  to  challenge  all  persons  on  or 
near  my  post,  and  to  allow  no  one  to  pass  without  proper 
authority. 

186.  During  challenging  hours,  if  a  sentinel  sees  any 
person  or  party  on  or  near  his  post,  he  will  advance 
rapidly  along  his  post  toward  such  person  or  party  and 
when  within  about  30  yards  will  challenge  sharply,. 
''HALT.  Who  is  there?"  He  will  place  himself  in  the 
best  possible  position  to  receive  or,  if  necessary,  to  arrest 
the  person  or  party. 

187.  In  case  a  mounted  party  be  challenged,  the  sen- 
tinel will  call,  "HALT.     DISMOUNT.     Who  is  thereT 

188.  The  sentinel  will  permit  only  one  of  any  party  to 
approach  him  for  the  purpose  of  giving  the  countersign 
(pars.  209  to  217),  or  if  no  countersign  be  used,  of  being' 
duly  recognized.  When  this  is  done  the  whole  party  is 
advanced,  i.  e.,  allowed  to  pass. 

189.  In  all  cases  the  sentinel  must  satisfy  himself 
.beyond  a  reasonable  doubt  that  the  parties  are  what  they 

represent  themselves  to  be  and  have  a  right  to  pass.  If 
he  is  not  satisfied,  he  must  cause  them  to  stand,  and  call 
the  corporal  of  the  guard.     So,  likewise,  if  he  have  no 


152        THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

authority  to  pass  persons  with  the  countersign,  or  when 
the  party  has  not  the  countersign,  or  gives  an  incorrect 
one. 

190.  A  sentinel  will  not  permit  any  person  to  approach 
so  close  as  to  prevent  the  proper  use  of  his  own  weapon 
before  recognizing  the  person  or  receiving  the  counter- 
sign. 

191.  When  two  or  more  persons  approach  in  one  party, 
the  sentinel,  on  receiving  an  answer  that  indicates  that 
some  one  in  the  party  has  the  countersign,  will  say, 
*'Advance  one  with  the  countersign,^  and,  if  the  counter- 
sign is  given  correctly,  will  then  say,  "Advance  (so  and 
so)"  repeating  the  answer  to  his  challenge.  Thus,  if 
the  answer  be,  "Relief  (friends  with  the  countersign, 
patrol,  etc.),"  the  sentinel  will  say,  "Advance  one  with 
the  countersign";  then,  "Advance  relief  (friends,  patrol, 
etc.)." 

192.  If  a  person  having  the  countersign  approach  alone, 
he  is  advanced  to  give  the  countersign.  Thus,  if  the 
answer  be,  "Friend  with  the  countersign  (or  officer  of 
the  day,  or,  etc.),"  the  sentinel  will  say,  "Advance,  friend 
(or  officer  of  the  day,  or,  etc.)  with  the  countersign" ; 
then,  "Advance,  friend  (or  officer  of  the  day,  or,  etc.)." 

193.  If  two  or  more  persons  approach  a  sentinel's  post 
from  different  directions  at  the  same  time,  all  such  per- 
sons are  challenged  in  turn  and  required  to  halt  and  to 
remain  halted  until  advanced. 

The  senior  is  first  advanced,  in  accordance  with  the 
foregoing  rules. 

194.  If  a  party  is  already  advanced  and  in  communi- 
cation with  a  sentinel,  the  latter  will  challenge  any  other 
party  that  may  approach;  if  the  party  challenged  be 
senior  to  the  one  already  on  his  post,  the  sentinel  will 
advance  the  new  party  at  once.     The  senior  may  allow 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  153 

him  to  advance  any  or  all  of  the  other  parties;  other- 
wise, the  sentinel  will  not  advance  any  of  them  until  the 
senior  leaves  him.  He  will  then  advance  the  senior  only 
of  the  remaining  parties,  and  so  on. 

195.  The  following  order  of  rank  will  govern  a  sen- 
tinel in  advancing  different  persons  or  parties  approaching 
his  post:  Commanding  officer,  officer  of  the  day,  officer 
of  the  guard,  officers,  patrols,  reliefs,  noncommissioned 
officers  of  the  guard  in  order  of  rank,  friends. 

196.  A  sentinel  will  never  allow  himself  to  be  sur- 
prised, nor  permit  two  parties  to  advance  upon  him  at 
the  same  time. 

197.  If  no  countersign  be  used,  the  rules  for  challeng- 
ing are  the  same.  The  rules  for  advancing  parties  are 
modified  only  as  follows:  Instead  of  saying,  "Advance 
(so  and  so)  with  the  countersign,"  the  sentinel  will  say, 
"Advance  (so  and  so)  to  be  recognised."  Upon  recog- 
nition he  will  say,  "Advance   (so  and  so)." 

198.  Answers  to  a  sentinel's  challenge  intended  to  con- 
fuse or  mislead  him  are  prohibited,  but  the  use  of  such 
an  answer  as  "Friends  with  the  countersign"  is  not  to 
be  understood  as  misleading,  but  as  the  usual  answer 
made  by  officers,  patrols,  etc.,  when  the  purpose  of  their 
visit  makes  it  desirable  that  their  official  capacity  should 
not  be  announced. 


Special  Orders  for  Sentinels  at  the  Post  of  the  Guard 

199.  Sentinels  posted  at  the  guard  will  be  required  to 
memorize  the  following: 

Between  reveille  and  retreat  to  turn  out  the  guard  for 
all  persons  designated  by  the  commanding  officer,  for  all 
colors  or  standards  not  cased,  and  in  time  of  war  for 


154        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

all  armed  parties  approaching  my  post,  except  troops  at 
drill  and  reliefs  and  detachments  of  the  guard. 

At  night,  after  challenging  any  person  or  party,  to 
advance  no  one,  but  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard,  repeat- 
ing the  answer  to  the  challenge. 

200.  After  receiving  an  answer  to  his  challenge,  the 
sentinel  calls,  "Corporal  of  the  guard  {so  and  so),"  re- 
peating the  answer  to  the  challenge. 

He  does  not  in  such  cases  repeat  the  number  of  his 
post. 

201.  He  remains  in  the  position  assumed  in  challenging 
until  the  corporal  has  recognized  or  advanced  the  person 
or  party  challenged,  when  he  resumes  walking  his  post, 
or,  if  the  person  or  party  be  entitled  thereto,  he  salutes 
and,  as  soon  as  the  salute  has  been  acknowledged,  resumes 
walking  his  post. 

202.  The  sentinel  at  the  post  of  the  guard  will  be 
notified  by  direction  of  the  commanding  officer  of  the 
presence  in  camp  or  garrison  of  persons  entitled  to  the 
compliment.     (Par.  224.) 

203.  The  following  examples  illustrate  the  manner  in 
which  the  sentinel  at  the  post  of  the  guard  will  turn  out 
the  guard  upon  the  approach  of  persons  or  parties  en- 
titled to  the  compliment  (pars.  224,  227,  and  228)  :  "Turn 
out  the  guard,  Commanding  Officer";  "Turn  out  the 
guard,  Governor  of  a  Territory" ;  "Turn  out  the  guard, 
national  colors" ;  "Turn  out  the  guard,  armed  party"; 
etc. 

At  the  approach  of  the  new  guard  at  guard  mounting 
the  sentinel  will  call  "Turn  out  the  guard,  armed  party" 

204.  Should  the  person  named  by  the  sentinel  not 
desire  the  guard  formed,  he  will  salute,  whereupon  the 
sentinel  will  call  "Never  mind  the  guard." 

205.  After  having  called   "Turn   out  the  guard"  the 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  155 

sentinel  will  never  call  ^'Nevcr  mind  the  guard,''  on  the 
approach  of  an  armed  party. 

206.  Though  the  guard  be  already  formed  he  will  not 
fail  to  call  ''Turn  out  the  guard,"  as  required  in  his 
special  orders,  except  that  the  guard  will  not  be  turndd 
out  for  any  person  while  his  senior  is  at  or  coming  to 
the  post  of  the  guard. 

207.  The  sentinels  at  the  post  of  the  guard  will  warn 
the  commander  of  the  approach  of  any  armed  body  and 
of  the  presence  in  the  vicinity  of  all  suspicious  or  dis- 
orderly persons. 

208.  In  case  of  fire  or  disorder  in  sight  or  hearing, 
the  sentinel  at  the  guardhouse  will  call  the  corporal 
of  the  guard  and  report  the  facts  to  him. 

Countersigns  and  Paroles 

209.  Forty-fourth  Article  of  War.  Any  person  belong- 
ing to  the  armies  of  the  United  States  who  makes  known 
the  watchword  to  any  person  not  entitled  to  receive  it, 
according  to  the  rules  and  discipline  of  war,  or  presumes 
to  give  a  parole  or  watchword  different  from  that  which 
he  received,  shall  suffer  death  or  such  other  punishment 
as  a  court-martial  may  direct.     (See  par.  171.) 

210.  The  countersign  is  a  word  given  daily  from  the 
principal  headquarters  of  a  command  to  aid  guards  and 
sentinels  in  identifying  persons  who  may  be  authorized 
to  pass  at  night. 

It  is  given  to  such  persons  as  may  be  authorized  to 
pass  and  repass  sentinels'  posts  during  the  night,  and  to 
officers,  noncommissioned  officers,  and  sentinels  of  the 
guard. 

211.  The  parole  is  a  word  used  as  a  check  on  the 
countersign  in  order  to  obtain  more  accurate  identifica- 


156        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

tion  of  persons.     It  is  imparted  only  to  those  who  are 
entitled  to  inspect  guards  and  to  commanders  of  guards. 
The  parole  or  countersign,  or  both,  are  sent  sealed  in 
the  form  of  an  order  to  those  entitled  to  them. 

212.  When  the  commander  of  the  guard  demands  the 
parole,  he  will  advance  and  receive  it  as  the  corporal 
receives  the  countersign.     (See  par.  133.) 

213.  As  the  communications  containing  the  parole  and 
countersign  must  at  times  be  distributed  by  many  order- 
lies, the  parole  intrusted  to  many  officers,  and  the  counter- 
sign and  parole  to  many  officers  and  sentinels,  and  as 
both  the  countersign  and  parole  must,  for  large  com- 
mands, be  prepared  several  days  in  advance,  there  is 
always  danger  of  their  being  lost  or  becoming  known  to 
persons  who  would  make  improper  use  of  them;  more- 
over, a  sentinel  is  too  apt  to  take  it  for  granted  that  any 
person  who  gives  the  right  countersign  is  what  he  rep- 
resents himself  to  be ;  hence  for  outpost  duty  there  is 
greater  security  in  omitting  the  use  of  the  countersign 
and  parole,  or  in  using  them  with  great  caution.  The 
chief  reliance  should  be  upon  personal  recognition  or 
identification  of  all  persons   claiming  authority  to  pass. 

Persons  whose  sole  means  of  identification  is  the  coun- 
tersign, or  concerning  whose  authority  to  pass  there  is 
reasonable  doubt,  should  not  be  allowed  to  pass  without 
the  authority  of  the  corporal  of  the  guard  after  proper 
investigation ;  the  corporal  will  take  to  his  next  superior 
any  person  about  whom  he  is  not  competent  to  decide. 

214.  The  countersign  is  usually  the  name  of  a  battle; 
the  parole,  that  of  a  general  or  other  distinguished  person. 

215.  When  they  can  not  be  communicated  daily,  a 
series  of  words  for  some  days  in  advance  may  be  sent 
to  posts  or  detachments  that  are  to  use  the  same  parole 
or  countersign  as  the  main  body. 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  157 

216.  If  the  countersign  be  lost,  or  if  a  member  of  the 
guard  desert  with  it,  the  commander  on  the  spot  will 
substitute  another  for  it  and  report  the  case  at  once  to 
headquarters. 

217.  In  addition  to  the  countersign,  use  may  be  made 
of  preconcerted  signals,  such  as  striking  the  rifle  with 
the  hand  or  striking  the  hands  together  a  certain  number 
of  times^  as  agreed  upon.  Such  signals  may  be  used  only 
by  guards  that  occupy  exposed  points. 

They  are  used  before  the  countersign  is  given,  and 
must  not  be  communicated  to  anyone  not  entitled  to  know 
the  countersign.  Their  use  is  intended  to  prevent  the 
surprise  of  a  sentinel. 

In  the  daytime  signals  such  as  raising  a  cap  or  a 
handkerchief  in  a  prearranged  manner  may  be  used  by 
sentinels  to  communicate  with  the  guard  or  with  each 
other. 

Guarding  Prisoners 

299.  The  sentinel  at  the  post  of  the  guard  has  charge 
of  the  prisoners  except  when  they  have  been  turned  over 
to  the  prisoner  guard  or  overseers.  (Pars.  247  and  300 
to  304,  "I.  D.  R.") 

(a)  He  will  allow  none  to  escape. 

(b)  He  will  allow  none  to  cross  his  post  leaving  the 
guardhouse  except  when  passed  by  an  officer  or  non- 
commissioned  officer  of  the  guard. 

(c)  He  will  allow  no  one  to  communicate  with  pris- 
oners without  permission  from  proper  authority. 

(d)  He  will  promptly  report  to  the  corporal  of  the 
guard  any  suspicious  noise  made  by  the  prisoners. 

(e)  He  will  be  prepared  to  tell  whenever  asked  how 
many  prisoners  are  in  the  guardhouse  and  how  many  are 
out  at  work  or  elsewhere. 


158        THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

Whenever  prisoners  are  brought  to  his  post  returnin^^ 
from  work  or  elsewhere,  he  will  halt  them  and  call  the 
corporal  of  the  guard,  notifying  him  of  the  number  of 
prisoners  returning.  Thus:  "Corporal  of  the  guard,  (so 
many)  prisoners." 

305.  If  a  prisoner  attempts  to  escape,  the  sentinel  will 
call  "Halt"  If  he  fails  to  halt  when  the  sentinel  has 
once  repeated  his  call,  and  if  there  be  no  other  possible 
means  of  preventing  his  escape,  the  sentinel  will  fire 
upon  him. 

Guard  Mounting 

347.  Guard  mounting  will  be  formal  or  informal  as 
the  commanding  officer  may  direct.  It  will  be  held  as 
prescribed  in  the  drill  regulations  of  the  arm  of  the 
service  to  which  the  guard  belongs ;  if  none  is  prescribed, 
then  as  for  infantry.  In  case  the  guard  is  composed 
wholly  o'f  mounted  organizations,  guard  mounting  may 
be  held  mounted. 

348.  When  infantry  and  mounted  troops  dismounted 
are  united  for  guard  mounting,  all  details  form  as  pre- 
scribed for  infantry. 


Formal  Guard  Mounting  for  Infantry 

349.  Formal  guard  mounting  will  ordinarily  be  held 
only  in  posts  or  camps  where  a  band  is  present. 

350.  At  the  assembly,  the  men  designated  for  the 
guard  fall  in  on  their  company  parade  grounds  as  pre- 
scribed in  paragraph  106,  "I.  D.  R."  The  first  sergeant 
then  verifies  the  detail,  inspects  it,  replaces  any  man  un- 
fit to  go  on  guard,  turns  the  detail  over  to  the  senior 
noncommissioned  officer,  and  retires.     The  band  takes  its 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  159 

place  on  the  parade  ground  so  that  the  left  o'f  its  front 
rank  shall  be  12  paces  to  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of 
the  guard  when  the  latter  is  formed. 

351.  At  adjutant's  call,  the  adjutant,  dismounted,  and 
the  sergeant  major  on  his  left,  march  to  the  parade 
ground.  The  adjutant  halts  and  takes  post  so  as  to  be 
12  paces  in  front  of  and  facing  the  center  of  the  guard 
when  formed;  the  sergeant  major  continues  on,  moves 
by  the  left  flank,  and  takes  post,  facing  to  the  left,  12 
paces  to  the  left  of  the  'front  rank  of  the  band;  the 
band  plays  in  quick  or  double  time;  the  details  are 
marched  to  the  parade  ground  by  the  senior  noncommis- 
sioned officers;  the  detail  that  arrives  first  is  marched  to 
the  line  so  that,  upon  halting,  the  breast  of  the  front- 
rank  man  shall  be  near  to  and  opposite  the  left  arm  of 
the  sergeant  major;  the  commander  of  the  detail  halts 
his  detail,  places  himself  in  'front  of  and  facing  the  ser- 
geant major,  at  a  distance  equal  to  or  a  little  greater 
than  the  front  of  his  detail,  and  commands:  i.  Right,  2. 
DRESS.  The  detail  dresses  up  to  the  line  of  the  ser- 
geant major  and  its  commander,  the  right  front-rank  man 
placing  his  breast  against  the  left  arm  o'f  the  sergeant 
major;  the  noncommissioned  officers  take  post  two  paces 
in  rear  of  the  rear  rank  of  the  detail.  The  detail  aligned, 
the  commander  of  the  detail  commands :  FRONT,  salutes, 
and  then  reports:  ''The  detail  is  correct" ;  or  "{So  many) 
sergeants,  corporals,  or  privates  are  absent" ;  the  sergeant 
major  returns  the  salute  with  the  right  hand  after  the  re- 
port is  made;  the  commander  then  passes  by  the  right  of 
the  guard  and  takes  post  in  the  line  of  noncommissioned 
officers  in  rear  of  the  right  file  o5  his  detail. 

Should  there  be  more  than  one  detail,  it  is  'formed  in 
like  manner  on  the  left  of  the  one  preceding;  the  pri- 
vates, noncommissioned  officers,  and  commander  of  each 


i6o        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

detail  dress  on  those  of  the  preceding  details  in  the  same 
rank  or  line;  each  detail  commander  closes  the  rear  rank 
to  the  right  and  fills  blank  files,  as  far  as  practicable, 
with  the  men  from  his  front  rank. 

Should  the  guard  from  a  company  not  include  a  non- 
commissioned officer,  one  will  be  detailed  to  perform  the 
duties  of  commander  of  the  detail.  In  this  case  the  com- 
mander of  the  detail,  after  reporting  to  the  sergeant 
major,  passes  around  the  right  flank  between  the  guard 
and  the  band  and  retires. 

352.  When  the  last  detail  has  formed,  the  sergeant 
major  takes  a  side  step  to  the  right,  draws  sword,  veri- 
fies the  detail,  takes  post  two  paces  to  the  right  and  two 
paces  to  the  front  of  the  guard,  facing  to  the  left,  causes 
the  guard  to  count  off,  completes  the  left  squad,  if  neces- 
sary, as  in  the  school  of  the  company,  and  if  there  be 
more  than  three  squads,  divides  the  guard  into  two  pla- 
toons, again  takes  post  as  described  above  and  commands: 
I.  Open  ranks,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  and  file  closers 
march  backward  four  steps,  halt,  and  dress  to  the  right. 
The  sergeant  major  aligns  the  ranks  and  file  closers  and 
again,  taking  post  as  described  above,  commands: 
FRONT,  moves  parallel  to  the  'front  rank  until  opposite 
the  center,  turns  to  the  right,  halts  midway  to  the  adju- 
tant, salutes,  and  reports:  "Sir,  the  details  are  correct"; 
or,  "Sir,  (so  many)  sergeants,  corporals,  or  privates  are 
absent";  the  adjutant  returns  the  salute,  directs  the  ser- 
geant major:  Take  your  post,  and  then  draws  saber;  the 
sergeant  major  faces  about,  approaches  to  within  two 
paces  of  the  center  of  the  front  rank,  turns  to  the  right, 
moves  three  paces  beyond  the  left  of  the  front  rank, 
turns  to  the  left,  halts  on  the  line  of  the  front  rank,  faces 
about,   and  brings  his  sword  to  the  order.     When  the 


INTERIOR    GUARD    DUTY  i6i 

sergeant  major  has  reported,  the  officer  of  the  guard 
takes  post,  facing  to  the  front,  three  paces  in  front  of 
the  center  of  the  guard,  and  draws  saber. 

The  adjutant  then  commands:  i.  Officer  (or  officers) 
and  noncommissioned  officers,  2.  Front  and  center,  3. 
MARCH. 

At  the  command  center,  the  officers  carry  saber.  At 
the  command  march,  the  officer  advances  and  halts  three 
paces  from  the  adjutant,  remaining  at  the  carry;  the  non- 
commissioned officers  pass  by  the  flanks,  along  the  'front, 
and  form  in  order  of  rank  from  right  to  left,  three  paces 
in  rear  of  the  officer,  remaining  at  the  right  shoulder; 
if  there  is  no  officer  of  the  guard,  the  noncommissioned 
officers  halt  on  a  line  three  paces  from  the  adjutant;  the 
adjutant  then  assigns  the  officers  and  noncommissioned 
officers  according  to  rank,  as  follows:  Commander  of  the 
guard,  leader  of  first  platoon,  leader  of  second  platoon, 
right  guide  of  first  platoon,  left  guide  of  second  platoon, 
left  guide  of  first  platoon,  right  guide  of  second  platoon, 
and  file  closers,  or,  if  the  guard  is  not  divided  into  pla- 
toons: Commander  of  the  guard,  right  guide,  left  guide, 
and  file  closers. 

The  adjutant  then  commands:  I.  Officer  {or  officers) 
and  noncommissioned  officers,  2.  POSTS,  3.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  posts,  all,  except  the  officer  com- 
manding the  guard,  face  about.  At  the  command  march, 
they  take  the  posts  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany with  open  ranks.  The  adjutant  directs:  Inspect 
your  guard,  sir;  at  which  the  officer  commanding  the 
guard  faces  about,  commands:  Prepare  for  inspection, 
returns    saber,    and    inspects    the    guard. 

During  the  inspection,  the  band  plays;  the  adjutant 
returns  saber,  observes  the  general  condition  of  the  guard, 
and  falls  out  any  man  who  is  unfit  for  guard  duty  or  does 


i62        THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

not    present    a    creditable    appearance.      Substitutes    will 
report  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  at  the  guardhouse. 

353.  The  adjutant,  when  so  directed,  selects  orderlies 
and  color  sentinels,  as  prescribed  in  paragraphs  140  and 
141,  and  notifies  the  commander  of  the  guard  of  his 
selection. 

354.  If  there  be  a  junior  officer  of  the  guard  he  takes 
post  at  the  same  time  as  the  senior,  facing  to  the  front, 
3  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  first  platoon;  in 
going  to  the  front  and  center  he  "follows  and  takes  posi- 
tion on  the  left  of  the  senior  and  is  assigned  as  leader 
of  the  first  platoon;  he  may  be  directed  by  the  com- 
mander of  the  guard  to  assist  in  inspecting  the  guard. 

If  there  be  no  officer  of  the  guard,  the  adjutant  in- 
spects the  guard.  A  noncommissioned  officer  command- 
ing the  guard  takes  post  on  the  right  of  the  right  guide, 
when  the  guard  is  in  line ;  and  takes  the  post  o'f  the  officer 
of  the  guard,  when  in  column  or  passing  in  review. 

355.  The  inspection  ended,  the  adjutant  places  himself 
about  30  paces  in  front  of  and  facing  the  center  of  the 
guard,  and  draws  saber;  the  new  officer  of  the  day  takes 
post  in  'front  of  and  facing  the  guard,  about  30  paces 
from  the  adjutant;  the  old  officer  of  the  day  takes  post  3 
paces  to  the  right  of  and  i  pace  ^to  the  rear  of  the  new 
officer  of  the  day;  the  officer  of  the  guard  takes  post  3 
paces  in  front  o'f  its  center,  draws  saber  with  the  adjutant 
and  comes  to  the  order;  thereafter  he  takes  the  same 
relative  positions  as  a  captain  of  a  company. 

The  adjutant  then  commands:  i.  Parade,  2.  REST, 
3.  SOUND  OFF,  and  comes  to  the  order  and  parade  rest. 

The  band,  playing,  passes  in  front  of  the  officer  of  the 
guard  to  the  left  of  the  line,  and  back  to  its  post  on  the 
right,  when  it  ceases  playing. 

The  adjutant  then  comes  to  attention,  carries  saber,  and 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  165 

commands:  i.  Guard,  2.  ATTENTION,  3.  Close  ranks,  4. 
MARCH. 

The  ranks  are  opened  and  closed  as  in  paragraph  745^ 
"I.  D.  R." 

The  adjutant  then  commands:  i.  Present,  2.  ARMS^ 
faces  toward  the  new  officer  of  the  day,  salutes,  and  then 
reports:  Sir,  the  guard  is  formed.  The  new  officer  of 
the  day,  after  the  adjutant  has  reported,  returns  the  salute 
with  the  hand  and  directs  the  adjutant:  March  the  guard 
in  review,  sir. 

The  adjutant  carries  saber,  faces  about,  brings  the 
guard  to  an  order,  and  commands:  i.  At  trail,  platoons 
(or  guard)  right,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Guard,  4.  HALT. 

The  platoons  execute  the  movement;  the  band  turns  to 
the  right  and  places  itself  12  paces  in  front  of  the  first 
platoon. 

The  adjutant  places  himself  6  paces  from  the  flank  and 
abreast  of  the  commander  of  the  guard;  the  sergeant 
major,  6  paces  from  the  left  flank  of  the  second  platoon. 

The  adjutant  then  commands :  i.  Pass  in  review,  2i 
FORWARD,  3.  MARCH. 

The  guard  marches  in  quick  time  past  the  officer  o'f  the 
day,  according  to  the  principles  of  review,  and  is  brought 
to  eyes  right  at  the  proper  time  by  the  commander  of  the 
guard;  the  adjutant,  commander  of  the  guard,  leaders  of 
platoons,  sergeant  major,  and  drum  major  salute. 

The  band,  having  passed  the  officer  of  the  day,  turns  to 
the  left  out  of  the  column,  places  itself  opposite  and  fac- 
ing him,  and  continues  to  play  until  the  guard  leaves  the 
parade  ground.  The  field  music  detaches  itself  from  the 
band  when  the  latter  turns  out  of  the  column,  and,  re- 
maining in  front  of  the  guard,  commences  to  play  when 
the  band  ceases. 

Having  passed  12  paces  beyond  the  officer  of  the  day^ 


i64        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

the  adjutant  halts;  the  sergeant  major  halts  abreast  of  the 
adjutant  and  i  pace  to  his  left;  they  then  return  saber, 
salute,  and  retire;  the  commander  of  the  guard  then  com- 
mands: I.  Platoons,  right  by  squads,  2.  MARCH,  and 
marches  the  guard  to  its  post. 

The  officers  of  the  day  face  toward  each  other  and  sa- 
lute; the  old  officer  of  the  day  turns  over  the  orders  to 
the  new  officer  of  the  day. 

While  the  band  is  sounding  off,  and  while  the  guard  is 
marching  in  review,  the  officers  cfi  the  day  stand  at 
parade  rest  with  arms  folded.  They  take  this  position 
when  the  adjutant  comes  to  parade  rest,  resume  the  at- 
tention with  him,  again  take  the  parade  rest  at  the  first 
note  of  the  marching  review,  and  resume  attention  as  the 
head  of  the  column  approaches. 

The  new  officer  of  the  day  returns  the  salute  of  the 
commander  of  the  guard  and  the  adjutant,  making  one 
salute  with  the  hand.  » 

356.  If  the  guard  be  not  divided  into  platoons,  the  adju- 
tant commands:  i.  At  trail,  guard  right,  2.  MARCH, 
3.  Guard,  4.  HALT,  and  it  passes  in  review  as  above; 
the  commander  o'f  the  guard  is  3  paces  in  front  of  its 
center;  the  adjutant  places  himself  6  paces  from  the  left 
flank  and  abreast  of  the  commander  of  the  guard;  the 
sergeant  covers  the  adjutant  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank. 


Informal  Guard  Mounting  for  Infantry 

357.  Informal  guard  mounting  will  be  held  on  the  pa- 
rade ground  o'f  the  organization  from  which  the  guard 
is  detailed.  It  it  is  detailed  from  more  than  one  organ- 
ization, then  at  such  place  as  the  commanding  officer  may 
direct 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  165 

358.  At  assembly,  the  detail  for  guard  falls  in  on  the 
company  parade  ground.  The  first  sergeant  verifies  the 
detail,  inspects  their  dress  and  general  appearance,  and 
replaces  any  man  unfit  to  march  on  guard.  He  then  turns 
the  detail  over  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  and  re- 
tires. 

359.  At  adjutant's  call,  the  officer  of  the  day  takes 
his  place  15  paces  in  front  of  the  center  o"f  the  guard 
and  commands:  i.  Officer  (or  officers)  and  noncommis- 
sioned officers,  2.  Front  and  center,  3.  MARCH ;  where- 
upon the  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  take  their 
positions,  are  assigned  and  sent  to  their  posts  as  pre- 
scribed in  formal  guard  mounting.     (Par.  352,) 

The  officer  of  the  day  will  then  inspect  the  guard  with 
especial  reference  for  its  fitness  for  the  duty  'for  which 
it  is  detailed,  and  will  select,  as  prescribed  in  paragraphs 
140  and  141,  the  necessary  orderlies  and  color  sentinels. 
The  men  found  unfit  for  guard  will  be  returned  to  quar- 
ters and  will  be  replaced  by  others  found  to  be  suitable, 
if  available  in  the  company.  I'f  none  are  available  in  the 
company,  the  fact  will  be  reported  to  the  adjutant  imme- 
diately after  guard  mounting. 

When  the  inspection  shall  have  been  completed,  the 
officer  of  the  day  resumes  his  position  and  directs  the 
commander  of  the  guard  to  march  the  guard  to  its  post. 

Relieving  the  Old  Guard 

360.  As  the  new  guard  approaches  the  guardhouse,  the 
old  guard  is  formed  in  line,  with  its  field  music  3  paces  to 
its  right;  and  when  the  field  music  at  the  head  of  the  new 
guard  arrives  opposite  its  left,  the  commander  of  the  new 
guard  commands:  i.  Eyes,  2.  RIGHT;  the  commander 
of  the  old  guard  commands:  i.  Present^  2.  ARMS;  com- 


i66        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

manders  of  both  guards  salute.  The  new  guard  marches 
in  quick  time  past  the  old  guard. 

When  the  commander  of  the  new  guard  is  opposite  the 
field  music  of  the  old  guard,  he  commands:  FRONT;  the 
commander  of  the  old  guard  commands:  i.  Order,  2. 
ARMS,  as  soon  as  the  new  guard  shall  have  cleared  the 
old  guard. 

The  field  music,  having  marched  3  paces  beyond  the 
•field  music  of  the  old  guard,  changes  direction  to  the  right, 
and,  followed  by  the  guard,  changes  direction  to  the  left 
when  on  a  line  with  the  old  guard;  the  changes  of  direc- 
tion are  without  command.  The  commander  of  the  guard 
halts  on  the  line  of  the  front  rank  of  the  old  guard,  allows 
his  guard  to  march  past  him,  and  when  its  rear  approaches 
forms  it  in  line  to  the  left,  establishes  the  left  guide  3 
paces  to  the  right  of  the  field  music  o'f  the  old  guard, 
and  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank,  and  then  dresses  his 
guard  to  the  left;  the  field  music  of  the  new  guard  is  3 
paces  to  the  right  of  its  front  rank. 

361.  The  new  guard  being  dressed,  the  commander  of 
each  guard,  in  front  of  and  facing  its  center,  commands: 
I.  Present,  2.  ARMS,  resumes  his  front,  salutes,  carries 
saber,  faces  his  guard  and  commands:  i.  Order,  2.  ARMS, 

Should  a  guard  be  commanded  by  a  noncommissioned 
officer,  he  stands  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  front  rank,  ac- 
cording as  he  commands  the  old  or  new  guard,  and  exe- 
cutes the  rifle  salute. 

362.  After  the  new  guard  arrives  at  its  post,  and  has 
saluted  the  old  guard,  each  guard  is  presented  by  its  com- 
mander to  its  officer  of  the  day ;  if  there  be  but  one  officer 
of  the  day  present,  or  if  one  officer  acts  in  the  capacity  of 
old  and  new  officer  of  the  day,  each  guard  is  presented  to 
him  by  its  commander. 

363.  If  other  persons  entitled  to  a  salute  approach,  each 


INTERIOR   GUARD    DUTY  167 

commander  of  the  guard  will  bring  his  own  guard  to  at- 
tention   if   not   already   at   attention.     The   senior   com- 
mander o'f  the  two  guards  will  then  command:  "i.  01^ 
and  new  guards,  2.  Present,  3.  ARMS/* 

The  junior  will  salute  at  the  command  "Present  Arms'' 
given  by  the  senior.  After  the  salute  has  been  acknowl- 
edged, the  senior  brings  both  guards  to  the  order. 

364.  After  the  salutes  have  been  acknowledged  by  the 
officers  of  the  day,  each  guard  is  brought  to  an  order  by 
its  commander;  the  commander  of  the  new  guard  then 
directs  the  orderly  or  orderlies  to  fall  out  and  report, 
and  causes  bayonets  to  be  fixed  if  so  ordered  by  the  com- 
manding officer;  bayonets  will  not  then  be  unfixed  dur- 
ing the  tour  except  in  route  marches  while  the  guard  is 
actually  marching,  or  when  specially  directed  by  the  com- 
manding officer. 

The  commander  of  the  new  guard  then  falls  out  mem- 
bers of  the  guard  'for  detached  posts,  placing  them  under 
charge  of  the  proper  noncommissioned  officers,  divides 
the  guard  into  three  reliefs,  first,  second,  and  third,  from 
right  to  left,  and  directs  a  list  of  the  guard  to  be  made 
by  reliefs.  When  the  guard  consists  of  troops  o'f  differ- 
ent arms  combined,  the  men  are  assigned  to  reliefs  so  as 
to  insure  a  fair  division  of  duty,  under  rules  prescribed 
by  the  commanding  officer. 

365.  The  sentinels  and  detachments  of  the  old  guard 
are  at  once  relieved  by  members  of  the  new  guard,  the 
two  guards  standing  at  ease  or  at  rest  while  these  changes 
are  being  made.  The  commander  of  the  old  transmits  to 
the  commander  o'f  the  new  guard  all  his  orders,  instruc- 
tions, and  information  concerning  the  guard  and  its  duties. 
The  commander  of  the  new  guard  then  takes  possession 
of  the  guardhouse  and  verifies  the  articles  in  charge  of 

'the  guard. 


i68       THE   CANTONMENT  MANUAL 

366.  If  considerable  time  is  required  to  bring  in  that 
portion  of  the  old  guard  still  on  post,  the  commanding 
officer  may  direct  that  as  soon  as  the  orders  and  prop- 
erty are  turned  over  to  the  new  guard,  the  portion  of 
the  old  guard  at  the  guardhouse  may  be  marched  off  and 
dismissed.  In  such  a  case,  the  remaining  detachment  or 
detachments  of  the  old  guard  will  be  inspected  by  the 
commander  o'f  the  new  guard  when  they  reach  the  guard- 
house. He  will  direct  the  senior  noncommissioned  officer 
present  to  march  these  detachments  off  and  dismiss  them 
in  the  prescribed  manner. 

367.  In  bad  weather,  at  night,  after  long  marches,  or 
when  the  guard  is  very  small,  the  field  music  may  be  dis- 
pensed with. 


CHAPTER   XIII 1 

TARGET    PRACTICE 
Section  1.   Preliminary  Training  in  Marksmanship 

Effective  rifle  fire  is  generally  what  counts  most  in 
battle.  To  have  effective  rifle  fire,  the  men  on  the  firing 
line  must  be  able  to  HIT  what  they  are  ordered  to  shoot 
at.  There  is  no  man  who  can  not  be  taught  how  to  shoot. 
It  is  not  necessary  or  even  desirable  to  begin  instruction 
by  firing  on  a  rifle  range.  A  perfectly  green  recruit  who 
has  never  fired  a  rifle  may  be  made  into  a  good  shot  by 
a  little  instruction  and  some  preliminary  drills  and  exer- 
cises. 

Before  a  man  goes  on  the  range  to  fire  it  is  absolutely 
necessary  that  he  should  know — 

1.  How  to  set  the  rear  sight. 

2.  How  to  sight  or  aim. 

3.  How  to  squeeze  the  trigger. 

4.  How  to  hold  the  rifle  in  all  positions. 

If  he  does  not  know  these  things  it  is  worse  than  use- 
less for  him  to  fire.  He  will  not  improve;  the  more  he 
shoots  the  worse  he  will  shoot,  and  it  will  become  more 
difficult  to  teach  him. 

Section  2.    Sight  Adjustment 

Men  must  be  able  to  adjust  their  sights  correctly  and 
quickly.     An  error  in  adjustment  so  small  that  one  can 

1  This  chapter  is  taken  from  the  "Non-Commissioned  Offic- 
ers' Manual,  U.  S.  Army." 

169 


I70        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

scarcely  see  it  on  the  sight  leaf  is  sufficient  to  cause  a 
miss  at  an  enemy  at  500  yards  and  over. 

Notice  your  rear  sight.  When  the  leaf  is  laid  down 
the  battle  sight  appears  on  top.  This  sight  is  set  'for  547 
yards  and  is  not  adjustable.  When  the  leaf  is  raised 
four  sights  come  into  view.  The  extreme  range  sight 
for  2,850  yards  at  the  top  of  the  leaf  is  seldom  used. 
The  open  sight  at  the  upper  edge  of  the  drrft  slide  is 
adjustable  from  1,400  to  2,750  yards.  To  set  it  the 
upper  edge  of  the  slide  is  made  to  correspond  with  the 
range  reading  on  the  leaf,  and  the  slide  is  then  clamped 
with  the  slide  screw.  This  sight  also  is  seldom  used. 
The  open  sight  at  the  bottom  of  the  triangular  opening 
in  the  drift  slide  is  adjustable  from  100  to  2,450  yards. 
To  set  it  the  index  line  at  the  lower  corners  o'f  the  trian- 
gle is  set  opposite  the  range  graduation  on  the  leaf  and 
the  slide  clamped.  This  and  the  peep  sight  just  below 
it  are  the  sights  most  commonly  used.  To  set  the  peep 
sight,  the  index  lines  on  either  side  of  the  peephole  are 
set  opposite  the  range  desired  and  the  slide  clamped. 

Notice  the  scales  for  the  various  ranges  on  either  side 
of  the  face  of  the  leaf.  The  odd-numbered  hundreds  o'f 
yards  are  on  the  right  and  the  even  on  the  left.  The 
line  below  the  number  is  the  index  line  for  that  range. 
Thus,  to  set  the  sight  for  500  yards  the  index  line  of  the 
slide  is  brought  in  exact  line  with  the  line  on  the  leaf 
below  the  figure  5  and  the  slide  clamped.  To  set  for  550 
yards  the  index  lines  of  the  slide  are  set  half-way  be- 
tween the  index  lines  on  the  leaf  below  the  figure  5  on 
the  right  side  and  the  figure  6  on  the  left  side.  Look  at 
your  sight  carefully  when  setting  it  and  take  great  pains 
to  get  it  exact.  An  error  in  setting  the  width  of  one 
of  the  lines  on  the  leaf  will  cause  an  error  of  about  8 
inches  in  where  your  bullet  will  strike  at  500  yards. 


TARGET   PRACTICE 


171 


The  wind  gauge  is  adjusted  by  means  of  the  windage 
screw  at  the  right  front  end  of  the  base  of  the  sight. 
Each  graduation  on  the  wind-gauge  scale  is  called  a 
"point."  For  convenience  in  adjusting,  the  Hne  of  each 
third  point  on  the  scale  is  longer  than  the  others.  If 
you  turn  the  windage  screw  so  that  the  movable  base 
moves  to  the  right,  you  are  taking  right  windage,  which 
will  cause  your  rifle  to  shoot  more  to  the  right. 

It  is  seldom  that  a  rifle  will  shoot  correctly  to  the  point 
aimed  at  at  a  given  range  with  the  sights  adjusted  exactly 
to  the  scale  graduation  for  that  range.  If  your  sight  is 
not  correctly  adjusted  for  your  shooting  and  you  wish 
to  move  it  slightly  to  make  it  correct,  remember  to  move 
it  in  the  direction  you  wish  your  shot  to  hit.  If  you  wish 
to  shoot  higher  raise  your  sight.  If  to  the  right,  move 
the  wind  gauge  to  the  right.  Always  move  your  sight 
the  correct  amount  in  accordance  with  the  following 
table : 

Section  3.  Table  of  Sight  Corrections 

Showing  to  what  extent  the  point  of  impact  is  moved  by  a 
change  of  25  yards  in  elevation  or  i  point  in  windage 


Correction 

Correction 

by  a  change 

by  a  change 

Range. 

in  elevation 

in  windage 

of  25  yards. 

of  1  point. 

Yards. 

Inches. 

Inches. 

100 

0.72 

4 

200 

1.62 

8 

300 

2.79 

12 

400 

4.29 

16 

500 

6.22 

20 

COO 

8.59 

24 

800 

15.4.S 

32 

1,000 

25.08 

40 

1/2        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

An  easy  rule  to  remember  the  windage  correction  by  is : 
"A  change  of  i  point  of  wind  changes  the  point  of  impact 
4  inches  for  every  lOO  yards  of  range." 

Copy  this  table  and  take  it  to  the  range  with  you. 

Example  of  sight  adjustment:  Suppose  you  are  firing 
at  500  yards.  The  first  two  or  three  shots  show  you  that 
your  shots  are  hitting  about  a  'foot  below  and  a  foot  to 
the  right  of  the  center  of  the  bull's-eye.  From  the  above 
table  you  will  see  that  if  you  will  raise  your  sight  50 
yards  and  move  the  wind  gauge  half  a  point  to  the  left 
the  rifle  will  be  sighted  so  that  if  you  aim  correctly  the 
bullets  will  hit  well  inside  the  bull's-eye. 

Section  4.  Aiming 

Open  sight:  Always  align  your  sights  with  the  front 
sight  squarely  in  the  middle  of  the  "U"  or  notch  of  the 
rear  sight,  and  the  top  of  the  front  sight  even  with  the 
upper  corners  of  the  "U."  (See  Fig.  41-A.)  All  the  sights 
on  the  rifle  except  the  peep  sight  are  open  sights. 

Peep  sight:  Always  center  the  tip  of  the  front  sight  in 
the  center  ai  the  peephole  when  aiming  with  this  sight. 
(See  Fig.  41-B.) 

Always  aim  below  the  bull's-eye.  Never  let  your  front 
sight  appear  to  touch  the  bull's-eye  in  aiming.  Try  to 
see  the  same  amount  of  white  target  between  the  top  of 
the  front  sight  and  the  bottom  of  the  bull's-eye  each 
time.  The  eye  must  be  focused  on  the  bull's-eye  or  mark 
and  not  on  the  front  or  rear  sight. 

Look  at  Figs.  41-A  and  B  until  your  eye  retains  the 
memory  of  them,  then  try  to  duplicate  the  picture  every 
time  you  aim.  Aim  consistently,  always  the  same.  Never 
change  your  aim;  change  your  sight  adjustment  if  your 
shots  are  not  hitting  in  the  right  place. 


TARGET   PRACTICE 


173 


Section  5.  Battle  Sight 

The  battle  sight  is  the  open  sight  seen  when  the  leaf 
is  laid  flat.  It  is  adjusted  for  a  range  of  547  yards.  It 
is  intended  to  be  used  in  battle  when  you  get  nearer  to 
the  enemy  than  600  yards.  Always  aim  at  the  belt  of 
a  standing  enemy,  or  just  below  him  if  he  is  kneeling, 
sitting,  or  lying.  On  the  target  range  this  sight  is  used 
for  rapid  fire.  With  it  the  rifle  shoots  about  2  'feet 
high  at  ranges  between  200  and  400  yards,  so  you  must 


174        THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

aim  below  the  figure  on  the  target  "D"  (page  183).  Find 
out  in  your  instruction  practice  just  how  much  you  must 
aim  below  to  hit  the  figure. 


Section  6.    Trigger  Squeeze 

Use  the  first  joint  of  the  forefinger  to  squeeze  the 
trigger.  It  is  the  most  sensitive  and  best  controlled 
portion  of  the  body.  As  you  place  the  rifle  to  your 
shoulder  squeeze  the  trigger  so  as  to  pull  it  back  about 
one-eighth  of  an  inch,  thus  taking  up  the  sa'fety  portion, 
or  slack,  of  the  pull.  Then  contract  the  trigger  finger 
gradually,  slowly  and  steadily  increasing  the  pressure  on 
the  trigger  while  the  aim  is  being  perfected.  Continue 
the  gradual  increase  of  pressure  so  that  when  the  aim 
has  become  exact  the  additional  pressure  required  to  re- 
lease the  point  of  the  sear  can  be  given  almost  insensibly 
and  without  causing  any  deflection  of  the  rifle.  Put 
absolutely  all  your  mind  and  will  power  into  holding  the 
rifle  steady  and  squeezing  the  trigger  off  without  disturb- 
ing the  aim.  Practice  squeezing  the  trigger  in  this  way 
every  time  you  have  your  rifle  in  your  hand  until  you 
can  surely  and  quickly  do  it  without  a  suspicion  of  a 
jerk. 

By  practice  the  soldier  becomes  familiar  with  the  trig- 
ger squeeze  o'f  his  rifle,  and  knowing  this,  he  is  able  to 
judge  at  any  time,  within  limits,  what  additional  pres- 
sure is  required  for  its  discharge.  By  constant  repetition 
of  this  exercise  he  should  be  able  finally  to  squeeze  the 
trigger  to  a  certain  point  beyond  which  the  slightest  move- 
ment will  release  the  sear.  Having  squeezed  the  trigger 
to  this  point,  the  aim  is  corrected,  and,  when  true,  the 
additional  pressure  is  applied,  the  discharge  follows  and 
the  bullet  flies  true  to  the  mark. 


TARGET  PRACTICE  175 

Section  7.  Firing  Position  ^ 

When  in  ranks  at  close  order  the  positions  are  those 
described  in  the  "Infantry  Drill  Regulations."  When  in 
extended  order,  or  when  firing  alone,  these  positions  may 
be  modified  somewhat  to  better  suit  the  individual.  The 
following  remarks  on  the  various  positions  are  offered 
as  suggestions  whereby  steady  positions  may  be  learned 
by  the  soldier. 

Standing  position:  Face  the  target,  then  execute  right 
half  face.  Plant  the  "feet  about  12  inches  apart.  As  you 
raise  the  rifle  to  the  shoulder  lean  very  slightly  backward 
just  enough  to  preserve  the  perfect  balance  on  both  feet 
which  the  raising  of  the  rifle  has  somewhat  disturbed.  Do 
not  lean  far  back,  and  do  not  lean  forward  at  all.  Tf 
your  body  is  out  of  balance  it  will  be  under  strain  and 
you  will  tremble.  The  right  elbow  should  be  •  at  about 
the  height  of  the  shoulder.  The  le'ft  hand  should  grasp 
well  around  the  stock  and  handguard  in  front  of  the  rear 
sight,  and  the  left  elbow  should  be  almost  directly  under 
the  rifle.  The  right  hand  should  do  more  than  half  the 
work  of  holding  the  rifle  up  and  against  the  shoulder, 
the  left  hand  only  steadying  and  guiding  the  piece.  Do 
not  try  to  meet  the  recoil;  let  the  whole  body  move 
back  with  it.  Do  not  be  afraid  to  press  the  jaw  hard 
against  the  stock;  this  steadies  the  position,  and  the  head 
goes  back  with  the  recoil  and  insures  that  your  "face  is 
not  hurt. 

Kneeling  position:  Assume  the  position  very  much  as 
described  in  the  "Infantry  Drill  Regulations."  Sit  on  the 
right  heel.  The  right  keen  should  point  directly  to  the 
right,  that  is,  along  the  firing  line.  The  point  of  the  left 
elbow  should  rest  over  the  left  knee.  There  is  a  flat 
place  under  the  elbow  which  fits  a  flat  place  on  the  knee 


176        THE   CANTONxMENT   MANUAL 

and  makes  a  solid  rest.  Lean  the  body  well  forward. 
This  position  is  uncomfortable  until  practiced,  when  it 
quickly  ceases  to  be  uncomfortable. 

Sitting  position:  Sit  down  half  "faced  to  the  right,  feet 
from  6  to  8  inches  apart,  knees  bent,  right  knee  slightly 
higher  than  the  left,  left  leg  pointed  toward  the  target. 
Rest  both  elbows  on  the  knees,  hands  grasping  the  piece 
the  same  as  in  the  prone  position.  This  is  a  very  steady 
position,  particularly  if  holes  can  be  found  or  made  in-  the 
ground  for  the  heels. 

Prone  position  and  use  of  the  gun  sling:  To  adjust  the 
sling  'for  firing,  unhook  the  straight  strap  of  the  sHng  and 
let  it  out  as  far  as  it  will  go.  Adjust  the  loop  so  that 
when  stretched  along  the  bottom  of  the  stock  its  rear 
end  (bight)  comes  about  opposite  the  comb  of  the  stock. 
A  small  man  needs  a  longer  loop  than  a  ^  tall  man.  Lie 
down  facing  at  an  angle  of  about  6o°  to  the  right  of 
the  direction  of  the  target.  Spread  the  legs  as  wide 
apart  as  they  will  go  with  comfort.  Thrust  the  le'ft 
arm  through  between  the  rifle  and  the  sling,  and  then 
back  through  the  loop  of  the  sling,  securing  the  loop, 
by  means  of  the  keeper,  around  the  upper  left  arm  as 
high  up  as  it  will  go.  Pass  the  hand  under  and  then 
over  the  sling  from  the  left  side,  and  grasp  the  stock 
and  handguard  just  in  rear  of  the  lower  band.  Raise 
the  right  elbow  off  the  ground,  rolling  slightly  over  on 
the  left  side.  Place  the  butt  to  the  shoulder  and  roll 
back  into  position,  clamping  the  rifle  hard  and  steady  in 
the  firing  position.  The  rifle  should  rest  deep  down  in 
the  palm  cfi  the  left  hand  with  fingers  almost  around 
the  handguard.  Shift  the  left  palm  a  little  to  the  right 
or  left  until  the  rifle  stands  perfectly  upright  (no  cant) 
without  effort.  The  left  elbow  should  rest  on  the  ground 
directly  under  the  rifle,  and  right  elbow  on  the  ground 


TARGET   PRACTICE  177 

about  5  inches  to  the  right  of  a  point  directly  under  the 
stock.  In  this  position  the  loop  of  the  sHng,  starting  at 
the  lower  band,  passes  to  the  right  of  the  left  wrist, 
and  then  around  the  left  upper  arm.  The  loop  should 
be  so  tight  that  about  50  pounds  tension  is  placed  on  it 
when  the  position  is  assumed.  This  position  is  uncom- 
fortable until  practiced,  when  it  quickly  ceases  to  be  un- 
comfortable. It  will  be  steadier  if  small  holes  can  be 
found  or  dug  in  the  ground  for  the  elbows.  In  this  posi- 
tion the  sling  binds  the  left  'forearm  to  the  rifle  and  to 
the  ground  so  that  it  forms  a  dead  rest  for  the  rifle,  with 
a  universal  joint,  the  wrist,  at  its  upper  end.  Also  the 
rifle  is  so  bound  to  the  shoulder  that  the  recoil  is  not 
felt  at  all.     This  is  the  steadiest  of  all  firing  positions. 

The  gun  sling  can  also  be  used  in  this  manner  with 
advantage  in  the  other  positions. 

Section  8.  Calling  the  Shot 

It  is  evident  that  the  sights  should  be  so  adjusted  at 
each  range  that  the  rifle  will  hit  where  you  aim.  In 
order  to  determine  that  the  sights  are  so  adjusted  it  is 
necessary  that  you  shall  know  each  time  just  where  you 
were  aiming  on  the  target  at  the  instant  your  rifle  was 
discharged.  If  you  know  this  and  your  rifle  hits  this 
point  your  rifle  is  correctly  sighted.  If  your  shot  does 
not  hit  near  this  point,  you  should  change  your  sight 
adjustment  in  accordance  with  the  table  of  sight  correc- 
tions on  page  171. 

No  man  can  hold  absolutely  steady.  The  rifle  trem- 
bles slightly,  and  the  sights  seem  to  wobble  and  move 
over  the  target.  You  try  to  squeeze  off  the  last  ounce 
o'f  the  trigger  squeeze  just  as  the  sights  move  to  the 
desired  alignment  under  the  bull's-eye.  At  this  instant, 
13 


178         THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

just  before  the  recoil  blots  out  a  view  of  the  sights  and 
target,  you  should  catch  with  your  eye  a  picture,  as  it 
were,  of  just  where  on  the  target  your  sights  were 
aligned,  and  call  to  yourself  or  to  the  coach  this  point. 
This  point  is  where  your  shot  should  strike  if  your  sights 
are  correctly  adjusted,  and  if  you  have  squeezed  the  trig- 
ger without  disturbing  your  aim.  Until  a  man  can  call 
his  shots  he  is  not  a  good  shot,  for  he  can  never  tell  if 
his  rifle  is  sighted  right  or  not,  or  if  a  certain  shot  is  a 
good  one  or  only  the  result  of  luck. 

Section  9.     Coordination 

Good  marksmanship  consists  in  learning  thoroughly  the 
details  of — 

Holding  the  rifle  in  the  various  positions. 

Aiming. 

Squeezing  the  trigger. 

Calling  the  shot. 

Adjusting  the  sights. 
And,  when  these  have  been  mastered  in  detail,  then 
the  coordination  of  them  in  the  act  of  firing.  This  co- 
ordination consists  in  putting  absolutely  all  of  one's  will 
power  into  an  effort  to  hold  the  rifle  steadily,  especially 
in  getting  it  to  steady  down  when  the  aim  is  perfected; 
in  getting  the  trigger  squeezed  off  easily  at  the  instant 
the  rifle  is  steadiest  and  the  aim  perfected;  in  calling 
the  shot  at  this  instant;  and,  if  the  shot  does  not  hit 
near  the  point  called,  then  in  adjusting  the  sights  the  cor- 
rect amount  so  that  the  rifle  will  be  sighted  to  hit  where 
you  aim. 

Section  10.    Advice  to  Riflemen 

Before   going  to   the   range   clean   the   rifle   carefully, 
removing  every  trace  of  oil   from  the  bore.     This  can 


TARGET   PRACTICE  179 

best  be  done  with  a  rag  saturated  with  gasoline.  Put 
a  light  coat  of  oil  on  the  bolt  and  cams.  Blacken  the 
front  and  rear  sights  with  smoke  from  a  burning  candle 
or  camphor  or  with  liquid  sight  black. 

Look  through  the  bore  and  see  that  there  is  no  ob- 
struction in  it. 

Keep  the  rifle  ofi  the  ground;  the  stock  may  absorb 
dampness,  the  sights  may  be  injured,  or  the  muzzle  filled 
with  dirt. 

Watch  your  hold  carefully  and  be  sure  to  know  where 
the  line  of  sight  is  at  discharge.  It  is  only  in  this  way 
that  the  habit  of  calling  shots,  which  is  essential  to  good 
shooting,  can  be  acquired. 

Study  the  conditions,  adjust  the  sling,  and  set  the  sight 
before  going  to  the  firing  point. 

Look  at  the  sight  adjustment  before  each  shot  and  see 
that  it  has  not  changed. 

If  sure  of  your  hold  and  if  the  hit  is  not  as  called, 
determine  and  make  FULL  correction  in  elevation  and 
windage  to  put  the  next  shot  in  the  bull's-eye. 

Keep  a  written  record  of  the  weather  conditions  and 
the  corresponding  elevation  and  windage  for  each  day's 
firing. 

Less  elevation  will  generally  be  required  on  hot  days; 
on  wet  days;  in  a  bright  sunlight;  with  a  6  o'clock  wind; 
or  with  a  cold  barrel. 

More  elevation  will  generally  be  required  on  cold  days; 
on  very  dry  days;  with  a  12  o'clock  wind;  with  a  hot 
barrel ;  in  a  dull  or  cloudy  light. 

The  upper  band  should  not  be  tight  enough  to  bind  the 
barrel. 

Do  not  put  a  cartridge  into  the  chamber  until  ready 
to  fire.  Do  not  place  cartridges  in  the  sun.  They  will 
get  hot  and  shoot  high. 


i8o        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Do  not  rub  the  eyes — especially  the  sighting  eye. 

In  cold  weather  warm  the  trigger  hand  before  shoot- 
ing. 

After  shooting,  clean  the  rifle  carefully  and  then  oil 
it  to  prevent  rust. 

Have  a  strong,  clean  cloth  that  will  not  tear  and  jam, 
properly  cut  to  size,  for  use  in  cleaning. 

Always  clean  the  rifle  from  the  breech,  using  a  brass 
cleaning  rod  when  available.  An  injury  to  the  rifling  at 
the  muzzle  causes  the  piece  to  shoot  very  irregularly. 

Regular  physical  exercise,  taken  systematically,  will 
cause  a  marked  improvement  in  shooting. 

Frequent  practice  of  the  "Position  and  aiming  drills" 
is  of  the  greatest  help  in  preparing  for  shooting  on  the 
range. 

Rapid  firing:  Success  in  rapid  firing  depends  upon 
catching  a  quick  and  accurate  aim,  holding  the  piece 
firmly  and  evenly,  and  in  squeezing  the  trigger  without 
a  jerk. 

In  order  to  give  as  much  time  as  possible  for  aiming 
accurately,  the  soldier  must  practice  taking  position,  load- 
ing with  the  clip,  and  working  the  bolt,  so  that  no  time 
will  be  lost  in  these  operations.  With  constant  practice 
all  these  movements  may  be  made  quickly  and  without 
false  motions. 

When  the  bolt  handle  is  raised,  it  must  be  done  with 
enough  force  to  start  the  shell  from  the  chamber;  and 
when  the  bolt  is  pulled  back,  it  must  be  with  sufficient 
force  to  throw  the  empty  shell  well  away  from  the  cham- 
ber and  far  enough  to  engage  the  next  cartridge. 

In  loading,  use  force  enough  to  load  each  cartridge  with 
one  motion. 

The  aim  must  be  caught  quickly,  and,  once  caught, 
must  be  held  and  the  trigger  squeezed  steadily.     Rapid 


TARGET   PRACTICE  i8i 

firing,  as  far  as  holding,  aim,  and  squeezing  the  trigger 
are  concerned,  should  be  done  with  all  the  precision  of 
slow  fire.  The  gain  in  time  should  be  in  getting  ready  to 
fire,  loading,  and  working  the  bolt. 

Firing  with  rests:  In  order  that  the  shooting  may  be 
uniform  the  piece  should  always  be  rested  at  the  same 
point. 


Section  11.  The  Course  in  Small-Arms  Firing 

The  course  in  small-arms  firing  consists  of — * 

(o)  Nomenclature  and  care  of  rifle. 

(b)  Sighting  drills. 

(c)  Position  and  aiming  drills. 

{d)  Deflection  and  elevation  correction  drills. 
(e)  Gallery  practice. 
(/)  Estimating  distance  drill. 

(g)  Individual  known-distance  firing,  instruction  prac- 
tice. 

(h)  Individual  known-distance  firing,  record  practice. 

(«)  Long-distance  practice. 

(/)   Practice  with  telescopic  sights. 

{k)  Instruction  combat  practice. 

(/)   Combat  practice. 

(m)  Proficiency  test. 

The  regulations  governing  these  are  found  in  "Small- 
Arms  Firing  Manual,  19 13."  There  should  be  several 
copies  of  this  manual  in  every  company. 

Section  12.  Targets 

The  accompanying  plates  show  the  details  and  size  of 
the  targets. 


i82        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 


soo 


TARGET  PRACTICE. 


H 4'^ ^ 

1 

I 
t 
i 

.1 

1   . 

.C®) 

f 
1 

>*• 

1 
1 
1 

4. 

\js,.^  y 

1 

.1 

TAROtTA. 


TARCILT  B. 


TARGET  C  r-^- 

Fig.  42 


TARGET   PRACTICE 


183 


TAROETS. 


TARGET  D. 

Fig.  43 


CHAPTER   XIV 

CARE  OF  CLOTHING,  EQUIPMENT,  AND  RIFLE 

You  are  responsible  for  the  care  of  your  clothing, 
equipment,  and  rifle  according  to  the  84th  article  of  war, 
which  reads:  "Any  soldier  who  sells  or  wrongfully  dis- 
poses o'f  or  willfully  or  through  neglect  injures  any  horse, 
arms,  ammunition,  accouterments,  equipment,  clothing,  or 
other  property  issued  for  use  in  the  military  service  shall 
be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct." 

It  is  plain,  therefore,  that  it  is  the  soldier's  duty,  and 
should  be  his  pleasure,  to  keep  everything  issued  to  him 
clean  and  in  a  good  state  of  preservation. 

Clothing 

You  should  take  as  good  care  of  your  uniform  as  you 
would  of  your  best  suit  of  civilian  clothes.  The  better 
care  you  take  of  your  clothing  the  longer  it  will  last 
and  the  more  it  will  add  to  your  military  appearance. 

Each   soldier  is   given  his  uniform. 

Cleaning. — Grease  spots  and  stains  may  be  removed 
by  rubbing  with  a  woolen  cloth  saturated  with  benzine 
or  gasoline.     Carbona  is  also  a  good  stain  remover. 

Spots  can  often  be  removed  by  putting  a  piece  of  paper 
over  the  spot  and  pressing  with  a  hot  flat  iron. 

Paint  can  be  removed  with  turpentine.  Ink  may  be  re- 
moved with  a  solution  of  oxalic  acid,  rinsing  at  once  with 
water. 

184 


CLOTHING,    EQUIPMENT,    RIFLE      185 

Pressing  the  uniform  once  a  week  will  add  greatly  to 
its  appearance.  Always  place  a  moist  clean  cloth  over 
the  clothes  and  then  press  with  a  hot  iron  until  the  cloth 
is  dry. 

Canvas  leggings  should  be  washed  when  soiled.  Al- 
ways dry  in  the  shade  without  wringing  them  out. 

Service  hat  should  be  brushed  frequently. 

An  extra  uniform  should  be  kept  "for  inspection,  parade, 
and  when  off  duty.  Remember  a  soldier  is  often  judged 
by  his  appearance  when  on  leave. 

Buttons  should  always  be  securely  sewed  on.  It  Is  de- 
cidedly slovenly  to  see  a  soldier  with  buttons  off  his  shirt 
or  uniform. 

Always  keep  your  shirt  and  blouse  buttoned  up. 

Shoes 

Be  sure  that  your  shoes  fit  properly.  Shoes  should 
always  be  large  enough  to  provide  for  the  enlargement 
of  the  feet  when  carrying  a  pack  and  marching.  The 
toes  will  be  pushed  forward  almost  hal'f  a  size  when  the 
ordinary  pack  is  being  carried.  The  width  can  ordinarily 
be  provided  by  the  lacing. 

Cleaning. — Your  shoes  should  be  kept  polished  both 
for  looks  and  because  the  leather  will  be  more  pliable  and 
will  wear  longer.  A  good  quality  of  polish  should  be 
used.  It  is  well  to  wash  your  shoes  once  in  a  while  with 
soap  and  water  to  remove  the  accumulation  as  a  result 
of  polishing.  To  dry  wet  shoes  never  place  them  near 
a  fire.  They  should  be  allowed  to  dry  by  evaporation. 
When  you  have  two  or  more  pairs  of  shoes  it  is  a  good 
thing  to  saturate  one  pair  with  neat's  foot  oil.  The 
shoes  should  be  wet  and  thoroughly  dried  before  the  oil 
is  applied.     Shoes  so  treated  will  not  wet  through. 


i86        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Cloth  Equipment 

(Instructions   issued   by   the    Ordnance    Department, 
July  12,  1915.) 

"General. — All  cloth  equipment  should  be  brushed  fre- 
quently with  a  stiff  bristle  brush.  A  dry  scrub  brush  may 
be  used. 

"It  should  be  washed  only  under  the  direction  and 
supervision  of  an  officer. 

"During  ordinary  garrison  duty  it  should  rarely  be 
necessary  to  wash  the  equipment. 

"When  the  equipment  becomes  soiled  a  light  local  wash- 
ing will  frequently  be  sufficient,  but  when  dirty  it  should 
unhesitatingly  be  given  a  good  thorough  washing — other- 
wise it  may  be  expected  that  it  will  become  insanitary 
and  rot. 

"During  field  service  it  is  to  be  expected  that  the  equip- 
ment will  become  soiled  much  more  rapidly.  Always 
on  return  to  garrison  from  field  service  and  as  oppor- 
tunity offers  in  the  field,  equipment  should  be  thoroughly 
washed." 

How  to  Wash. — Soap  solution.  Dissolve  one  cake  of 
H.  &  H.  soap  in  4J  quarts  of  hot  water.  Brush  the  equip- 
ment thoroughly  to  remove  dust  and  mud.  Spread  the 
belt,  haversack,  etc.,  out  on  a  clean  board  and  apply  the 
solution  with  a  clean  scrub  brush.  After  lathering,  wash 
off  with  clean  water.  Always  dry  in  the  shade,  so  as  to 
prevent  bleaching. 

Mess  Kit 

After  every  meal  wash  your  mess  kit  in  soap  and  hot 
water  and  rinse  in  clean  hot  water.  I'f  you  do  not  have 
a  clean  towel  to  dry  your  mess  kit  put  it  in  the  sun  to 
dry.    As  the  sun  is  a  good  germ  killer  it  is  well  to  leave 


CLOTHING,    EQUIPMENT,     RIFLE      187 

your  mess  kit  in  the  sun  frequently.  Remember  a  dirty  or 
greasy  mess  kit  is  sure  to  attract  flies  and  germs.  Then, 
too,  you  will  enjoy  your  meals  much  better  if  your  mess 
kit  is  clean. 

With  a  nail  or  sharp  instrument  put  a  mark  on  each 
piece  of  your  mess  kit  so  that  you  will  recognize  it 
if  someone  takes  it. 

The  Rifle 

Your  rifle  is  your  best  friend;  therefore  be  sure  that 
it  is  properly  cared  for.  Your  rifle  may  save  your  li'fe; 
therefore  as  you  value,  your  life  so  treat  your  rifle.  Keep 
in  mind  that  more  pieces  are  spoiled  by  carelessness  than 
through  use. 

The  Parts  of  the  Rifle 

The  rifle  is  called  the  United  States  Magazine  Rifle, 
model  1903,  caliber  .30.  The  piece  without  the  bayonet 
weighs  8.69  pounds,  and  the  bayonet  and  scabbard  weigh 
I  pound.  The  length  of  the  rifle  is  43" ;  the  length  of  the 
bayonet  is  20";  the  length  of  the  blade  of  the  bayonet  is 
16". 

The  rifle  is  so  constructed  that  the  various  parts  can 
easily  be  taken  apart  and  put  together  again.  Never, 
however,  take  your  rifle  apart  except  with  the  express 
permission  of  a  commissioned  officer.  As  soon  as  you 
are  familiar  with  the  handling  of  your  piece  you  should 
ask  a  commissioned  officer  to  show  you  how  to  take  the 
butt  apart  and  how  to  take  out  the  breech  spring. 

The  bore  is  the  most  important  part  of  the  rifle.  The 
greatest  care  has  been  exercised  in  manufacturing  this 
so  as  to  obtain  the  highest  degree  of  accuracy. 

To  clean  the  bore  or  inside  of  the  barrel,  remove  the 
bolt;  place  the  muzzle  on  a  board  if  no  rack  is  provided. 
Always   insert   the   cleaning  rod   'from   the   breech   end. 


i88        THE 

Vie.  8i 


CANTONMENT   MANUAL 


rig.  64^ 


637  (contd.) 


CLOTHING,    EQUIPMENT,     RIFLE      189 

Use  patches  of  soft  rag  cut  into  squares  about  i-|''  square. 
By  running  the  cleaning  rod  with  a  rag  attached  through 
the  bore  the  dust  will  be  removed. 

If  the  piece  is  fouled  as  a  result  of  discharging,  the 
powder  fouling  can  be  removed  by  scrubbing  the  bore 
with  the  soda  solution  (hot)  furnished  by  the  Ordnance 
Department. 

To  remove  the  metal  fouling,  first  remove  the  powder 
fouling.  Then  plug  the  barrel  at  the  breech  with  a 
cork  or  cloth,  slip  a  2"  section  of  rubber  hose  over  the 
muzzle  and  fill  with  the  standard  Ordnance  Department 
solution.  Let  it  remain  for  half  an  hour,  then  remove 
the  solution  and  swab  out  with  the  soda  solution. 

After  the  piece  is  thoroughly  cleaned  take  a  clean 
patch  of  cloth  and  moisten  with  sperm  oil  and  scrub  the 
bore  thoroughly. 

All  metal  parts  of  the  rifle  should  be  kept  clean  at  all 
times.  Cams  and  bearings  should  be  'frequently  oiled, 
but  it  is  not  necessary  to  soak  with  oil. 

After  the  rifle  has  been  wet  by  rain  or  by  dew  it  should 
be  wiped  dry  at  once.  The  stock  should  be  rubbed  with 
linseed  oil  once  a  month. 

Pointers 

1.  Clean  your  rifle  at  least  once  each  day. 

2.  Never  point  a  rifle  at  anyone  unless  you  intend  to 
shoot  him. 

3.  Never  put  away  a  rifle  that  has  been  fired  or  that 
has  been  wet  without  first  thoroughly  cleaning  it. 

4.  Do  not  try  to  brighten  up  the  bluish  parts  of  the 
piece. 

5.  Never  let  your  rifle  bore  become  pitted. 

6.  A  good  soldier,  like  a  good  sportsman,  loves  his 
rifle. 


CHAPTER  XV 

THE  SOLDIER'S  HEALTH 

A  soldier's  health  is  a  soldier's  success.  Keep  in  mind 
that  a  sick  soldier  not  only  makes  one  less  to  shoot  and 
to  throw  grenades,  but  is  a  burden  because  he  must  be 
cared  for.  "A  dead  soldier  is  of  less  burden  than  a  sick 
soldier." 

What  is,  perhaps,  to  you  fully  as  important  and  inter- 
esting is  that  if  your  health  is  good  you  run  far  less 
chance  o*f  catching  a  disease  and  stand  a  hundred  per 
cent  better  chance  of  recovering  from  a  wound.  In  the 
Spanish-American  War  for  every  man  who  was  killed 
more  than  five  died  from  disease. 

A  Few  Health  Hints 

Keep  the  bowels  open. — Make  it  a  practice  to  go  to  the 
latrine  or  toilet  at  least  once  each  day.  If  you  go  to  the 
toilet  at  about  the  same  time  each  day  you  will  be  sur- 
prised to  find  that  you  feel  a  hundred  per  cent  better. 
Never  let  a  day  go  by  without  a  passage.  If  you  do  not 
have  one  see  one  of  the  medical  corps  and  ask  him  for 
a  laxative. 

Remember  that  there  is  nothing  that  so  pleases  the 
germs  of  various  diseases  as  the  constipated  person.  In 
this  condition  you  are  far  more  apt  to  catch  diseases. 

Cleanliness  is  the  worst  enemy  of  disease.  Flies  carry 
germs.  Flies  flourish  in  dirt.  Therefore,  keep  everything 
clean  and  leave  no  food  particles  about,  and  you  will  not 
be  bothered  with  flies. 

190 


THE    SOLDIER'S    HEALTH  191 

Brush  your  teeth  after  each  meal  if  possible  and  always 
"before  going  to  bed. 

Do  not  pick  your  nose  with  your  fingers.  It  makes 
your  nose  a  good  place  for  germs. 

Do  not  sweep  dry  dust. — Always  sprinkle  the  floor  or 
company  street. 

Don't  let  anyone  use  your  mess  kit.  Always  keep  your 
mess  kit  clean.  Put  the  mess  kit  in  the  sun  when  possible. 
The  sun  is  a  good  germ  killer. 

Don't  drink  water  from  unknown  streams  or  wells.  If 
necessity  requires  you  to  drink  such  water  always  boil  it. 
.  Don't  let  dogs  or  other  animals  lick  your  hands. 

Don't  drink  stuff  bought  from  a  peddler. 

Always  wash  your  hands  before  eating  and  after  com- 
ing from  the  latrine. 

Keep  your  teeth  in  good  condition  by  seeing  a  good 
dentist  every  few  months. 

Don't  rub  your  eyes  with  your  fingers. 

Boil  your  clothes  before  washing  them. 

Use  your  own  towel. 

Use  your  own  blanket. 

Don't  smoke  another  man's  pipe. 

Don't  touch  wounds  except  with  the  first-aid  packet. 

Be  sure  the  company  barber  scalds  his  razors  and  soap. 
Don't  let  him  use  a  caustic  stick  on  you. 

//  you  feel  sick  ask  the  first  sergeant  to  put  your  name 
on  the  sick  report.  Serious  diseases  often  start  with 
slight  illness. 

Keep  on  the  watch  and  see  that  your  comrades  report 
their  sickness. 

Don't  spit  in  your  tent  and  don't  let  others  do  so. 

After  a  hike  rinse  your  mouth  and  throat  with  salt  and 
water.     Breathe  a  little  of  the  solution  into  your  nose. 


192        THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

Never  go  barefooted.  This  is  the  way  many  germs  are 
gathered. 

If  you  discover  that  you  have  a  venereal  disease  report 
to  your  captain  or  lieutenant  at  once. 

Keep  away  from  prostitutes.  They  are  all  diseased  and 
will  give  you  germs  that  you  will  pass  on  to  your  wife  and 
children  years  from  now. 

Let  liquor  alone.  Drink  nine  times  out  of  ten  leads 
to  houses  of  prostitution  and  damnation  to  any  man  who 
becomes  its  victim. 

Venereal  Diseases 

War  Department  orders  regarding  venereal  diseases. 
General  Orders  No.  31,  War  Department,  1912,  direct 
that  no  enlisted  man  "absent  from  duty  on  account  of 
disease  resulting  from  his  own  intemperate  use  of  drugs 
or  alcoholic  liquors  or  other  misconduct  shall  receive  pay 
for  the  period  o"f  such  absence." 

General  Orders,  No.  71,  War  Department,  1913,  amend- 
ing G.  O.,  17,  W.  D.,  1912,  direct  that, 

"Commanding  officers  will  require  that  men  who  ex- 
pose themselves  to  the  danger  of  contracting  vene- 
real disease  shall  at  once  upon  their  return  to  camp 
or  garrison  report  to  the  hospital  or  dispensary  for 
the  application  of  such  cleansing  and  prophylaxis  as 
may  be  prescribed  by  the  Surgeon  General.  Any 
soldier  who  fails  to  comply  with  these  instructions 
shall  be  brought  to  trial  by  court-martial  for  neglect 
*    of  duty." 

A  medical  officer  and  each  organization  commander 
are  required  to  make  two  physical  inspections  of  all  the 
enlisted  men  ai  the  command  (except  married  men  of 
good  character)  each  month  to  observe  the  state  of  per- 
sonal cleanliness  and  detect  venereal  diseases. 


CHAPTER   XVI 

SANITATION    AND    CLEANLINESS    IN    CAMP 

The  soldier's  part  in  making  the  camp  a  decent  place 
in  which  to  live  is  most  important.  It's  the  dirty,  untidy, 
don't-care  soldiers  who  cause  most  of  the  sickness  in  a 
camp. 

It's  hard  to  believe  that  any  real  self-respecting  man 
can  stoop  so  low  as  to  be  willing  to  put  up  with  filth. 
That's  just  exactly  what  you  do  if  you  tolerate  unclean- 
liness  on  the  part  of  your  fellow  soldiers.  A  man  who 
doesn't  willingly  take  a  bath  should  be  made  to  do  so  by 
his  comrades. 

Your  tent  is  your  home  while  in  the  field  as  a  soldier. 
Therefore  see  to  it  that  it  is  always  clean  and  in  order. 
The  tent  walls  should  be  rolled  up  every  morning.  In 
good  weather  your  bedding  and  clothes  should  get  a  good 
sun  bath. 

The  kitchen  is  a  most  important  place  to  keep  clean. 
It  is  the  opinion  of  the  authors  that  to  he  detailed  as 
kitchen  police  should  he  an  honor  and  not  a  punishment. 
Only  the  cleanest  and  neatest  men  in  a  company  should 
be  detailed  to  the  kitchen.  Everyone  working  in  the 
kitchen  should  have  scrupulously  clean  hands  and  finger 
nails.  When  eating  be  care'ful  not  to  spill  any  of  the  food. 
Particles  of  food  hring  flies,  and  flies  hring  disease. 
After  eating  always  empty  any  food  that  you  have  left 
into  the  proper  receptacle.  Then  wash  your  mess  kit 
in  hot  water.  If  possible  dry  it  in  the  sun — Nature's  dry- 
ing cloth. 

14  193 


CHAPTER  XVII 

ARTICLES   OF  WAR 

When  you  enter  the  military  service  you  become  sub- 
ject to  military  law.  The  Articles  of  War  is  the  law  gov- 
erning the  U.  S.  Army. 

The  'following  from  the  Articles  of  War  should  be 
read  over  carefully,  as  it  will  give  you  an  idea  of  your 
rights  as  well  as  the  things  you  must  or  must  not  do 
so  long  as  you  remain  in  the  military  service  of  the 
United  States. 

Don't  violate  any  of  these  articles  and  you  will  be  a 
better  soldier  and  avoid  trouble  for  yourself. 

Certain  Articles  of  War  to  he  read  and  explained  to 
enlisted  men.  Articles  i,  2,  and  29,  54  to  96  inclusive, 
and  104  to  109  inclusive,  shall  be  read  and  explained  to 
every  soldier  at  the  time  o*f  his  enlistment  or  muster  in, 
or  within  six  days  thereafter,  and  shall  be  read  and  ex- 
plained once  every  six  months  to  the  soldiers  of  every 
garrison,  regiment,  or  company  in  the  service  of  the 
United  States.     (Art.  no.) 

*' Article  i.  Definitions:  The  following  words  when 
used  in  these  articles  shall  be  construed  in  the  sense  in- 
dicated in  this  article,  unles  the  context  shows  that  a 
different  sense  is  intended,  namely: 

"(a)  The  word  'officer'  shall  be  construed  to  refer  to 
a  commissioned  officer; 

"(b)  The  word  'soldier'  shall  be  construed  as  includ- 
ing a  noncommissioned  officer,  a  private,  or  any  other 
enlisted  man; 

194 


ARTICLES    OF   WAR  195 

"(c)  The  word  'company*  shall  be  understood  as  in- 
cluding a  troop  or  battery;  and 

"(d)  The  word  'battalion'  shall  be  understood  as  in- 
cluding a  squadron. 

"Art.  2.  Persons  subject  to  military  law.  The  follow- 
ing persons  are  subject  to  these  articles  and  shall  be  un- 
derstood as  included  in  the  term  'any  person  subject  to 
military  law/  or  'persons  subject  to  military  law/  when- 
ever used  in  these  articles:  Provided,  That  nothing  con- 
tained in  this  act,  except  as  specifically  provided  in  arti- 
cle 2,  subparagraph  (c),  shall  be  construed  to  apply  to  any 
person  under  the  United  States  naval  jurisdiction,  unless 
otherwise  specifically  provided  by  law. 

"(a)  All  officers  and  soldiers  belonging  to  the  Regular 
Army  of  the  United  States ;  all  volunteers,  from  the  dates 
of  their  muster  or  acceptance  into  the  military  service 
of  the  United  States;  and  all  other  persons  lawfully 
called,  drafted,  or  ordered  into,  or  to  duty  or  for  training 
in,  the  said  service,  from  the  dates  they  are  required  by 
the  terms  o'f  the  call,  draft,  or  order  to  obey  the  same ; 

"(b)  Cadets; 

"(c)  Officers  and  soldiers  of  the  Marine  Corps  when 
detached  for  service  with  the  armies  of  the  United  States 
by  order  of  the  President:  Provided,  That  an  officer  or 
soldier  of  the  Marine  Corps  when  so  detached  may  be 
tried  by  military  court-martial  for  an  offense  committed 
against  the  laws  for  the  government  o'f  the  naval  service 
prior  to  his  detachment  and  for  an  offense  committed 
against  these  articles  he  may  be  tried  by  a  naval  court- 
martial  after  such  detachment  ceases; 

"(d)  All  retainers  to  the  camp  and  all  persons  accom- 
panying or  serving  with  the  armies  of  the  United  States 
without  the  territorial  jurisdiction  of  the  United  States, 
and  in  time  of  war  all  such  retainers  and  persons  accom- 


196        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

panying  or  serving  with  the  armies  of  the  United  States 
in  the  field,  both  within  and  without  the  territorial  juris- 
diction of  the  United  States,  though  not  otherwise  subject 
to  these  articles; 

"(e)  All  persons  under  sentence  adjudged  by  court- 
martial; 

"(f)  All  persons  admitted  into  the  Regular  Army  Sol- 
diers' Home  at  Washington,  D.  C. 

"Art.  29.  ENLISTMENT  WITHOUT  DISCHARGE, 
Any  soldier  who,  iinthout  having  first  received  a  regular 
discharge,  again  enlists  in  the  Army,  or  in  the  militia 
when  in  the  service  of  the  United  States,  or  in  the  Navy 
or  Marine  Corps  of  the  United  States,  or  in  any  foreign 
army,  shall  be  deemed  to  have  deserted  the  service  of 
the  United  States;  and,  where  the  enlistment  is  in  one' 
of  the  forces  of  the  United  States  mentioned  above,  to 
have  fraudulently  enlisted  therein. 

''Art.  54.  Fraudulent  enlistment.  Any  person  who  shall 
procure  himself  to  be  enlisted  in  the  military  service  of 
the  United  States  by  means  of  willful  misrepresentation 
or  concealment  as  to  his  qualifications  for  enlistment, 
and  shall  receive  pay  or  allowances  under  such  enlist- 
ment, shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

*'Art.  55.  Officer  making  unlazvful  enlistment.  Any 
officer  who  knowingly  enlists  or  musters  into  the  military 
service  any  person  whose  enlistment  or  muster  in  is  pro- 
hibited by  law,  regulations,  br  orders,  shall  be  dismissed 
from  the  service  or  suffer  such  other  punishment  as  a 
court-martial  may  direct. 

"Art.  56.  Muster  rolls— False  muster.  At  every  muster 
Off  a  regiment,  troop,  battery,  or  company  the  commanding 
officer  thereof  shall  give  to  the  mustering  officer  certifi- 
cates, signed  by  himself,  stating  how  long  absent  officers 
have  been  absent  and  the  reasons  of  their  absence.    And 


ARTICLES    OF   WAR  197 

the  commanding  officer  of  every  troop,  battery,  or  com- 
pany shall  give  like  certificates,  stating  how  long  absent 
noncommissioned  officers  and  private  soldiers  have  been 
absent  and  the  reasons  of  their  absence.  Such  reasons 
and  time  of  absence  shall  be  inserted  in  the  muster  rolls 
opposite  the  names  of  the  respective  absent  officers  and 
soldiers,  and  the  certificates,  together  with  the  muster 
rolls,  shall  be  transmitted  by  the  mustering  officer  to 
the  Department  of  War  as  speedily  as  the  distance  of 
the  place  and  muster  will  admit.  Any  officer  who  know- 
ingly makes  a  'false  muster  of  man  or  animal,  or  who 
signs  or  directs  or  allows  the  signing  of  any  muster  roll 
knowing  the  same  to  contain  a  false  muster  or  false  state- 
ment as  to  the  absence  or  pay  of  an  officer  or  soldier,  or 
who  wrongfully  takes  money  or  other  consideration  on 
mustering  in  a  regiment,  company,  or  other  organization, 
or  on  signing  muster  rolls,  or  who  knowingly  musters 
as  an  officer  or  soldier  a  person  who  is  not  such  officer 
or  soldier,  shall  be  dismissed  from  the  service  and  suffer 
such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

*'Art.  57.  False  returns — Omission  to  render  returns. 
Every  officer  commanding  a  regiment,  an  independent 
troop,  battery,  or  company,  or  a  garrison,  shall,  in  the 
beginning  of  every  month,  transmit  through  the  proper 
channels,  to  the  Department  of  War,  an  exact  return  o'f 
the  same,  specifying  the  names  of  the  officers  then  ab- 
sent from  their  posts,  with  the  reasons  for  and  the  time 
of  their  absence.  Every  officer  whose  duty  it  is  to  ren- 
der to  the  War  Department  or  other  superior  authority 
a  return  of  the  state  of  the  troops  under  his  command, 
or  O'f  the  arms,  ammunition,  clothing,  funds,  or  other 
property  thereunto  belonging,  who  knowingly  makes  a 
false  return  thereof  shall  be  dismissed  from  the  service 
and  suffer  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may 


198        THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

direct.  And  any  officer  who,  through  neglect  or  design, 
omits  to  render  such  return  shall  be  punished  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct. 


"B.    Desertion;    Absence  Without  Leave 

"Art.  58.  Desertion.  Any  person  subject  to  military 
law  who  deserts  or  attempts  to  desert  the  service  of  the 
United  States  shall,  if  the  offense  be  committed  in  time 
of  war,  suffer  death  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct,  and,  if  the  offense  be  committed  at  any 
other  time,  any  punishment,  excepting  death,  that  a  court- 
martial  may  direct. 

"Art.  59.  Advising  or  aiding  another  to  desert.  Any 
person  subject  to  military  law  who  advises  or  persuades 
or  knowingly  assists  another  to  desert  the  service  of  the 
United  States  shall,  i'f  the  offense  be  committed  in  time 
of  war,  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct,  and,  if  the  offense  be  committed  at 
any  other  time,  any  punishment,  excepting  death,  that  a 
court-martial  may  direct. 

"Art.  60.  Entertaining  a  deserter.  Any  officer  who, 
after  having  discovered  that  a  soldier  in  his  command  is 
a  deserter  from  the  military  or  naval  service  or  from  the 
Marine  Corps,  retains  such  deserter  in  his  command  with- 
out informing  superior  authority  or  the  commander  of 
the  organization  to  which  the  deserter  belongs,  shall  be 
punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

"Art  61.  Absence  without  leave.  Any  person  subject 
to  military  law  who  fails  to  repair  at  the  fixed  time  to  the 
properly  appointed  place  o'f  duty,  or  goes  from  the  same 
without  proper  leave,  or  absents  himself  from  his  com- 
mand, guard,  quarters,  station,  or  camp  without  proper 
leave,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 


ARTICLES   OF  WAR  199 

"C.    Disrespect;    Insubordination;    Mutiny 

"Art.  62.  Disrespect  toward  the  President,  Vice-presi- 
dent, Congress,  Secretary  of  War,  governors,  legisla- 
tures. Any  officer  who  uses  contemptuous  or  disrespect- 
ful words  against  the  President,  Vice-president,  the  Con- 
gress of  the  United  States,  the  Secretary  of  War,  or  the 
governor  or  legislature  of  any  State,  Territory,  or  other 
possession  of  the  United  States  in  which  he  is  quartered 
shall  be  dismissed  'from  the  service  or  suffer  such  other 
punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct.  Any  other  per- 
son subject  to  military  law  who  so  offends  shall  be  pun- 
ished as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

"Art.  63.  Disrespect  toward  superior  officers.  Any  per- 
son subject  to  military  law  who  behaves  himself  with  dis- 
respect toward  his  superior  officer  shall  be  punished  as  a 
court-martial  may  direct. 

"Art.  64.  Assaulting  or  willfully  disobeying  superior 
officer.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who,  on  any 
pretense  whatsoever,  strikes  his  superior  officer  or  draws 
or  lifts  up  any  weapon  or  offers  any  violence  against  him, 
being  in  the  execution  of  his  office,  or  willfully  disobeys 
any  lawful  command  of  his  superior  officer,  shall  suffer 
death  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may 
direct. 

"Art.  65.  Insubordinate  conduct  toward  noncommis- 
stoned  officer.  Any  soldier  who  strikes  or  assaults,  or 
who  attempts  or  threatens  to  strike  or  assault,  or  willfully 
disobeys  the  lawful  order  of  a  noncommissioned  officer 
while  in  the  execution  of  his  office,  or  uses  threatening  or 
insulting  language,  or  behaves  in  an  insubordinate  or  dis- 
respectful manner  toward  a  noncommissioned  officer  while 
in  the  execution  of  his  office,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct. 


200        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

"Art.  66.  Mutiny  or  sedition.  Any  person  subject  to 
military  law  who  attempts  to  create  or  who  begins,  excites, 
causes,  or  joins  in  any  mutiny  or  sedition  in  any  com- 
pany, party,  post,  camp,  detachment,  guard,  or  other  com- 
mand shall  suffer  death  or  such  other  punishment  as  a 
court-martial  may  direct. 

"Art.  6^.  Failure  to  suppress  mutiny  or  sedition.  Any 
officer  or  soldier  who,  being  present  at  any  mutiny  or  sedi- 
tion, does  not  use  his  utmost  endeavor  to  suppress  the 
same,  or  knowing  or  having  reason  to  believe  that  a 
mutiny  or  sedition  is  to  take  place,  does  not  without  delay 
give  information  thereof  to  his  commanding  officer  shall 
suffer  death  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial 
may  direct. 

"Art.  68.  Quarrels;  frays;  disorders.  All  officers  and 
noncommissioned  officers  have  power  to  part  and  quell 
all  quarrels,  frays,  and  disorders  among  persons  subject  to 
military  law  and  to  order  officers  who  take  part  in  the 
same  into  arrest,  and  other  persons  subject  to  military 
law  who  take  part  in  the  same  into  arrest  or  confinement 
as  circumstances  may  require,  until  their  proper  superior 
officer  is  acquainted  therqwith.  And  whosoever,  being  so 
ordered,  refuses  to  obey  such  officer  or  noncommissioned 
officer  or  draws  a  weapon  upon  or  otherwise  threatens  or 
does  violence  to  him  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial 
may  direct 

**D.    Arrest;    Confinement 

*'Art.  69.  Arrest  or  confinement  of  accused  persons. 
An  officer  charged  with  crime  or  with  a  serious  offense 
under  these  articles  shall  be  placed  in  arrest  by  the  com- 
manding officer,  and  in  exceptional  cases  an  officer  so 
charged  may  be  placed  in  confinement  by  the  same  author- 
ity.    A  soldier  charged  with   crime  or  with  a  serious 


ARTICLES    OF   WAR  201 

offense  under  these  articles  shall  be  placed  in  confinement, 
and  when  charged  with  a  minor  offense  he  may  be, placed 
in  arrest.  Any  other  person  subject  to  military  law 
charged  with  crime  or  with  a  serious  offense  under  these 
articles  shall  be  placed  in  confinement  or  in  arrest,  as 
circumstances  may  require;  and  when  charged  with  a 
minor  offense  such  person  may  be  placed  in  arrest.  Any 
person  placed  in  arrest  under  the  provisions  of  this  arti- 
cle shall  thereby  be  restricted  to  his  barracks,  quarters,  or 
tent,  unless  such  limits  shall  be  enlarged  by  proper  author- 
ity. Any  officer  who  breaks  his  arrest  or  who  escapes 
from  confinement  before  he  is  set  at  liberty  by  proper 
authority  shall  be  dismissed  from  the  service  or  suffer 
such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct ;  and 
any  other  person  subject  to  military  law  who  escapes  from 
confinement  or  who  breaks  his  arrest  before  he  is  set  at 
liberty  by  proper  authority  shall  be  punished  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct. 

"Art.  70.  Investigation  of  and  action  upon  charges.  No 
person  put  in  arrest  shall  be  continued  in  confinement 
more  than  eight  days,  or  until  such  time  as  a  court-martial 
can  be  assembled.  When  any  person  is  put  in  arrest  for 
the  purpose  of  trial,  except  at  remote  military  posts  or 
stations,  the  officer  by  whose  order  he  is  arrested  shall  see 
that  a  copy  of  the  charges  on  which  he  is  to  be  tried  is 
served  upon  him  within  eight  days  after  his  arrest,  and 
that  he  is  brought  to  trial  within  ten  days  thereafter, 
unless  the  necessities  of  the  service  prevent  such  trial; 
and  then  he  shall  be  brought  to  trial  within  thirty  days 
after  the  expiration  of  said  ten  days.  If  a  copy  o'f  the 
charges  be  not  served,  or  the  arrested  person  be  not 
brought  to  trial,  as  herein  required,  the  arrest  shall  cease. 
But  persons  released  from  arrest,  under  the  provisions  of 
this  article,  may  be  tried,  whenever  the  exigencies  of  the 


202        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

service  shall  permit,  within  twelve  months  after  such  re- 
lease from  arrest:  Provided,  That  in  time  of  peace  no 
person  shall,  against  his  objection,  be  brought  to  trial  be- 
tfore  a  general  court-martial  within  a  period  of  five  days 
subsequent  to  the  service  of  charges  upon  him. 

**Art.  71.  Refusal  to  receive  and  keep  prisoners.  No 
provost  marshal  or  commander  of  a  guard  shall  refuse  to 
receive  or  keep  any  prisoner  committed  to  his  charge  by 
an  officer  belonging  to  the  forces  of  the  United  States, 
provided  the  officer  committing  shall,  at  the  time,  deliver 
an  account  in  writing  signed  by  himself,  of  the  crime  or 
offense  charged  against  the  prisoner.  Any  officer  or  sol- 
dier so  refusing  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may 
direct. 

"Art.  72.  Report  of  prisoners  received.  Every  com- 
mander of  a  guard  to  whose  charge  a  prisoner  is  com- 
mitted shall,  within  twenty-four  hours  after  such  con- 
finement, or  as  soon  as  he  is  relieved  from  his  guard,  re- 
port in  writing  to  the  commanding  officer  the  name  of 
such  prisoner,  the  offense  charged  against  him,  and  the 
name  of  the  officer  committing  him;  and  if  he  fails  to 
make  such  report  he  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial 
may  direct. 

"Art.  73.  Releasing  prisoner  without  proper  authority. 
Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who,  without  proper 
authority,  releases  any  prisoner  duly  committed  to  his 
charge,  or  who,  through  neglect  or  design,  suffers  any 
prisoner  so  committed  to  escape,  shall  be  punished  as  a 
court-martial  may  direct. 

"Art.  74.  Delivery  of  offender  to  civil  authorities. 
When  any  person  subject  to  military  law,  except  one  who 
is  held  by  the  military  authorities  to  answer,  or  who  is 
awaiting  trial  or  result  of  trial,  or  who  is  undergoing 
sentence  for  a  crime  or  offense  punishable  under  these 


ARTICLES    OF   WAR  203 

articles,  is  accused  of  a  crime  or  offense  committed  within 
the  geographical  limits  of  the  States  of  the  Union  and  the 
District  of  Columbia,  and  punishable  by  the  laws  of  the 
land,  the  commanding  officer  is  required,  except  in  time 
of  war,  upon  application  duly  made,  to  use  his  utmost 
endeavor  to  deliver  over  such  accused  person  to  the  civil 
authorities",  or  to  aid  the  officers  of  justice  in  apprehend- 
ing and  securing  him,  in  order  that  he  may  be  brought 
to  trial.  Any  commanding  officer  who  upon  such  appli- 
cation refuses  or  willfully  neglects,  except  in  time  of  war, 
to  deliver  over  such  accused  person  to  the  civil  authorities 
or  to  aid  the  officers  of  justice  in  apprehending  and  secur- 
ing him,  shall  be  dismissed  from  the  service  or  suffer  such 
other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

"When  under  the  provisions  of  this  article  delivery  is 
made  to  the  civil  authorities  of  an  offender  undergoing 
sentence  of  a  court-martial,  such  delivery,  if  followed  by 
conviction,  shall  be  held  to  interrupt  the  execution  of  the 
sentence  of  the  court-martial,  and  the  offender  shall  be 
returned  to  military  custody,  after  having  answered  to 
the  civil  authorities  for  his  offense,  for  the  completion 
of  the  said  court-martial  sentence. 

"E.    War  Offenses 

"Art.  75.  Misbehavior  before  the  enemy.  Any  officer  or 
soldier  who  misbehaves  himself  before  the  enemy,  runs 
away,  or  shamefully  abandons  or  delivers  up  any  fort, 
post,  camp,  guard,  or  other  command  which  it  is  his  duty  " 
to  defend,  or  speaks  words  inducing  others  to  do  the  like, 
or  casts  away  his  arms  or  ammunition,  or  quits  his  post 
or  colors  to  plunder  or  pillage,  or  by  any  means  whatso- 
ever occasions  false  alarms  in  camp,  garrison,  or  quarters, 
shall  suffer  death  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct. 


204        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

"Art.  76.  Subordinates  compelling  commander  to  stir- 
render.  If  any  commander  of  any  garrison,  fort,  post, 
camp,  guard,  or  other  command  is  compelled  by  the  offi- 
cers or  soldiers  under  his  command  to  give  it  up  to  the 
enemy  or  to  abandon  it,  the  officers  or  soldiers  so  offending 
shall  suffer  death  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct. 

"Art.  yy.  Improper  use  of  countersign.  Any  person 
subject  to  military  law  who  makes  known  the  parole  or 
countersign  to  any  person  not  entitled  to  receive  it  ac- 
cording to  the  rules  and  discipline  of  war,  or  gives  a 
parole  or  countersign  different  from  that  which  he  re- 
ceived, shall,  if  the  offense  be  committed  in  time  of  war, 
suffer  death  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial 
may  direct. 

"Art.  78.  Forcing  a  safeguard.  Any  person  subject  to 
military  law  who,  in  time  of  war,  forces  a  safeguard  shall 
suffer  death  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial 
may  direct. 

"Art.  79.  Captured  property  to  be  secured  for  public 
service.  All  public  property  taken  from  the  enemy  is  the 
property  of  the  United  States  and  shall  be  secured  for 
the  service  of  the  United  States,  and  any  person  subject 
to  military  law  who  neglects  to  secure  such  property  or 
is  guilty  of  wrongful  appropriation  thereof  shall  be  pun- 
ished as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

"Art.  80.  Dealing  in  captured  or  abandoned  property. 
Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  buys,  sells,  trades, 
or  in  any  way  deals  in  or  disposes  of  captured  or  aban- 
doned property,  whereby  he  shall  receive  or  expect  any 
profit,  benefit,  or  advantage  to  himself  or  to  any  other 
person  directly  or  indirectly  connected  with  himself,  or 
who  fails  whenever  such  property  comes  into  his  posses- 
sion or  custody  or  within  his  control  to  give  notice  thereof 


ARTICLES    OF   WAR  205 

to  the  proper  authority  and  to  turn  over  such  property 
to  the  proper  authority  without  delay,  shall,  on  conviction 
thereof,  be  punished  by  fine  or  imprisonment,  or  by  such 
other  punishment  as  a  court-martial,  military  commis- 
sion, or  other  military  tribunal  may  adjudge,  or  by  any 
or  all  of  said  penalties. 

"Art.  81.  Relieving,  corresponding  with,  or  aiding  the 
enemy.  Whosoever  relieves  the  enemy  with  arms,  ammu- 
nition, supplies,  money,  or  other  thing,  or  knowingly  har- 
bors or  protects  or  holds  correspondence  with  or  gives 
intelligence  to  the  enemy,  either  directly  or  indirectly, 
shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court- 
martial  or  military  commission  may  direct. 

"Art.  82.  Spies.  Any  person  who  in  time  of  war  shall 
be  "found  lurking  or  acting  as  a  spy  in  or  about  any  of 
the  fortifications,  posts,  quarters,  or  encampments  of  any 
of  the  armies  of  the  United  States,  or  elsewhere,  shall  be 
tried  by  a  general  court-martial  or  by  a  military  commis- 
sion, and  shall,  on  conviction  thereof,  suffer  death. 

"F.    Miscellaneous  Crimes  and  Offenses 

"Art.  83.  Military  property — Willful  or  negligent  loss, 
damage,  or  wrongful  disposition  of.  Any  person  subject 
to  military  law  who  willfully  or  through  neglect  suffers 
to  be  lost,  spoiled,  damaged,  or  wrong'fully  disposed  of, 
any  military  property  belonging  to  the  United  States  shall 
make  good  the  loss  or  damage  and  suffer  such  punishment 
as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

"Art.  84.  Waste  or  unlawful  disposition  of  military 
property  issued  to  soldiers.  Any  soldier  who  sells  or 
wrongfully  disposes  of  or  willfully  or  through  neglect  in- 
jures or  loses  any  horse,  arms,  ammunition,  accouter- 
ments,  equipment,  clothing,  or  other  property  issued  for 


2o6  THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

use  in  the  military  service,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct. 

'*Art.  85.  Drunk  on  duty.  Any  officer  who  is  found 
drunk  on  duty  shall,  if  the  offense  be  committed  in  time 
of  war,  be  dismissed  'from  the  service  and  suffer  such 
other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct;  and  if 
the  offense  be  committed  in  time  of  peace,  he  shall  be 
punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct.  Any  person  sub- 
ject to  military  law,  except  an  officer,  who  is  found  drunk 
on  duty  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

''Art.  86.  Misbehavior  of  sentinel.  Any  sentinel  who 
is  found  drunk  or  sleeping  upon  his  post,  or  who  leaves  it 
before  he  is  regularly  relieved,  shali,  if  the  offense  be 
committed  in  time  of  war,  suffer  death  or  such  other  pun- 
ishment as  a  court-martial  may  direct;  and  if  the  offense 
be  committed  in  time  of  peace,  he  shall  suffer  any  pun- 
ishment, except  death,  that  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

"Art.  87.  Personal  interest  in  sale  of  provisions.  Any 
officer  commanding  in  any  garrison,  fort,  barracks,  camp, 
or  other  place  where  troops  of  the  United  States  may  be 
serving  who,  for  his  private  advantage,  lays  any  duty 
or  imposition  upon  or  is  interested  in  the  sale  of  any  vic- 
tuals or  other  necessaries  of  life  brought  into  such  gar- 
rison, fort,  barracks,  camp,  or  other  place  'for  the  use  of 
the  troops,  shall  be  dismissed  from  the  service  and  suffer 
such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

"Art.  88.  Intimidation  of  persons  bringing  provisions. 
Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  abuses,  intimi- 
dates, does  violence  to,  or  wrongfully  interferes  with  any 
person  bringing  provisions,  supplies,  or  other  necessaries 
to  the  camp,  garrison,  or  quarters  of  the  forces  of  the 
United  States  shall  suffer  such  punishment  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct. 

"Art.  89.  Good  order  to  be  maintained  and  wrongs  re- 


ARTICLES    OF   WAR  207 

dressed.  All  persons  subject  to  military  law  are  to  behave 
themselves  orderly  in  quarters,  garrison,  camp,  and  on  the 
march;  and  any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  com- 
mits any  waste  or  spoil,  or  willfully  destroys  any  prop- 
erty whatsoever  (unless  by  order  o'f  his  commanding 
officer),  or  commits  any  kind  of  depredation  or  riot,  shall 
be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct.  Any  com- 
manding officer  who,  upon  complaint  made  to  him,  re- 
fuses or  omits  to  see  reparation  made  to  the  party  in- 
jured, insofar  as  the  offender's  pay  shall  go  toward  such 
reparation,  as  provided  for  in  article  105,  shall  be  dis- 
missed from  the  service  or  otherwise  punished  as  a 
court-martial  may  direct. 

*'Art.  90.  Provoking  speeches  or  gestures.  No  person 
subject  to  miHtary  law  shall  use  any  reproachful  or  pro- 
voking speeches  or  gestures  to  another;  and  any  person 
subject  to  military  law  who  offends  against  the  provisions 
of  this  article  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may 
direct. 

"Art.  91.  Dueling.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law 
who  fights  or  promotes  or  is  concerned  in  or  connives  at 
fighting  a  duel,  or  who,  having  knowledge  of  a  challenge 
sent  or  about  to  be  sent,  fails  to  report  the  fact  promptly 
to  the  proper  authority,  shall,  if  an  officer,  be  dismissed 
from  the  service  or  suffer  such  other  punishment  as  a 
court-martial  may  direct;  and  if  any  other  person  subject 
to  military  law,  shall  suffer  such  punishment  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct. 

*'Art.  92.  MURDER— RAPE.  Any  person  subject  to 
military  law  who  commits  murder  or  rape  shall  suffer 
death  or  imprisonment  for  life,  as  a  court-martial  may 
direct;  hut  no  person  shall  he  tried  hy  court-martial  for 
murder  or  rape  committed  within  the  geographical  limits 


2o8         THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

of  the  States  of  the  Union  and  the  District  of  Columbia 
in  time  of  peace. 

"Art.  93.  Various  crimes.  Any  person  subject  to  mili- 
tary law  who  commits  manslaughter,  mayhem,  arson,  bur- 
glary, robbery,  larceny,  embezzlement,  perjury,  assault 
with  intent  to  commit  any  felony,  or  assault  with  intent 
to  do  bodily  harm,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial 
may  direct. 

"Art.  94.  Frauds  against  the  Government.  Any  per- 
son subject  to  military  law  who  makes  or  causes  to  be 
made  any  claim  against  the  United  States  or  any  officer 
thereof,  knowing  such  claim  to  be  false  or  fraudulent ;  or 

"Who  presents  or  causes  to  be  presented  to  any  per- 
son in  the  civil  or  military  service  thereof,  for  approval 
or  payment,  any  claim  against  the  United  States  or  any 
officer  thereo'f,  knowing  such  claim  to  be  false  or  fraudu- 
lent; or 

"Who  enters  into  any  agreement  or  conspiracy  to  de- 
fraud the  United  States  by  obtaining,  or  aiding  others  to 
obtain,  the  allowance  or  payment  of  any  false  or  fraudu- 
lent claim;  or 

"Who,  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining,  or  aiding  others 
to  obtain,  the  approval,  allowance,  or  payment  of  any 
claim  against  the  United  States  or  against  any  officer 
thereof,  makes  or  uses,  or  procures,  or  advises  the  mak- 
ing or  use  of,  any  writing  or  other  paper,  knowing  the 
same  to  contain  any  'false  or  fraudulent  statements;  or 

"Who,  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining,  or  aiding  others 
to  obtain,  the  approval,  allowance,  or  payment  of  any 
claim  against  the  United  States  or  any  officer  thereof, 
makes,  or  procures,  or  advises  the  making  of,  any  oath 
to  any  fact  or  to  any  writing  or  other  paper,  knowing 
such  oath  to  be  false;  or 

"Who,  'for  the  purpose  of  obtaining  or  aiding  others 


ARTICLES    OF   WAR  209 

to  obtain,  the  approval,  allowance,  or  payment  of  any 
claim  against  the  United  States  or  any  officer  thereof, 
forges  or  counterfeits,  or  procures,  or  advises  the  forging 
or  counterfeiting  of  any  signature  upon  any  writing  or 
other  paper,  or  uses,  or  procures,  or  advises  the  use  of 
any  such  signature,  knowing  the  same  to  be  forged  or 
counterfeited ;   or 

"Who,  having  charge,  possession,  custody,  or  control 
of  any  money  or  other  property  of  the  United  States, 
furnished  or  intended  for  the  military  service  thereof, 
knowingly  delivers,  or  causes  to  be  delivered,  to  any  per- 
son having  authority  to  receive  the  same,  any  amount 
thereof  less  than  that  for  which  he  receives  a  certificate 
or   receipt;   or 

"Who,  being  authorized  to  make  or  deliver  any  paper 
certifying  the  receipt  of  any  property  o'f  the  United 
States  furnished  or  intended  for  the  military  service 
thereof,  makes  or  delivers  to  any  person  such  writing, 
■without  having  full  knowledge  of  the  truth  of  the  state- 
ments therein  contained  and  with  intent  to  defraud  the 
United  States;  or 

"Who  steals,  embezzles,  knowingly  and  willfully  mis- 
appropriates, applies  to  his  own  use  or  benefit,  or  wrong- 
fully or  knowingly  sells  or  disposes  of  any  ordnance, 
arms,  equipments,  ammunition,  clothing,  subsistence 
stores,  money,  or  other  property  of  the  United  States 
furnished  or  intended  for  the  mihtary  service  thereof;  or 

"Who  knowingly  purchases  or  receives  in  pledge  for 
any  obligation  or  indebtedness  from  any  soldier,  officer, 
or  other  person  who  is  a  part  of  or  employed  in  said 
•forces  or  service,  any  ordnance,  arms,  equipment,  ammu- 
nition, clothing,  subsistence  stores,  or  other  property  of 
the  United  States,  such  soldier,  officer,  or  other  person 
not  having  lawful  right  to  sell  or  pledge  the  same; 
15 


2IO  THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

"Shall,  on  conviction  thereof,  be  punished  by  fine  or 
imprisonment,  or  by  such  other  punishment  as  a  court- 
martial  may  adjudge,  or  by  any  or  all  of  said  penalties. 
And  if  any  person,  being  guilty  of  any  of  the  offenses 
aforesaid  while  in  the  military  service  of  the  United 
States,  receives  his  discharge  or  is  dismissed  'from  the 
service,  he  shall  continue  to  be  liable  to  be  arrested  and 
held  for  trial  and  sentence  by  a  court-martial  in  the  same 
manner  and  to  the  same  extent  as  if  he  had  not  received 
such  discharge  nor  been  dismissed. 

**Art.  95.  Conduct  unbecoming  an  officer  and  gentleman. 
Any  officer  or  cadet  who  is  convicted  of  conduct  unbecom- 
ing an  officer  and  a  gentleman  shall  be  dismissed  from  the 
service. 

*'Art  96.  General  article.  Though  not  mentioned  in 
these  articles,  all  disorders  and  neglects  to  the  prejudice 
of  good  order  and  military  discipline,  all  conduct  of  a 
nature  to  bring  discredit  upon  the  military  service,  and 
all  crimes  or  offenses  not  capital,  of  which  persons  sub- 
ject to  military  law  may  be  guilty,  shall  be  taken  cogni- 
zance of  by  a  general  or  special  or  summary  court-mar- 
tial, according  to  the  nature  and  degree  of  the  offense, 
and  punished  at  the  discretion  of  such  court. 

"V.     Miscellaneous  Provisions 

"Art.  104.  Disciplinary  pozvers  of  commanding  officers. 
Under  such  regulations  as  the  President  may  prescribe, 
and  which  he  may  from  time  to  time  revoke,  alter,  or  add 
to,  the  commanding  officer  of  any  detachment,  company, 
or  higher  command  may,  "for  minor  offenses  not  denied 
by  the  accused,  impose  disciplinary  punishments  upon 
persons  of  his  command  without  the  intervention  of  a 
court-martial,  unless  the  accused  demands  trial  by  court- 
martial. 


ARTICLES    OF   WAR  211 

"The  disciplinary  punishments  authorized  by  this  arti- 
cle may  include  admonition,  reprimand,  withholding  of 
privileges,  extra  fatigue,  and  restriction  to  certain  speci- 
fied limits,  but  shall  not  include  forfeiture  of  pay  or  con- 
finement under  guard.  A  person  punished  under  author- 
ity of  this  article  who  deems  his  punishment  unjust  or 
disproportionate  to  the  offense  may,  through  the  proper 
channel,  appeal  to  the  next  superior  authority,  but  may 
in  the  meantime  be  required  to  undergo  the  punishment 
adjudged.  The  commanding  officer  who  imposes  the  pun- 
ishment, his  successor  in  command,  and  superior  author- 
ity shall  have  power  to  mitigate  or  remit  any  unexecuted 
portion  of  the  punishment.  The  imposition  and  enforce- 
ment of  disciplinary  punishment  under  authority  of  this 
article  for  any  act  or  omission  shall  not  be  a  bar  to  trial 
by  court-martial  for  a  crime  or  offense  growing  out  of 
the  same  act  or  omission;  but  the  fact  that  a  disci- 
plinary punishment  has  been  enforced  may  be  shown  by 
the  accused  upon  trial,  and  when  so  shown  shall  be  con- 
sidered in  determining  the  measure  of  punishment  to  be 
adjudged  in  the  event  of  a  finding  of  guilty. 

"Art.  105.  Injuries  to  person  or  property — Redress  of. 
Whenever  complaint  is  made  to  any  commanding  officer 
that  damage  has  been  done  to  the  property  of  any  per- 
son or  that  his  property  has  been  wrongfully  taken*  by 
persons  subject  to  military  law,  such  complaint  shall  be 
investigated  by  a  board  consisting  of  any  number  of 
officers  from  one  to  three,  which  board  shall  be  convened 
by  the  commanding  officer  and  shall  have,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  such  investigation,  power  to  summon  witnesses 
and  examine  them  upon  oath  or  affirmation,  to  receive 
depositions  or  other  documentary  evidence,  and  to  assess 
the  damages  sustained  against  the  responsible  parties. 
The  assessment  of  damages  made  by  such  board  shall  be 


212  THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

subject  to  the  approval  o'f  the  commanding  officer,  and 
in  the  amount  approved  by  him  shall  be  stopped  against 
the  pay  of  the  offenders.  And  the  order  of  such  com- 
manding officer  directing  stoppages  herein  authorized 
shall  be  conclusive  on  any  disbursing  officer  for  the  pay- 
ment by  him  to  the  injured  parties  of  the  stoppages  so 
ordered. 

"Where  the  offenders  can  not  be  ascertained,  but  the 
organization  or  detachment  to  which  they  belong  is 
known,  stoppages  to  the  amount  of  damages  inflicted  may 
be  made  and  assessed  in  such  proportion  as  may  be 
deemed  just  upon  the  individual  members  thereof  who 
are  shown  to  have  been  present  with  such  organization 
or  detachment  at  the  time  the  damages  complained  of 
were  inflicted  as  determined  by  the  approved  findings  of 
the  board. 

"Art.  1 06.  Arrest  of  deserters  by  civil  officials.  It  shall 
be  lawful  for  any  civil  officer  having  authority  under  the 
laws  of  the  United  States,  or  of  any  State,  Territory, 
District,  or  possession  of  the  United  States,  to  arrest 
offenders,  summarily  to  arrest  a  deserter  from  the  mili- 
tary service  of  the  United  States  and  deliver  him  into  the 
custody  of  the  military  authorities  of  the  United  States. 

*'Art.  107.  Soldiers  to  make  good  time  lost.  Every  sol- 
dier who  in  an  existing  and  subsequent  enlistment  deserts 
the  service  of  the  United  States  or  without  proper  au- 
thority absents  liimself  'from  his  organization,  station,  or 
duty  for  more  than  one  day,  or  who  is  confined  for  more 
than  one  day  under  sentence,  or  while  awaiting  trial  and 
disposition  of  his  case,  if  the  trial  results  in  conviction, 
or  through  the  intemperate  use  of  drugs  or  alcoholic 
liquor,  or  through  disease  or  injury  the  result  of  his  own 
misconduct,  renders  himself  unable  for  more  than  one 
day  to  perform  duty,  shall  be  liable  to  serve,  after  his 


ARTICLES    OF   WAR  213 

return  to  a  full-duty  status,  for  such  period  as  shall, 
with  the  time  he  may  have  served  prior  to  such  desertion, 
unauthorized  absence,  confinement,  or  inability  to  per- 
form duty,  amount  to  the  full  term  of  that  part  of  his 
enlistment  period  which  he  is  required  to  serve  with  his 
organization  before  being  furloughed  to  the  Army  Re- 
serve. 

"Art.  108.  Soldiers — Separation  from  the  service. 
No  enlisted  man,  lawfully  inducted  into  the  military  serv- 
ice of  the  United  States,  shall  be  discharged  from  said 
service  without  a  certificate  of  discharge,  signed  by  a 
field  officer  of  the  regiment  or  other  organization  to 
which  the  enlisted  man  belongs  or  by  the  commanding 
officer  when  no  such  field  officer  is  present;  and  no  en- 
listed man  shall  be  discharged  from  said  service  before 
his  term  of  service  has  expired,  except  by  order  of  the 
President,  the  Secretary  of  War,  the  commanding  officer 
o'f  a  department,  or  by  sentence  of  a  general  court-mar- 
tial. 

"Art.  109.  Oath  of  enlistment.  At  the  time  of  his  en- 
listment  every  soldier  shall  take  the   following  oath  or 

affirmation:   *I,   ,   do  solemnly   swear    (or   affirm) 

that  I  will  bear  true  faith  and  allegiance  to  the  United 
States  of  America;  that  I  will  serve  them  honestly  and 
faithfully  against  all  their  enemies  whomsoever;  and 
that  I  will  obey  the  orders  of  the  President  of  the  United 
States  and  the  orders  o*f  the  officers  appointed  over  me, 
according  to  the  Rules  and  Articles  of  War.'  This  oath 
or  affirmation  may  be  taken  before  any  officer." 


CHAPTER   XVIII 
COURTS-MARTIAL    AND    PUNISHMENT 

All  cases  of  violations  of  the  Articles  of  War  are 
tried  by  courts-martial.  There  are  three  kinds  of  courts- 
martial:  Summary  court,  consisting  of  one  officer;  Spe- 
cial court,  consisting  of  not  less  than  three  nor  more  than 
five  officers  and  a  judge  advocate;  and  General  court, 
consisting  of  not  less  than  five  nor  more  than  thirteen 
officers,  a  judge  advocate  and  an  assistant  judge  advocate. 

Judge  advocate's  duty  toward  the  accused.  Should  the 
accused,  for  any  reason,  not  be  represented  by  counsel, 
the  judge  advocate  shall,  from  time  to  time  throughout 
the  proceedings,  advise  him  of  his  legal  rights. 

Summary  court-martial  may  try  cases  where  the  pun- 
ishment is  not  more  than  three  months'  confinement  nor 
the  forfeiture  of  more  than  three  months*  pay. 

Special  court-martial  may  try  cases  where  the  punish- 
ment is  not  more  than  six  months'  confinement  nor  for- 
feiture of  more  than  six  months'  pay. 

General  court-martial  may  try  any  person  subject  to 
military  law  for  any  crime  punishable  by  the  Articles 
of  War. 

214 


COURTS-MARTIAL   AND    PUNISHMENT  215 


Maximum  and  Minimum  Punishments 


Art.  of 
War 
54      6 

58  6 

59  I 
61 
62 
63 
65 
68 

69 

73 
83 
84 

85 
86 


90  3 

93  6 

94  I 
96  I 


Confinement  at 
hard  labor 
months  to  i  year 
months  to  5  years 
year  to  4  years 
days  to  6  months 
year 
months 

months  to  i  year 
months  to  5  years 
month  to  i  year 
months  to  i  year 
months  to  2  years 
months  to  5  years 
months 

months  or  death 
months 

months  to  20  years 
to  5  years 
month  to  5  years 


Forfeiture  of  pay 
for 


1  day 

2  days 

4  months 
I J  months 
4  months 
§  month 

4  months 

2  months  to  4  months 
2  months  to  4  months 

5  days  to  6  months 

2  m.onths 


10  days  to  4  months 


CHAPTER  XIX 


FIRST-AID    SUGGESTIONS 


Wounds  and  Cuts 


The  first-aid  packet  has  been  so  treated  as  to  be  free 
of  germs ;  therefore  in  applying  the  gauze  to  a  cut  or 
wound  be  careful  not  to  touch  the  part  which  is  applied 
to  the  wound. 

In  treating  a  wound,  first  loosen  the  clothing.  Don't 
let  onlookers  crowd  around  the  patient. 

Never  touch  the  wound  with  anything  except  the  first- 
aid  dressing. 

Never  give  whiskey 
or  any  stimulant  un- 
less ordered  to  do  so 
by  a  doctor. 

Bleeding  will  stop 
soon  unless  an  artery 
or  vein  has  been  cut. 
If  a  large  artery  is 
cut,  the  blood  will 
gush  out  in  spurts.  In 
this  case  find  the  ar- 
tery and  press  it  be- 
tween the  cut  and  the 

Pia  45  ^^^''^• 

216 


FIRST-AID    SUGGESTIONS 


217 


Fig.  46 

If  in  the  arm  or  hand,  apply  pressure  as  in  Figure  45.  If 
in  the  leg,  treat  as  in  Figure  46.  If  in  the  shoulder  or  arm- 
pit, do  as  in  Figure  47. 

In  the  case  of  an  artery 
in  the  arm  or  leg,  use  a 
tourniquet,  as  shown  in  Fig- 
ure 48,  as  follows:  Place 
a  pad  of  cloth  or  paper 
over  the  artery.  Tie  a 
bandage  loosely  about  the 
limb  and  insert  the  bay- 
onet or  a  stick  and  twist 
until  the  bleeding  stops. 
Be  careful  to  twist  slowly 
and  stop  as  soon  as  bleed- 
ing ceases.  P^^^  ^^ 


2l8 


THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 


Fla  49 


F1&  48 

Broken  Bone 

The  greatest  danger  in  the  case 
of  a  broken  bone  is  that  the  broken 
ends  may  tear  the  arteries,  veins, 
and  muscles.  Therefore,  never 
move  the  limb  that  is  broken  except 
to  straighten  it  out  gently  and  pull 
the  end  so  as  to  get  the  bones  in 
place.  Then  bind  the  leg  or  arm 
to  a  splint  of  any  straight,  stiff  ma- 
terial, such  as  a  bayonet,  rifle,  etc., 
to  hold  it  in  place.  Put  the  bandages 
above  and  below  the  broken  part. 


FIRST-AID    SUGGESTIONS 


219 


Fig.  50 

A  good  plan  is  to  bind  the  broken  leg  to  the  well  one 
and  the  broken  arm  to  the  body. 


Fig.  51 

Do  not  fuss  with  wounds  in  the  body.     Simply  cover 
them  with  the  dressing  in  the  first-aid  packet. 


Fainting  or  Exhaustion 

Symptoms.  Pale,  skin  cool 
and  moist,  pulse  weak,  and 
unconsciousness. 

Treatment.  Loosen  cloth- 
ing. Keep  body  warm,  and 
give  stimulant  (whiskey,  hot 
coffee,  or  tea). 

Sunstroke 

Symptoms.  Face  flushed, 
skin  dry  and  very  hot,  pulse 
full  and  strong. 


Fig.  52 


220  THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

Treatment.  Put  the  patient  in  a  cool  place,  remove  or 
open  clothing,  cool  the  body  by  cold  water  applied  to  the 
head  and  other  parts  of  the  body.    Never  give  stimulants. 

Freezing  and  Frostbite 

Symptoms.  The  frozen  part  will  look  white  or  bluish 
and  be  cold. 

Treatment.  Rub  briskly  but  carefully  in  a  cool  place, 
never  near  a  fire.  Give  small  amount  of  stimulant  and 
then  warm  liquid  food,  like  soup.  The  object  is  to 
gradually,  not  violently,  bring  back  the  normal  circulation 
of  the  blood. 

Schaefer  Method  of  Restoring  the  Apparently  Drowned 

Turn  the  patient  face  to  the  ground,  clasp  your  hands 
under  his  waist  and  raise  the  body  so  that  any  water  may 
drain  out  of  the  air  passages  while  the  head  remains  low. 
The  patient  is  then  laid  on  his  stomach,  arms  extended 
from  his  body  beyond  his  head,  face  turned  to  one  side 
so  that  the  mouth  and  nose  do  not  touch  the  ground. 
This  position  causes  the  tongue  to  fall  forward  of  its 
own  weight  and  so  prevents  its  falling  back  into  the  air 
passages.  Turning  the  head  to  one  side  prevents  the 
face  coming  into  contact  with  mud  or  water  during  the 
operation.  This  position  also  facilitates  the  removal  from 
the  mouth  of  foreign  bodies,  such  as  tobacco,  chewing 
gum,  false  teeth,  etc.,  and  favors  the  expulsion  of  mucus, 
blood,  vomitus,  serum,  or  any  liquid  that  may  be  in  the 
air  passages. 

The  operator  kneels,  straddles  one  or  both  of  the 
patient's  thighs,  and  faces  his  head.  Locating  the  lowest 
rib,  the  operator,  with  his  thumbs  nearly  parallel  to  his 
fingers,  places  his  hands  so  that  the  little  finger  curls 


FIRST-AID    SUGGESTIONS 


221 


over  the  twelfth  rib.  If  the  hands  are  on  the  pelvic  bones 
the  object  of  the  v^ork  is  defeated;  hence  the  bones  of 
the  pelvis  are  first  located  in  order  to  avoid  them.  The 
hands  must  be  free  from  the  pelvis  and  resting  on  the 
lowest  rib.  By  operating  on  the  bare  back  it  is  easier 
to  locate  the  lower  ribs  and  avoid  the  pelvis.  The  nearer 
the  ends  of  the  ribs  the  hands  are  placed  without  sliding 
off  the  better.  The  hands  are  thus  removed  from  the 
spine,  the  fingers  being  nearly  out  of  sight. 


Fig.  53 


The  fingers  help  some,  but  the  chief  pressure  is  exerted 
by  the  heels  (thenar  and  hypothenar  eminences)  of  the 
hands,  with  the  weight  coming  straight  from  the  shoul- 
ders. It  is  a  waste  of  energy  to  bend  the  arms  at  the 
elbows  and  shove  in  from  the  sides,  because  the  muscles 
of  the  back  are  stronger  than  the  muscles  of  the  arms. 

The  operator's  arms  are  held  straight,  and  his  weight 
is  brought  from  his  shoulders  by  bringing  his  body  and 
shoulders  forward.  This  weight  is  gradually  increased 
until  at  the  end  of  the  three  seconds  of  vertical  pressure 
upon  the  lower  ribs  of  the  patient  the  force  is  felt  to  be 


222 


THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 


heavy  enough  to  compress  the  parts;  then  the  weight  is 
suddenly  removed.  If  there  is  danger  of  not  returning 
the  hands  to  the  right  position  again,  they  can  remain 
lightly  in  place;  but  it  is  usually  better  to  remove  the 
hands  entirely.  If  the  operator  is  light  and  the  patient 
an  overweight  adult,  he  can  utilize  over  80  per  cent  of 
his  weight  by  raising  his  knees  from  the  ground  and 
supporting  himself  entirely  on  his  toes  and  the  heels  of 
his  hands,  the  latter  properly  placed  on  the  ends  of  the 
floating  ribs  of  the  patient.  In  this  manner  he  can  work 
as  effectively  as  a  heavy  man. 


Fia  54 

A  light  feather  or  a  piece  of  absorbent  cotton  drawn 
out  thin  and  held  near  the  nose  by  some  one  will  indi- 
cate by  its  movements  whether  or  not  there  is  a  current 
of  air  going  and  coming  with  each  forced  expiration 
and  spontaneous  inspiration. 

The  natural  rate  of  breathing  is  12  to  15  times  per 
minute.  The  rate  of  operation  should  not  exceed  this. 
The  lungs  must  be  thoroughly  emptied  by  three  seconds 
of  pressure,  then  refilling  takes  care  of  itself.    Pressure 


FIRST-AID    SUGGESTIONS  223 

and  release  of  pressure — one  complete  respiration — occu- 
pies about  five  seconds.  If  the  operator  is  alone,  he  can 
be  guided  in  each  act  by  his  own  deep,  regular  respiration 
or  by  counting  or  by  his  watch  lying  by  his  side.  If 
comrades  are  present,  he  can  be  advised  by  them. 

The  duration  of  the  efforts  at  artificial  respiration 
should  ordinarily  exceed  an  hour;  indefinitely  longer  if 
there  are  any  evidences  of  returning  animation,  by  way 
of  breathing,  speaking,  or  movements.  There  are  liable 
to  be  evidences  of  life  within  25  minutes  in  patients  who 
will  recover  from  electric  shock,  but  where  there  is  doubt 
the  patient  should  be  given  the  benefit  of  the  doubt.  In 
drowning,  especially,  recoveries  are  on  record  after  two 
hours  or  more  of  unconsciousness;  hence,  the  Schaefer 
method,  being  easy  of  operation,  is  more  likely  to  be 
persisted  in. 

Aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia  may  be  poured  on  a  hand- 
kerchief and  held  continuously  within  3  inches  of  the 
face  and  nose.  If  other  ammonia  preparations  are  used, 
they  should  be  diluted  or  held  farther  away.  Try  it  on 
your  own  nose  first. 

When  the  operator  is  a  heavy  man  it  is  necessary  to 
caution  him  not  to  bring  force  too  violently  upon  the  ribs, 
as  one  of  them  might  be  broken. 

Do  not  attempt  to  give  liquids  of  any  kind  to  the 
patient  while  unconscious.  Apply  warm  blankets  and 
hot-water  bottles  as  soon  as  they  can  be  obtained. 


Hints  for  Treating  Wounded 

1.  Have  the  wounded  man  sit  or  lie  down. 

2.  Loosen    the    collar    and    waist    belt    and    remove 
equipment. 


224         THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

3.  Expose  the  wound  freely  to  view,  and  look  for 
bleeding,  before  attempting  to  dress  it. 

4.  Always  remove  clothing  by  unbuttoning  or  cutting, 
and  pull  nothing  off. 

5.  Do  not  remove  more  clothing  than  is  necessary  to 
see  the  wound  clearly. 

6.  Never  touch  the  wound  with  the  fingers,  with  water, 
or  with  anything  except  first-aid  dressing. 

7.  Elevate  the  limb  above  the  level  of  the  body  to 
lessen  pain  and  bleeding. 

8.  Apply  bandage  from  first-aid  packet  to  protect  the 
wound  from  infection  and  blood  poisoning. 

9.  If  blood  spurts  from  a  wound  in  a  strong  stream, 
measures  must  be  taken  to  stop  it. 

10.  Have  those  who  are  able  to  walk  repair  to  the 
dressing  station  at  once. 

11.  Those  who  are  unable  to  walk  must  be  made  to 
lie  as  quietly  and  comfortably  as  possible  and  await  the 
arrival  of  litter  bearers. 


CHAPTER   XX 

EASY  ROAD  TO  FRENCH 

Pronunciation 

(The  French  alphabet  is  the  same  as  the  EngHsh,  ex- 
cept that  there  is  no  w.)     • 

^Letters  Pronunciation 

A  . . . .  (Short)  somewhat  like  a  in  am;  (long),  a,  like  a 

in  bar. 

B Same  as  in  English. 

C  . . .  .Sound  of  k  before  a,  o,  u  or  a.  consonant;  sound 

of  s  before  e,  i  and  y,  and  with  the  cedilla  (g). 
D  . . .  .Same  as  in  English. 
E As  u  in  sun — silent  at  end  of  words;   e,  e,  ei, 

nearly  like  ei  in  their;  e,  ai,  as  a  in  aim. 

F As  in  English. 

G Like  ^  in  pleasure  before  e,  i  and  y;  as  g  in  go 

before  a,  o,  and  u. 
H.... Usually  silent. 
I    ...  .As  ^  in  me. 
]    ....  As  ^  in  azure. 

K As  in  English. 

L  ...  .As  in  English. 

M As  in  EngHsh. 

N  ...  .As  in  English. 

O 0,  as  in  roh;  5,  au,  eau  as  o  in  English. 

P As  in  EngHsh,  but  often  silent  at  end  of  word. 

16  225 


226        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Q  .'. .  .As  k  in  English. 

R As  in  English. 

S   As  J  in  sister;  like  s  in  please  when  between  two 

vowels. 

T  ...  .As  in  English  ;  sometimes  like  j  in  sister;  most  al- 
ways silent  at  end  of  words. 

U Like  German  il — to  form,  purse  lips,  then  say  ee. 

V As  in  English. 

X As  in  English. 

Y As  e  in  me. 

Z As  in  English. 

Liaison  or  linking.  Final  consonants  are  usually  silent, 
but  when  the  next  word  begins  with  a  vowel  the  final 
consonant  and  the  vowel  are  blended  or  linked,  as: 
"C'est  tin  petit  g argon" ;  here  the  t  and  u  are  blended — 
that  is,  Cest  and  un  are  pronounced  as  one  word.  In 
blending,  final  s  or  x  =  z;  d  =  t;  g  =  k;  f  =  v,  as 
nos  amis  (no-sa-me). 

Elision.  The  vowels  a,  e,  and  i  are  silent  in  certain 
cases.  Then  they  are  represented  by  an  apostrophe. 
Thus,  a  and  e  in  le,  la,  je,  me,  te,  se,  de,  ne,  que  before 
initial  vowel  or  h  mute ;  also  i  in  si  before  il  or  ils.  Ex. : 
L'abri  (le  abri)  =  shelter;  j'aime  {je  aime)=I  love. 
Final  e  is  silent  unless  it  is  the  only  vowel  in  the  word. 

Note. — Many  sounds  in  French  have  no  equivalent  in 
English.  The  only  way  to  get  them  is  to  have  the  words 
you  are  doubtful  about  pronounced  by  a  Frenchman. 

Articles — Definite  and  Indefinite 

Le  (masculine)  =the,  as  le  caporal  =  the  corporal. 
La  (feminine)  =the,  as  la  compagnie^  the  company. 
Les  (plural,  bpth  f.  and  m.)=the,  as  les  soldats  =  the 
soldiers. 


EASY   ROAD   TO    FRENCH  227 

Un  (masculine)  =  one  or  a,  as  un  caporal  =  a.  corporal. 
Une  ( feminine)  =  a  or  one,  as  une  compagnie  =  one 
company. 

Gender.  French  nouns  are  either  feminine  or  mascu- 
line. There  are  no  case  endings  in  French,  therefore 
the  gender  is  indicated  by  the  article,  as  la  or  une 
femme  =  the  or  a  woman;  le  or  un  papier  =  the  or  a 
paper.  The  direct  object  is  expressed  by  a  verb  ,-|- noun, 
as  Le  pere  aime  son  fils  =  the  father  loves  his  son.  The 
indirect  object  by  the  preposition  a  -j-  noun,  as  J'ai  donne 
le  fusil  au  (d-j-^^)  caporal  J  ones  =1  gave  the  rifle  to 
Corporal  Jones.  The  possessive  by  de  -\-  noun,  as  J'ai  le 
chapeau  du  {de  +  le)  sergent  Smith  =  I  have  Sergeant 
Smith's  hat. 

In  French,  (i)  verb  and  subject  agree  in  number  and 
person;  (2)  adjective  and  noun,  in  gender  and  number; 
(3)  pronoun  and  antecedent,  in  gender  and  number. 

Pronouns 

Personal 
je=I  nous  =  we 

tu  =  you  vous  =  you 

il=he;  elle=she  ils=they 

se=  himself,  herself,  itself  se  =  themselves 

Possessive 
Masculine  Feminine  Plural 

(Singular)  (Singular)  (Plural) 

mon  ma  mes  =  my 

ton  ta  tes=  thy,  your 

son  sa  ses=his,  her.  its 

notre  notre  nos=our 

votre  votre  vos=your 

leur  leur  leurs=  their 

De  le  and  de  les  are  always  contracted  into  du  and  des, 
as  Le  pistolet  du  lieutenant  =  The  lieutenant's  pistol;    Les 


228        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

baionnettes  des  soldats=The  soldiers'  bayonets.    Ale=au; 
^  les=aux. 

Plurals 

As  in  English,  the  plural  of  a  noun  or  adjective  is  usually 
formed  by  adding  s,  as:  Le  brave  soldat,  Les  braves  soldats, 
The  brave  soldier,  The  brave  soldiers. 

Plural  of  le,  la,  1'  is  les;  as:  Le  livre,  les  livres,  The  book, 
the  books. 

Nouns  ending  in  s,  x  and  z  and  adjectives  in  s  and  x  are 
unchanged  in  the  plural,  as:  bras  =  arms,  nez=  noses.  Nouns 
and  adjectives  in  au  and  nouns  in  eu  add  x,  as:  couteau  = 
knife,  couteaux=  knives. 

Nouns  and  adjectives  in  al,  change  al  to  au  and  add  x,  as: 
g^n^ral,  g^neraux.  Special  cases:  (Eil=eye,  yeux  =  eyes; 
ciel=sky,  cieux=  skies  or  heavens. 

Questions 

To  ask  a  question  put  the  personal  pronoun  after  the  verb 
and  join  with  a  hyphen,  or  by  t  if  the  verb  ends  in  a  vowel, 
as:  Avez-vous?=  have  you?  a-t-il?=has  he?  est-eUe  ici?=is 
she  here? 

By  putting  the  words  est-ceque,  meaning  ''Is  it  that?"  at 
the  beginning,  any  sentence  may  be  turned  into  a  question, 
as:  "Est-ce  que  vous  avez  mon  chapeau?  "  =  " Have  you  my 
hat?"  Without  Est-ce  que  the  sentence  would  mean  "You 
have  my  hat."    This  is  the  usual  way  of  asking  a  question. 

On  is  an  indefinite  pronoun  and  means  one,  some  one,  we, 
you,  they,  people,  with  the  verb  always  in  the  singular,  as: 
"On  parle  des  troupes  franfaises  avec  admiration,"  may  mean 
"One,  people,  we,  you  or  they  speak  of  the  French  troops 
with  admiration." 

Qu*est-ce  que  or  que  may  be  used  to  ask  a  question,  as: 
Qu-a-t-il?  or  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  a? -What  has  he? 


EASY   ROAD    TO    FRENCH  229 

Adjectives 

Feminine  of  adjectives  is  usually  formed  by  adding  e  to 
masculine,  as:   grand  (m.),  grande  (f.). 

Comparison 

Put  plus  =more,  moins  =less  or  aussi  =as,  before  the  adjec- 
tive, and  que  =  than  or  as,  after  it  to  form  the  compara- 
tive, as:  II  est  plus  grand  que  Jean  =  He  is  taller  than  John. 
II  est  moins  grand  que  Jean  =  He  is  not  so  tall  as  John. 
II  est  aussi  grand  que  Jean  =  He  is  as  tall  £is  John. 

Superlative 

Put  a  definite  article  or  a  possessive  adjective  before  plus 
or  moins  to  form  the  superlative,  as:  Marie  est  la  plus  belle  de 
toutes  =  Marie  is  the  most  beautiful  of  them  all. 

Irregular 
Bon  =  good;  meilleur=  better;  le  meilleur=best. 

Adverbs 
Same  as  adjectives,  but  le  is  always  used  in  superlative. 

Irregular 

Bien  =  well;  mieux=  better;  le  mieux=best. 
Peu=  little;  moins  =  less;  le  moins  =  least. 

Disjunctive  Personal  Pronouns 

moi=I,  me  nous  =  we,  us 

toi  =  thou,  you  vous  =  you 

lui  =  he,  him  eux=they,  them  (m.) 

elle=she,  her  elles  =  they,  them  (f.) 

These  forms  are  used  after  prepositions,  as:  pour  elles  =  for 
them;  avec  moi=with  me;  sans  eux=  without  them;  also  as 
subject  after  ce  and  etre,  as: 

C'est  moi,  c'est  vous,  c'est  nous  =  It  is  I,  it  is  you,  it  is  us. 


23 o       THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 
LEARN  THESE  B7  HEART 


Prench 

English 

avec 

= 

with 

et 

= 

and 

oH 

= 

where 

sur 

= 

on  or  upon 

void 

= 

here  is,  here  are 

voila 

= 

there  is,  there  are 

il  y  a 

= 

there  is,  there  are 

aussi 

= 

too,  also 

derriere 

= 

behind 

non 

= 

no 

devant 

= 

before,  in  front  of 

autre 

= 

other 

dans 

= 

in  or  into 

ici 

= 

here 

mais 

= 

but 

oui 

= 

yes 

la 

= 

her,  it 

le 

= 

him,  it 

aujourd'hui 

= 

today 

bon,  bonne 

= 

good 

sous 

= 

under 

la 

= 

there 

en 

= 

some  or  any,  of  it,  of  him,  of  her,  of 
them  (pronoun) 

en 

= 

in,  into,  like  a,  while,  on  (preposition) 

combien  de 

= 

how  many 

chez  moi 

= 

at  home 

ensemble 

= 

together 

maintenant 

= 

now 

ou 

= 

or 

a 

= 

to,  at,  in 

ce,  cet,  cette 

this,  that  (ce  before  (m.)  noun  begin- 
ning with  a  consonant ;  cet,  when  it  be- 
gins with  a  vowel,  or  h  mute;  cette,  be- 
fore a  (f.)  noun.) 

que 

■1 

what 

que 

- 

whom,  which,  that  (pron.) 

que 

— 

than,  as,  let  (conj.) 

entrer  dans 

- 

to  enter,  go  into 

EASY   ROAD   TO    FRENCH 


231 


nous  voici 

en  route  = 

pour  = 

beau,  belle  = 

beaucoup  = 

blanc,  blanche  = 

bleu,  bleue  = 

grand,  grande  = 

a  cheval  = 

noir,  noire  = 

parce  que  = 

pourquoi  = 

qui  = 

naturel,  naturelle  = 

si  = 

vieux,  vielle  = 

d'abord  = 

bientot  = 

ensuite  = 

puis  = 

tout,  toute  = 
tout 

deja  = 

dernier,  derniere  = 

encore  = 

entre  = 

gros,  grosse  = 
modeste,  modest  e     = 

peut-etre  = 

toujours  = 

tout  a  fait  = 

car  = 

cher,  chere  = 

quant  a  = 

6tre  en  train  de  = 

depuis  que  = 

hicr  soir  = 

partout  = 
prochain,  prochaine  = 

faire  le  tour  de  = 

fatigue,  fatiguee  = 

a  la  fin  = 


here  we  are 

on  the  way 

for,  in  order  to 

fine,  handsome 

much,  very  much 

white 

blue 

great,  large,  tall 

on  horseback 

black 

because 

why 

who,  whom,  which 

natural 

so 

old 

first 

soon 

then,  next 

then,  afterwards 

all,  the  whole,  every  (adj.) 

quite  (adv.) 

already 

last 

yet,  again 

among 

big 

modest 

perhaps 

still 

quite 

for 

dear 

as  for,  as  to 

to  be  in  the  act  of 

since 

yesterday  or  last  evening 

everywhere 

next 

to  go  around 

tired 

at  last,  finally 


232       THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 


m^me 

a  bon  marche 

apres 

tout  de  suite 

a  I'instant 

pret,  prete 

donner  la  main  a 

je  suis  leve 

afin  que 

avant  que 

bien  que 

un  de  mes  amis 

ceci 

cela 

dont 

de  Teau  benite 

du  pain  benit 

sans  coup  ferir 


same 

cheap 

after 

at  once 

instantly 

ready 

to  shake  hands  with 

I  am  up 

in  order  that 

before 

although 

a  friend  of  mine 

this  (thing) 

that  (thing) 

of  whom,  of  which 

Holy  water 

consecrated  bread 

without  striking  a  blow 

Common  Phrases 


Here  is  my  knapsack  =  Void  mon  sac.  By  substitut- 
ing any  word,  such  as  lamp,  for  knapsack  you  have  Void 
ma  lanterney  and  in  this  way  you  can  form  any  number 
of  phrases.  Remember  that  the  gender  of  the  pronoun 
agrees  with  the  noun.  You  have  tna  lanterne  because 
lanterne  in  French  is  feminine. 


Bring  me 
Some  coffee 
Some  tea 
Some  milk 
Some  butter 
Some  bread 
Some  meat 
Some  stew 
Some  cheese 
Some  chocolate 


Apportes-moi 
du  cafe 
du  the 
du  lait 
de  beurre 
du  pain 
de  la  viande 
du  ragout 
du  fromage 
du  chocolat 


EASY   ROAD   TO    FRENCH  233 

Some  bacon  du  lard 

Some  soup  du  potage 

Some  eggs  des  oeufs 

Some  potatoes  des  pommes  de  terra 

A  blanket  une  couverture 

A  hammer  un  marteau 

A  hat  un  chapeau 

A  rifle  un  fusil 

As  in  the  expression  donnez-moi,  you  can  substitute 
any  words  for  the  word  blanket,  etc.  To  be  polite  you 
should  use  "S'il  vous  plait"  after  apportez-moi  or  donnes- 
moi,  which  means  "If  you  please."  When  the  article  is 
given  to  you,  say  "Merci,"  which  means  "Thanks."  There 
are  many  other  verbs  that  can  be  used  in  this  way,  as 
montrez-moi  =  show  me,  or  dites-moi  =  tell  me. 

Requests,  etc. 

Can  you? Pouvez-vous? 

I  want  (something) J'ai  besoin  de  (quelque  chose). 

Do  you  know? Savez-vous? 

Do  you  speak  English? Parlez-vous  anglais? 

Have  you? Avez-vous? 

Help! Au  secoursl 

I  am  hungry J'ai  faim. 

I  am  ill Je  suis  malade. 

I  am  thirsty J'ai  soif. 

I  am  tired Je  suis  fatigue. 

I  am  wounded Je  suis  blesse. 

I  do  not  speak  French! Je  ne  parle  pas  frangais! 

I  do  not  understand  you!.. . .  Je  ne  vous  comprends  pas! 

Please  bring  me Apportez  moi — ,  s'il  vous  plait 

— get  me Procurez-moi. 


234       THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

— give  me Donnez-moi. 

— lend  me Pretez-moi. 

— pass  me Passez-moi. 

— show  me Montrez-moi. 

— tell  me Dites-moi. 

Speak  more  slowly Parlez  plus  lentement. 

Thank  you Merci. 

Will  you? Voulez-vous? 


Food,  Drink,  Smoke 

Beer,  Glass  of Un  verre  de  biere. 

Biscuit Le  biscuit. 

Brandy Cognac. 

Bread,  butter Du  pain,  beurre. 

Canteen '.  Bidon. 

Cheese Fromage. 

Chocolate Chocolat. 

Cigarette Une  cigarette. 

Coffee,  cream Du  cafe,  cr^me. 

Drink,  To A  boire. 

Eggs (Eufs. 

Food De  la  noumture. 

Fruit Des  fruits. 

Grapes Raisins. 

Match Allumette. 

Meal,  A Un  repas. 

Meat De  la  viande. 

Milk Dulait. 

Mineral  Water Eau  min6rale. 

Pipe Pipe. 

Smoke,  A Quelque  chose  k  fumer. 

Smoke,  To Fumer. 

^up Consoznm6. 


EASY   ROAD   TO    FRENCH  235 

Sugar Le  sucre. 

Tea Du  the. 

Tobacco Du  tabac. 

Vegetables ,. Des  legumes. 

Water De  Teau. 

Wine Du  vin. 

Correspondence,  Telegraph,  etc. 

Envelope Enveloppe. 

Fountain  pen Plume  reservoir. 

Ink De  I'encre. 

Note  paper Papier  a  lettres. 

Pen Plume. 

Pencil Crayon. 

Postage  stamp Timbre. 

Postcard Carte  postale. 

Post  this  letter Mettez  cette  lettre  a  la  poste. 

Registered  letter Une  lettre  recommandee. 

Telephone  message Un  message  telephonique. 

Telegram Une  depeche. 

Dress  and  Toilet 

Bath,  A Un  bain. 

Bed Lit. 

•  Blankets Couvertures. 

Bootlaces Lacets  de  bottine. 

Boots,  shoes Les  souliers  m. 

Braces Les  bretelles,  f. 

Brush La  brosse. 

Buttons Les  boutons,  m. 

Candle Bougie. 

Cap  (cloth.) La  casquette. 

Comb La  flanelle. 

Gloves Les  gants,  m. 


236       THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

Handkerchiefs Mouchoirs. 

Hat Le  chapeau. 

Necktie Une  cravate. 

Needle Une  aiguille. 

Overcoat Un  pardessus. 

Pants  (drawers),  pair  of Un  calegon. 

Pins Les  epingles,  f. 

Pocket La  poche. 

Penknife Le  canif . 

Purse Le  porte-monnaie. 

Razor Un  rasoir. 

Scissors Les  ciseaux,  m. 

Sewing-cotton Le  coton  (a  coudre). 

Sheets Draps. 

Shirts Chemises. 

Sleeping-suits Vetements  de  nuit. 

Socks,  pairs  of Paires  de  chausettes. 

Some  soap Du  savon. 

Spectacles Les  lunettes,  f. 

Stockings,  pairs  of Paires  de  has. 

Stud Un  bouton  (de  chemise). 

Suit  (of  clothes) L'habit  complet. 

Thread Le  fil. 

Tooth-brush Une  brosse  i  dents. 

Towels Essuie-mains. 

Trousers,  pair  of Un  pantalon. 

Waistcoat Un  gilet. 

Watch Une  montre. 

Water,  hot,  cold De  I'eau  chaude,  froide. 

Waterproof  coat Un  manteau  imperm6able. 

Utensils 

Basin  (Hand) La  cuvette. 

Bucket Le  seau. 


EASY   ROAD   TO    FRENCH  237 

Coffee-pot Una  caf etiere. 

Corkscrew Un  tire-bouchon. 

Cup Une  tasse. 

Dish Un  plat. 

Fork Une  fourchette. 

Glass Un  verre. 

Jug  of  milk Un  pot  au  lait. 

Kettle Une  bouilloire. 

Knife Un  couteau. 

Plate Une  assiette. 

Spoon Une  cuiller. 

Saucer Une  soucoupe. 

Tea-pot Une  theiere. 

Directions  and  Places 

Before Avant. 

Behind Derriere. 

Bridge Un  pont. 

Brook Un  rulsseau. 

Church Une  eglise. 

Field Un  champ. 

Ford Le  gue. 

Forest Une  foret. 

Hill Uncol. 

Une  colline. 

In  front  of Devant. 

Railway Un  chemin  de  fer. 

Railway  station Une  gare. 

River Un  fleuve. 

Road Une  route. 

Un  chemin. 

Spring Une  source. 

Street Larue. 


238        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Town Une  ville. 

Valley Une  vallee. 

Village Une  village. 

Wall Un  mur. 

Wood Un  bois. 

North Nord. 

South Sud. 

East Est. 

West Quest. 

North-east Nord-est. 

North-west Nord-ouest. 

South-east Sud-est. 

South-west Sud-ouest. 

On  the  Road  Sur  la  Route 

Where  is ?— Oii  est—? 

What  place  is  this? — Ou  sommes-nous  ici? 

What  is  the  nearest  town? — Quelle  est  la  ville  la  plus  proche? 

Where  does  this  road  lead  to? — Ou  mene  cette  route? 

Where  is  the  nearest  inn? — Oii  est  I'auberge  le  plus  pres  d'ici? 

Is  it  far?   Quite  near — Est-ce  loin?    Tout  pres. 

This  way.   Opposite — Par  ici.    En  face. 

Can  I  have  a  bed? — Puis-je  avoir  un  lit? 

Where  are  the  English? — Oii  sont  les  Anglais? 

Where  are  the  English  troops? — Oii  sont  les  troupes  anglaises? 

Have  you  seen  the  aeroplane? — Avez  vous  vu  I'a^roplane? 

The  airship  is  waiting — Le  dirigeable  attend. 

Which  is  the  way  to ? — Quel  chemin  faut-il  prendre  pour 

aller  a — ? 
We   are  looking  for   our   regiment — Nous    cherchons   notre 

regiment. 

We  are  going  to N.ous  allons  k — . 

Are  there  any  soldiers  here? — Y  a-t-il  des  soldats  ici? 

Where  have  the  troops  gone? — Les  troupes  od  sont-elles  allies? 


EASY   ROAD   TO    FRENCH  239 

Where  can  we  cross  the  river? — Ou  pouvons-nous  traverser  le 

fleuve? 
Have  the  troops  passed  this  way? — Est-ce  que  les  troupes  ont 

passe  par  ici? 
Where  is  the  enemy? — Ou  est  rennemi? 
Over  there — Par  la. 
Here.     There — Ici.    La. 
How  far  away? — A  quelle  distance? 
What  is  this  river? — Quel  est  ce  fleuve? 
What  troops  are  those? — Quelles  sont  ces  troupes  la? 
The  soldiers  are  coming  this  way — Les  soldats  viennent  par  ici. 
Are  we  near  the  railway? — Sommes-nous  pres  du  chemin  de 

fer? 
Is  there  a  station  near? — Y  a-t-il  une  gare  pres  d'ici? 
How  far  is  it  to  a  town? — A  quelle  distance   sommes-nous 

d'une  ville? 
About  five  kilometers — Environ  cinq  kilometres. 

It  is  ten  kilometers  to est  a  dix  kilometres  d'ici. 

Follow  this  road  for,  a  kilometer — Suivez  cette  route  pendant 

un  kilometre. 
Turn  to  the  left — Tournez  a  gauche. 
Always  keep  to  the  right — Prenez  toujours  votre  droite. 
You  must  go  to  the  east — II  faut  aller  a  Test. 
They  went  south-east — lis  sont  alles  au  sud-est. 
Is  there  a  bridge? — Y  a-t-il  un  pont? 

The  nearest  bridge  is  at Le  pont  le  plus  proche  est  a — 

Three  kilometers  farther  on — Trois  kilometres  plus  loin. 
Are  there  any  boats? — Y  a-t-il  des  bateaux? 
Where  have  you  come  from? — D'ou  venez-vous? 
Where  do  you  want  to  go? — Ou  voulez-vous  aller? 
At  the  top  of  the  hill — En  haut  de  la  coUine. 
At  the  foot  of  the  mountain — Au  pied  de  la  montagne. 
Keep  straight  on — AUez  tout  droit. 
Follow  the  valley — Suivez  la  vallee. 


240        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Over  thai  hill — Apres  cette  c6te. 

To  the  right,  to  the  left — A  droite,  a  gauche. 

Straight  on — Tout  droit. 

Go  back,  go  on — Retoumez,  continuez. 

Along  the  road — Sur  la  route. 

To  the  cross-roads — Aux  chemins  de  traverse. 

Halt!     Who  goes  there?— Ualtel    Qui  va  la? 

Friend!    I  am  an  Englishman — Ami!    Je  suis  anglais. 

/  have  lost  my  way — ^Je  me  suis  perdu. 

Who  are  you? — Qui  etes  vous? 

Have  you  a  pass? — Avez-vous  un  permis? 

You  can't  pass  this  way — Vous  ne  pouvez  pas  passer  par  ici. 

You  must  go  back — II  vous  faut  reculer. 

Where  are  our  quarters? — Ou  sont  nos  logements? 

What  is  your  name? — Comment  vous  appelez-vous? 

My  name  is Je  m'appelle — . 

Are  you  French? — Etes-vous  frangais? 

What  is  your  regiment? — Quel  est  votre  regiment? 

/  belong  to J'appartiens  a — . 

What  is  your  number? — Quel  est  votre  numero? 

My  number  is Mon  numero  est — . 

Can  you  give  me ? — Pouvez-vous  me  donner — ? 

Some  water  to  drink — De  I'eau  a  boire. 

Some  food — Quelque  chose  a  manger. 

Where  can  we  fill  our  water-bottles  (canteens)  ? — Oii  pouvons-nous 

remplir  nos  bidons? 
Where  can  we  get  food? — Oil  pouvons-nous  trouver  a  manger? 
Forage  for  our  horses — A  manger  pour  nos  chevaux. 
Some  water  for  my  horse — De  I'eau  pour  mon  cheval. 
Where  can  we  water  our  horses? — OO  pouvons-nous  faire  boire 

nos  chevaux? 
/  should  like  a  wash — ^Je  voudrais  me  laver. 


EASY   ROAD   TO    FRENCH  241 

ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY  ^ 


Common  Words. 

Afternoon  (This) Cet  apres-midi. 

Army  (An) Une  armee. 

Bandage Un  bandage. 

Bath Un  bain. 

Bayonet Une  baionnette. 

Bed Unlit. 

Blanket Une  couverture. 

Boy Un  gargon. 

Bullet Une  balle. 

Un  pruneau  (soldier  slang). 
Camp Un  camp. 

Un  campement. 

Cartridge _ Une  cartouche. 

Child Un  enfant. 

Une  enfant. 
Cook Un  cuisinier. 

Un  cuistot  (slang). 

Une  couisiniere  (fern.). 
Dance Un  bal. 

Une  danse  (one  dance). 

Dark Obscur. 

Day Un  jour. 

Dead Mort. 

Deserter Un  deserteur. 

Door Une  porte. 

Farm Une  ferme. 

Firearms Des  armes  a  feu. 

Field  gun Une  piece  de  campagne. 

Flag. Un  drapeau. 

Un  etendard  (standard). 

1  This  vocabulary  is  taken  from  the  "Non-Commissioned  OflScers'  Manual, 
U.  S.  Army." 

17 


242       THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Forest Une  foret. 

Un  bo  is  (woods). 

Un  boqueteau  (clump  of  trees) . 
Friend , Un  ami. 

Une  amie. 

Girl Une  jemie  fille. 

Guide Un  guide. 

Gun Un  fusil. 

Halt! Halte! 

Hand Une  main. 

Hat Un  chapeau. 

Un  kepi  (cap). 

Un  casque  (helmet). 

Un  feutre  (campaign  hat). 

Head. La  tete. 

Headquarters Le  quartier  general. 

Horse Un  cheval. 

Literpreter Un  interprete. 

Knife Un  couteau. 

Lake Un  lac. 

Man Un  homme. 

Meat De  la  viande, 

Name Un  nom. 

Night La  nuit. 

Noon Midi. 

Machine  gun Une  mitrailleuse. 

Mess  call La  soupe. 

Password Le  mot  de  passe. 

Pay Le  pr^t  (enlisted  men). 

La  solde  (oflScers). 

Prisoner Un  prisonnier. 

Recruit Une  recrue. 

Un  bleu  (slang). 

Un  bleuet  (slang). 

Un  blanc-bec  (slang). 


EASY  ROAD   TO   FRENCH  243 

Restaurant Un  restaurant. 

Un  cafe. 
Road Un  chemin. 

Une  route. 

Retreat La  retraite.  .  ' 

Reveille Le  reveil.  ,''.  . 

La  diane.  ? 

Saber Un  sabre.  f 

Saddle Une  selle. 

Shelter  tent Une  tente-abri. 

Shoe. .,, Des  chassures  (shoes  in  gen- 
eral). 

Des  souliers  (low  shoes). 

Des  bottines  (high  shoes). 

Des    brodequins     (marching 
shoes). 

Shotgun. Un  fusil  de  chasse. 

Sick Malade. 

Soup. . , Une  soupe. 

Un  potage. 

Spy Un  espion. 

Supper Le  souper. 

Sword Une  6pee. 

Tent Une  tente. 

Numerals 

One Un,  une. 

Two Deux. 

Three Trois. 

Four Quatre. 

Five Cinq  (pronounce  sank). 

Six Six  (pronounce  cease),  i 

Seven Sept  (pronounce  set). 

Eight Huit  (pronounce  weet). 


244       THE   CANTONMENT  MANUAL 

Nine Nenf. 

Ten Dix  (pronounce  deess). 

Eleven Onze. 

Twelve Donze. 

Thirteen Treize. 

Fourteen Quatorze. 

Fifteen Quinze. 

Sixteen Seize. 

Seventeen Dix-sept. 

Eighteen Dix-huit. 

Nineteen Dix-neuf. 

Twenty Vingt  (pronounce  vant). 

Twenty-one Vingt-et-un. 

Thirty Trente. 

Thirty-one Trente-et-un. 

Thirty-two Trente-deux. 

Forty Quarante. 

Fifty Cinquante. 

Sixty Soixante. 

Seventy Soixante-dix. 

Seventy-one Soixante-et-onze. 

Seventy-two Soixante-douze. 

Eighty. . .    Quatre-vingts. 

Eighty-one Quatre- vingt-un. 

Ninety Quatre-vingt-dix. 

Ninety-one Quatre- vingt-onze. 

One  hundred Cent. 

One  hundred  and  one Cent  un. 

Two  hundred Deux  cents. 

Two  hundred  and  one Deux  cent  un. 

One  thousand Mille. 

Two  thousand Deux  mille. 

One  thousand  one  hundred Mille  cent;  onze  cents. 

Thousands  of  soldiers Des  milliers  de  soldats. 


EASY   ROAD   TO    FRENCH  245 

A  million Un  million. 

Two  million  men Deux  millions  d'hommes. 

A  score Une  vingtaine. 

About  forty  men Une  quarantaine  d'hommes. 

Himdreds  of  men Des  centaines  d'hommes. 

Currency,  Measures,  and  Weights 

1  cent Un  sou;  cinq  centimes. 

10  cents Dix  sous;  cinquante  centimes. 

20  cents  (about) Un  franc. 

1  dollar Cinq  francs. 

(The  French  have  gold  pieces  of  10  francs  and  20  francs; 
bank  notes  of  50  francs,  100  francs,  and  higher.  The  gold 
pieces  are  probably  replaced  by  bank  notes  now.) 

1  meter  (1.0936  yards) Un  metre. 

1  kilometer  (0.62138  mile) Un  kilometre. 

Note. — For  all  ordinary  purposes,  the  "kilometre"  =f  of  a  mile;  the  "cen- 
timetre" = -A  of  an  inch. 

1  league  (2.48552  miles) Une  lieue. 

1  hectare  (2.471  acres) Un  hectare. 

1  gram  (15.432  grains  troy) Un  gramme. 

1    kilogram    (2.2046   pounds 

avoirdupois) Un  kilogramme. 

220.46  pounds  avoirdupois Un  quintal;  100  kilos. 

2,204.6  pounds  avoirdupois Une  tonne;  1,000  kilos. 

(Coal  is  sold  by  the  tonne;  grain  and  hay  by  the  quintal.  Dix 
quintaux  de  ble,  de  foin  =  10  quintals  of  grain,  of  hay.) 

1.0567  quart  (liquid) Un  litre. 

26.417  gallons Un  hectolitre. 

0.908  quart  (dry) Un  Htre. 

2.837  bushels Un  hectolitre. 

(The  litre,  which  is  the  principal  unit  of  both  fluid  and  dry 
measures,  is  the  contents  of  1  cubic  d^cimUre  [decimetre  =  xV 
of  a  metre].) 


246       THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Days,  Months,  and  Seasons 

Sunday Dimanche. 

Monday Lundi. 

Tuesday. Mardi. 

Wednesday Mercredi. 

Thursday Jeudi. 

Friday Vendredi. 

Saturday Samedi. 

January Janvier. 

February F6vrier. 

March Mars. 

April Avril. 

May Mai. 

June Juin. 

July Juillet. 

August Aoiit  (pronounce  oo). 

September Septembre. 

October Octobre. 

November Novembre. 

December Decembre. 

The  seasons Les  saisons. 

Winter L'hiver. 

Spring Le  printemps. 

Summer L'^t6. 

Fall L'automne. 

Year Un  an;  une  ann6e. 

Month Un  mois. 

Week Une  semaine. 

Day Un  jour. 

Hour Une  heure. 

Minute Une  minute. 

Second Une  seconde. 


EASY   ROAD    TO    FRENCH  247 

Familiar  Phrases 

Good  morning  (good  afternoon),  Bon  jour,  monsieur,  madame, 
sir,  madam,  miss  mademoiselle. 

Good  evening,  sir Bonsoir,  monsieur. 

Good  night,  sir Bonne  nuit,  monsieur. 

Pardon  me Pardon;  je  vous  demande  par- 
don. 

Don't  mention  it Je  vous  en  prie. 

How  do  you  do? Comment  allez-vous? 

Comment  qsl  va? 

Comment  vous  portez-vous? 
Very  well,  thank  you Tres  bien,  merci. 

Je  vais  bien,  merci. 

Qa  va  bien,  merci. 

Je  me  porte  bien,  mercL 
Do  not  trouble  yourself Ne  vous  genez  pas. 

Ne  vous  derangez  pas. 
I  am  very  glad  to  see  you Je  suis  bien  aise  de  vous  voir. 

Je  suis  content  (heureux)  de 
vous  voir. 

What  time  is  it  ? Quelle  heure  est-il? 

It  is  10  o'clock II  est  dix  heures. 

Take  care;  look  out Prenez  garde. 

Do  not  bother  me Ne  me  derangez  pas. 

Stop  here Arretez-vous  ici. 

Does  Mr.  —  live  here? M.  —  demeure-t-il  ici? 

Come  in Entrez. 

You  are  very  kind Vous  etes  tres  aimable. 

At  what  time  does  the  first  trainA  quelle  heure  part  le  premier 

start?  train? 

What  is  the  name  of  this  station?  Comment  s'appelle  cette  sta^ 

tion  (gare)? 

I  want . . . .  Je  desire. .  Je  veux  (stronger). 

I  do  not  want  it Je  n'en  veux  pas. 


248       THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

Let  me  know  what  I  owe  you . . .  Dites-moi  ce  que  je  vous  dois. 

Are  you  not  mistaken? N'etes-vous  pas  dans  I'erreur? 

Ne  vous  trompez-vous  pas? 

Please  give  me Veuillez  me  donner. 

Move  on Avancez. 

Circulez.     (Policeman.) 
I  want  something  to  eat Je  desire  quelque  chose  a  man- 
ger. 

Where  is  it? Oii  est  ce? 

Go  and  look' for  it AUez  le  chercher. 

Take  this  letter  to  the  post  officePortez  cette  lettre  a  la  poste. 

How  much  is  it? Combien? 

Combien  cela  coute-t-il? 

It  is  dear C'est  cher. 

Thank  you Merci. 

Je  vous  en  remercie. 

Don't  mention  it II  n'y  a  pas  de  quoi. 

De  rien. 
Allow  me  to  present  my  friend — Permettez-moi  de  vous  pre- 
senter mon  ami — . 
I  am  glad  to  make  your  ac-  Je  suis  enchante  de  faire  votre 
quaintance.  connaissance. 

How  far  is  it? A  quelle  distance  est-ce? 

What  can  I  do  for  you? Que  puis-je  faire  pour  vous? 

Do  you  speak  English? Parlez-vous  anglais? 

I  do  not  speak  French  very  well.Je  ne  parle  pas  tres  bien  le 

frangais. 

Where  do  you  come  from? D'ou  venez-vous? 

How  did  you  come? Comment  dtes-vous  venu? 

On  foot,  in  a  carriage,  in  an  A  pied,  en  voiture,  en  auto,  en 
auto,  by  rail,  by  boat,  on  a  chemin  de  fer,  en  bateau,  a 
bicycle,  on  horseback,  in  an  bicyclette,  k  cheval,  en 
aeroplane.  aeroplane. 


EASY   ROAD   TO    FRENCH  249 

Military  Titles,  Ranks,  and  Grades 

General  officers Les  officiers  generaux. 

General  staff L'etat-major  general. 

Field  officers Les  officiers  superieurs. 

Company  officers Les  officiers  subalternes. 

Enlisted  men Les  hommes  de  troupe. 

Noncommissioned  officers Les  sous-officiers. 

Privates Les  simples  soldats. 

Colonel Le    colonel     (addressed     as 

"Mon  colonel"). 

Major Le  commandant  ("Mon  com- 
mandant"). 

Captain Le    capitaine    ("Mon    capi- 

taine"). 
Le  piston  (slang). 

First  lieutenant Le   lieutenant    (en    premier) 

("Mon  lieutenant"). 

Second  lieutenant Le     sous-Ueutenant      ("Mon 

lieutenant"). 

A  doctor Un  (medecin)  major. 

A  sergeant Un    sergent     (addressed    as 

^'Sergent"). 
Un      marechal      des      logis 
(mounted  service). 

A  corporal Un  caporal  ("Caporal"). 

Un  brigadier   (mounted  ser- 
vice). 

A  body  of  troops Une  troupe. 

French  troops Des  troupes  frangaises. 

A  wagoner Un  conducteur. 

Un  fourgonnier.' 

A  horseshoer Un  marechal-f errant. 

A  saddler Un  sellier. 

A  signaler Un  signaleur. 


2  50       THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

A  deserter Un  deserteur. 

A  soldier  of  Infantry Un  f antassin. 

Cavalry Un  cavalier. 

Artillery Un  artilleur. 

Engineers Un  sapeur-mineur. 

Quartermaster  Corps Un  homme  de  I'intendance. 

Signal  Corps Un  homme  du  corps  des  sig- 

naux. 

Hospital  Corps Un  infirmier. 

Line  of  Communications . .  Un  garde  des  voies  et  commu- 
nications, G.  V.  C. 

Infantry L'infanterie. 

Cavalry La  cavalerie. 

Artillery L'artillerie. 

Engineers Le  genie. 

Signal  Corps ! Le  corps  des  signaux. 

Hospital  Corps Le  corps  de  sante. 

Le  service  de  sante. 
Aviation  Corps Le  corps  d'aviation. 

Military  Terms 

The  headquarters Le  quartier  general. 

The  train Le  train  des  equipages. 

Railway  service Le  service  des  chemins  de  fer. 

Telegraph  service Le  service  des  telegraphes. 

Rural  guards La  gendarmerie. 

Des  gendarmes. 

A  paymaster Un  tresorier. 

A  chaplain Un  aum6nier. 

An  army Une  arm6e. 

General  So-and-so's  army L'arm6e — (I'arm^e  Foch). 

An  army  corps Un  corps  d'arm^e, 

A  division Une  division. 

A  brigade Une  brigade. 

V 


EASY  ROAD  TO   FRENCH  251 

A  regiment Un  regiment. 

A  battalion Un  bataillon. 

A  company Une  compagnie. 

A  platoon Un  peloton. 

A  section Une  section. 

A  squad Une  escouade. 

A  detachment Un  detachement. 

Barracks Une  caserne. 

A  camp Un  camp  (more  or  less  per- 
manent). 

Un  campement  (temporary). 

A  cantonment Un  cantonnement. 

Line (Une)  ligne. 

Column (Une)  colonne. 

As  skirmishers En  tirailleurs. 

Follow  me,  as  skirmishers. . A  moi,  en  tirailleurs. 

Scouts Des  eclaireurs. 

A  patrol Une  patrouille. 

The  advance  guard L'avant-garde. 

The  rear  guard L'arriere-garde. 

Flankers Des  flanc-gardes. 

The  main  body Le  gros  (de  la  colonne). 

Combat  train Le  train  de  combat. 

Field  train Le  train  regimentaire. 

Outposts Des  avant-postes. 

Cossack  posts Des  avant-postes  a  la  cosaque. 

A  sentinel Une  sentinelle. 

Un  factionnaire. 
On  post En  faction. 

De  faction. 

Guard  moxmting La  garde  montante  (also  new 

guard). 
The  sentinel  challenges:  "Halt!  La    sentinelle    crie:    "Haltel 
Who's  there?"  Qui  vive?" 


252       THE   CANTONMENT  MANUAL 

The  answer  is:  "France?" La  reponse  est:  "France." 

Advance  with  the  countersign . .  Avance  au  ralliement. 

(The  person  challenged  gives  the  mot  d'ordre,  which  is  the 
name  of  some  general,  and  the  sentinel  replies  with  the  mot  de 
ralliement,  which  is  the  name  of  a  battle  or  a  city). 

Go  away;  you  can't  pass (Passe)  au  large. 

Halt,  or  I  fire Halte,  ou  je  fais  feu. 

Put  down  your  arms Deposez  vos  armes. 

Hands  up! Levez  les  bras. 

Face  about (Faites)  demi-tour. 

Come  here Venez  ici. 

^  A  spy Un  espion. 

A  flag  of  truce Un  drapeau  blanc. 

Un  drapeau  parlementaire. 

Uniform,  Arms,  Clothing,  and  Equipment 

Clothing Les  vetements,  I'habillement. 

Change  your  clothes Changez  de  vetements. 

Overcoat  (worn  by  French  in- 
fantry)  Une  capote. 

Trousers Un  pantalon. 

Breeches Une  culotte. 

Shirt Une  chemise. 

Blouse Un  dolman,  une  vareuse. 

Cap Un  kepi. 

Campaign  hat  (United  States) .  Un  (chapeau  de)  feutre. 

Helmet Un  casque  (de  tranchee) . 

Cap  without  visor  worn  by 
French  ofif  duty Un  bonnet  de  police. 

Tam-o'-shanter  worn  by  Alpine 

chasseurs Un  b6ret. 

Shoes  in  general Des  chaussures. 

Service  shoes Des  brodequins. 

Leggins Des  guetres. 

Wrap  putties Des  bandes  molleti^res. 


EASY   ROAD   TO    FRENCH  253 

Leather  putties Des  houseaux  (or  housseaux). 

Full-dress  uniform La  grande  tenue. 

Dress  uniform La  petite  tenue. 

Field  uniform La  tenue  de  campagne. 

Overcoat  (mounted  men) Un  manteau. 

Overcoat  (oflScers) Un  manteau. 

Un  manteau-capote. 

Fatigue  coat Le  bourgeron. 

Fatigue  trousers  (overalls) Un  pantalon  de  treillis. 

Fatigue  uniform La  tenue  de  corvee. 

Magazine  rifle Un  fusil  a  repetition. 

The  barrel Le  canon. 

The  bolt Le  verrou. 

The  ramrod La  baguette. 

The  butt La  crosse. 

The  gun  sling . .  / La  bretelle. 

The  trigger La  detente. 

Rear  sight La  hausse. 

Front  sight Le  guidon. 

A  bayonet Une  baionnette. 

Rosalie  (slang). 

Ball  cartridge Une  cartouche  a  balle. 

Blank  cartridge Une  cartouche  a  blanc. 

Dummy  cartridge Une  fausse  cartouche. 

Belt Un  ceinturon. 

Cartridge  box Une  cartouchiere. 

First-aid  packet Un  paquet  de  pansement. 

The  pack Le  sac. 

A  haversack Un  etui-musette. 

Canteen Un  bidon. 

Tin  cup Un  quart. 

Mess  can Une  gamelle. 

Equipment L'equipement. 

Compass Une  boussole. 


254       THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Field  glasses Des  jumelles  (de  campagne). 

Whistle Unsifflet. 

Revolver Un  revolver. 

Questions  About  the  Road,  etc. 

Pardon  me,  sir,  do  you  speak  Pardon,     monsieur,     parlez- 

English?  vous  anglais? 

(German,     French,     Italian,  (Allemand,  franfais,  italien, 

Russian.)  russe.) 

All    right,    then    show    me,  Tres  bien,  alors  indiquez-moi, 

please,  the  road  to je  vous  prie,  le  chemin  de 

Is  it  far  from  here?  Est-ce  loin  d'ici? 

How  long  does  it  take  to  go  Combien    de    temps    faut-il 

there?  pour  y  aller? 

How  many  kilometers?  Combien  de  kilometres? 

Is  there  a  short  cut  (road)  ?  Y  a-t-il  un  chemin  de  tra- 
verse? 

Is  there  a  short  cut  (trail)  ?  Y  a-t-il  im  sentier  plus  court? 

Where  does  this  road  go?  Ou  mene  cette  route? 

Are  we  on  the  right  road  to  go  Sommes-nous     sur     le     bon 

to ?  chemin  pour  aller  a ? 

Does  this  road  go  through  Cette   route  passe-t-elle  par 

Compiegne?  Compiegne? 

Shall  we  find  any  villages  on  Trouverons-nous  des  villages 

our  road?  •         sur  notre  chemin? 

Are  there  any  other  roads  go-  Y  a-t-il  d'autres  chemins  pour 

ing  to ?  aller  a ? 

Is  this  road  in  good  condi-  Cette  route  est-elle  en  bon 

tion?  6tat? 

Are  there  hills?  Y  a-t-il  des  c6tes  (des  co- 

teaux)  ? 

Are  they  steep?  Sont-ellcs  raides? 

Does  the   road   go   through  La   route  traverse-t-elle   un 

open  or  wooded  country?  pays  d^couvert  ou  bois6? 


EASY   ROAD  TO    FRENCH 


255 


Can  we  get  through  with  ar- 

tiUery? 
Can    we    get    through    with 

heavily  loaded  wagons  (au- 
to trucks)  ? 
Is  this  road  practicable  for 

artillery? 
Can  infantry  march  on  the 

sides  of  th€  roads? 
Is  the  ground  practicable? 
Is  the  ground  marshy? 
What  is  the  nature  of  the 

ground? 
Does  the  telegraph  line  follow 

this  road  as  far  as  X? 

Where    does    your    railroad 

come  from? 
Where  does  it  go  to? 
Is  it  single  tracked  or  double 

tracked  the  whole  way? 
Where  is  the  station?    Is  it 

far? 
How  can  the  river  be  crossed? 

Is  there  a  bridge?  a  ferry? 
Are  there  fords? 

Can  we  get  boats? 

In  that  wood  are  there  clear- 
ings, ravines,  brooks, 
marshes,  pools? 


Peut-on  passer  avec  de  Tar- 

tillerie  ? 
Peut-on  passer  avec  de  grosses 

voitures  chargees   (avec  de 

camions-automobiles)  ? 
Cette  route  est-elle  praticable 

pour  Tartillerie? 
L'inf  anterie  peut-elle  marcher 

sur  les  c6tes  de  la  route? 
Le  terrain  est-il  practicable? 
Le  terrain  est-il  marecageux? 
Quelle  est  la  nature  du  sol? 

Est-ce  que  la  ligne  telegraphi- 
que  (le  telegraphe)  suit 
cette  route  jusqu'a  X? 

D'ou  vient  votre  chemin  de 
fer? 

Ou  va-t-il? 

Est-il  a  une  voie  ou  a  deux 
voies  sur  tout  le  parcours? 

Ou  est  la  gare?  Est-elle  loin 
d'ici? 

Comment  peut-on  passer  la 
riviere? 

Y  a-t-il  un  pont?  un  bac? 

Y  a-t-il  des  passages  a  gu6 
(des  gues)  ? 

Peut-on  trouver  des  bateaux? 

Dans  ce  bois,  y  a-t-il  des 
clairieres,  des  ravins,  des 
ruisseaux,  des  marais,  des 
mares? 


256       THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 


Are  there  any  places  near  here 
for  watering  horses? 

Is  the  water  good? 

Is  this  water  drinkable? 

Are  there  watering  troughs? 

Where  is  there  good  grass  for 
the  animals? 

Can  we  buy  provisions? 

Is  there  a  field  where  we  can 
camp? 

Can  you  give  me  any  infor- 
mation about  the  enemy? 

Please  find  me  a  guide  who 

knows  the  country. 
We  are  going  to  follow  this 

trail  (tracks). 
Crossroads. 


Y  a-t-il  des  endroits  pres  d'ici 
pour  abreuver  les  chevaux? 

L*eau  est-elle  bonne? 
Est-ce  de  I'eau  potable? 

Y  a-t-il  des  abreuvoirs? 

on  y  a-t-il  de  bonne  herbe 

pour  les  animaux? 
Peut-on  acheter  des  vivres? 

Y  a-t-il  un  champ  ou  nous 
pouvons  camper  (installer 
notre  campement)? 

Pouvez-vous  me  donner  des 
renseignements  sur  I'en- 
nemi? 

Veuillez  me  trouver  un  guide 
qui  connaisse  le  pays. 

Nous  allons  suivre  cette  piste. 

Un  carrefour. 


Towns 

Where  is  the  postoffice  and      Ou  est  le  bureau  des  postes 


telegraph  office? 
The  postmaster. 

The  mail. 

When  was  the  last  mail  dis- 
tributed? 
General  delivery. 
Are    there    any    letters    for 

I  should  like  to  send  a  tele- 
gram. 

Have  you  received  a  telegram 
for ? 


et  telegraphes? 
Le   directeur   des   postes   et 

telegraphes. 
Le  courrier. 
A  quelle  heure  a-t-on  fait  la 

derriere  distribution? 
Poste  restante. 
Y  a-t-il  des  lettres  pour ? 

Je  voudrais  exp6dier  un  iiU- 

gramme. 
Avez-vous     regu     un     t616- 

gramme  (uned6p6che)  pour 


EASY   ROAD   TO    FRENCH  257 

A  telegraph  instrument.  Un  appareil  (telegraphique). 

Can  you  tell  me  where  the  Pourriez-vous  me  dire  ou  se 
mayor's  ofl5ce  is?  trouve  la  mairie? 

I  couldn't  tell  you;  I  am  a  Je  ne  saurais  vous  renseigner; 
stranger  here.  Je  ne  connais  pas  la  ville. 

Good  morning,  sir,  are  you  Bonjour,  Monsieur,  etes-vous 
the  mayor?  le  maire? 

No,  sir,  I  am  his  assistant.         Non,  Monsieur,  je  suis  soa 

adjoint. 

I  should  like  to  speak  to  the  Je  voudrais  parler  au  maire 
mayor  himself.  lui-meme. 

Listen,  sir.  A  detachment  Ecoutez,  monsieur.  Un  de-^ 
will  arrive  here  tomorrow  tachement  arrivera  ici  de- 
morning  at  five  o'clock.  main  matin  a  cinq  heures. 

Can  you  arrange  to  lodge  Pouvez-vous  prendre  des  dis- 
2,000  men  for  two  days?  positions  pour  loger  2,000 

hommes  pendant^deux 
jours? 

A  policeman.  Un  sergent  de  ville,  un  agent 

de  la  paix. 

Railroads 

The  station  agent Le  chef  de  gare. 

The  conductor Le  conducteur. 

The  engineer Le  mecanicien. 

The  fireman Le  chauffeur. 

The  brakeman Le  serre-freins. 

The  telegraph  operator Le  telegraphiste. 

An  engine Une  locomotive. 

Passenger  cars Des  wagons  (de  voyageurs). 

Flat  cars Des  trucks. 

Box  cars Des  wagons  de  marchandises* 

Stock  cars Des  wagons  a  bestiaux. 

An  express  train Un  train  express. 

18 


258       THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

A  through  train Un  train  direct. 

A  local  train Un  train  omnibus. 

A  passenger  train tJn  train  de  voyageurs. 

A  freight  train Un  train  de  marchandises. 

To  entrain  the  troops Embarquer  les  troupes. 

To  detrain  the  troops Debarquer  les  troupes. 

To  get  on  a  train Monter  dans  un  train. 

To  get  ofif  a. train Descendre  d'un  train. 

The  railroad  track La  voie  (ferree). 

A  side  track Une  voie  de  garage. 

A  ticket Un  billet. 

A  round  trip  ticket Un  billet  d'aller  et  retour. 

One  way  only Aller  seulement. 

The  ticket  window Le  guichet. 

At  what  time  does  the  Paris     Le  train  pour  Paris,  a  quelle 
train  start  ?  heure  part-il  ? 

It  is  late  (15  minutes  late) II  est  en  retard   (de  quinze 

minutes). 
Do  we  have  to  change  cars?. .  .Faut-il  changer  de  train? 

The  train  stops Le  train  s'arrete. 

All  aboard! En  voiture! 

The  train  starts Le  train  s'ebranle 

Rations  and  Food 

Salt Du  sel. 

Provisions  (in  general) Les  vivres. 

The  ration La  ration. 

Fresh  beef De  la  viande  fralche. 

Bacon Du  lard. 

Flour De  la  farine. 

Soft  bread Du  pain  f rais. 

Hard  bread  (crackers) Du  biscuit. 

Field  bread Du  pain  de  guerre. 

Com  meal De  la  farine  de  mais. 


EASY   ROAD   TO   FRENCH  259 

Coffee Du  cafe. 

Sugar Du  Sucre. 

Eggs Des  oeufs. 

Chickens Des  poulets. 

Potatoes Des  pommes  de  terre. 

Peas Des  pois. 

String  beans Des  haricots  verts. 

Vegetables  (in  general) Des  legumes. 

An  apple Une  pomme. 

A  pear Une  poire. 

A  cherry Une  cerise. 

A  peach Une  peche. 

Cheese Du  fromage. 

Wine Du  vin. 

Beer De  la  biere. 

A  glass  of  beer Un  bock. 

I  am  hungry J'ai  f aim. 

Bring  me  something  to  eat,      Apportez-moi  quelque  chose  a 

please.  manger,  s'il  vous  plait. 

I  am  thirsty J'ai  soif. 

Please  give   me  a  glass  of     Veuillez  me  donner  un  verre 

water.  d'eau. 

Waiter,  I'll  take  a  beefsteak.      Gargon,  je  desire  un  bifteck. 

Some  black  coffee Du  cafe  noir. 

Coffee  with  milk Du  cafe  au  lait. 

Rolls Des  petits  pains. 

Crescent  rolls Des  croissants. 

Hospitals 

A  field  hospital Une  ambulance. 

A  hospital  (in  general) Un  hopital  (plural:  des  h6pi- 

taux). 

A  dressing  station Un  poste  de  secours. 

A  first-aid  dressing Un  pansement  sommaire. 


26o       THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Red  Cross La  Croix  Rouge 

A  doctor Un  medecin. 

Un  docteur. 

A  surgeon Un  chinirgien. 

A  military  surgeon Un  (medecin)  major. 

Assistant  surgeon Un  aide-major. 

A  male  nurse,  hospital  corps      Un  infirmier. 
man. 

A  female  nurse Une  infirmiere. 

An  ambulance Une  ambulance. 

A  stretcher  (litter) Un  brancard. 

A  Utter  bearer Un  brancardier. 

A  roll  of  bandages Un  rouleau  de  bandage. 

A  first-aid  packet Un  paquet  de  pansement. 

A  wounded  man Un  blesse. 

I  am  sick Je  suis  malade. 

I  have  a  fever J'ai  la  fievre. 

I  have  chills  and  fever J'ai  des  frissons  de  fievre. 

I  am  constipated Je  suis  constipe. 

I  have  diarrhea J'ai  la  diarrh^e. 

Points  of  the  Compass 

North Le  nord. 

South Le  sud. 

East L'est. 

West L'ouest. 

Northeast Le  nord-est. 

Southeast Le  sud-est. 

Northwest Le  nord-ouest. 

Southwest Le  sud-ouest. 

Trench  Warfare 

Trench  warfare La  guerre  aes  tranch^es. 

La  guerre  de  position. 

La  guerre  de  taupe  {moles). 


EASY   ROAD    TO    FRENCH  261 

Trench Une  tranchee. 

Communication  trench Un   boyau    (de   communica- 
tion). 

The  parapet Le  parapet. 

A  loophole Un  creneau. 

Une  meurtriere. 

A  grenade Une  grenade. 

A  grenadier,  bomber Un  grenadier. 

Barbed  wire Du  fil  de  fer  barbele. 

Barbed  wire  entanglement Un  reseau  de  fils  de  fer  bar- 

beles. 
Trench  mortar Un  mortier. 

Un  crapouillaud. 

Minnenwerfer  (German). 

Bomb Une  bombe. 

Howitzer Un  obusier. 

Machine  gun Une  mitrailleuse. 

Field-piece Une  piece  de  campagne. 

75  millimeter  field  gun Une  piece  de  soixante-quinze. 

Siege  gun Une  piece  de  siege. 

120  long Cent  vingt  long. 

120  short Cent  vingt  court. 

77  (German) Soixante-dix-sept  (allemand). 

Shell Un  obus. 

Une  marmite  (slang). 

Un  colis  a  domicile  (slang). 
Shrapnel Un  shrapnell. 

Un  rageur  (slang). 

Periscope Un  periscope. 

Trench  knife Un  couteau  de  tranchee. 

Dugout Un  abri  dans  les  tranchees. 

Un  cagibi  (slang). 

Une  cagna  (slang). 

Un  gourbi  (slang). 

Une  guitoune  (slang). 


262        THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Cammandements        Words  of  Command  (Calls) 

Rassemblement ! Fall  in! 

Garde  a  vous! Attention!  (Shun!) 

Smith,  sortez  des  rangs Smith,  fall  out. 

Autant  {or  Revenez) As  you  were. 

Rompez  les  rangs Dismissed. 

Alignement  (a  gauche,  a  droite, 

alignement) Right,  dress! 

Fixe! Eyes  front! 

Numerotez-vous  (consecutive- 

ment) Count  off. 

Appuyez  a  droite Bear  to  the  right. 

En  avant! Forward! 

Pas  accelere,  marche! Quick  time,  march! 

Pas  gymnastique,  marche! Double  time,  march! 

Suivez! Close  up! 

Changez  le  pas,  marche! Change  step! 

Pas  de  route Route  step  (smoking,  speaking, 

allowed) 

Portez  armes Shoulder  arms. 

Presentez  armes Present  arms. 

Inspection  du  canon  du  fusil . .  Inspection  arms. 

Reposez  armes Order  arms. 

Baionnette  au  canon Fix  bayonets. 

Chargez Charge. 

Remettez  la  baionnette Unfix  bayonets. 

Formez  les  faisceaux Stack  arms. 

Rompez  les  faisceaux Take  arms. 

Par  file  a  droite Right  turn. 

Par  file  a  gauche Left  turn. 

Demi-tour  a  droite Right  about. 

Volte-face About  face. 

Couchez-vous Lie  down. 

Approvisionncz Load  your  magazine. 

Feu Fire. 

Tirez Fire. 

Feu  a  volont6 Fire  at  will. 

Feu  rapide Rapid  fire. 

Cessez  le  feu Cease  firing. 

D^chargez Unload. 


EASY    ROAD    TO    FRENCH  263 

Summons  to  Surrender   Auff orderungen  zur  tJbercage 

Surrender! Ergebet  euch,  ergeben  Sie  sichi 

Throw  down  your  rifles! Gewehre  wegwerfen! 

Hands  up! Hande  hoch! 

Lie  down! Hinlegen! 

Stand  up! Auf! 

Come  on! Kommen  Sie! 

Pass  in  front! Gehen  Sie  voran! 

Halt! Stehen  bleiben! 

Attention! Achtung! 

Quick  march! Vorwarts  marsch! 

Forward! AbmarschierenI 

CONJUGATION 

REGULAR  VERBS 

Regular  verbs  are  divided  into  three  classes^  according  as 
the  present  infinitive  ends  in  -er,  -ir,  -re,  and  are  inflected 
as  follows: 

I  II  m 

Infinitive  Mood 

Present  Present  Present 

donn  er,  to  give.  fin  ir,  to  finish.  romp  re,  to  break. 

Participles 

Present                             Present  Present 

donn  ant,  giving.  fin  iss  ant,  finishing.  romp  ant,  breaking. 

Past                                "   Past  Past 

donn  e,  given.                      fin  i,  finished.  romp  u,  broken. 

Indicative  Mood 

Present  Present  Present 

/  give,  am  giving,  I  finish,  am  finishing,         I  break,  am  breaking, 

etc.  etc.  etc. 

je  donn  e.  je  fin  i  s.  je  romp  s. 

tu  donn  es.  tu  fin  i  s.  tu  romp  s. 

il  donn  e.  il  fin  i  t.  il  romp  t.2 

nous  donn  ons.  nous  fin  iss  ons.  nous  romp  ons. 

vous  donn  ez.  vous  fin  iss  ez.  vous  romp  ez. 

lis  donn  ent.  ils  fin  iss  ent.  ils  romp  ent. 

1  See  page  271  for  verbs  ending  in  -oir,  which,  in  some  grammars,  form  the  third 
conjugation,  verbs  in  -re  forming  the  fourth. 

*A11  other  regular  verbs  in  this  conjugation  drop  the  ending,  -/. 


264       THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 


I^^PERFBCT 

/  was  giving,  used 
to  give,  etc. 
je  donn  ais. 
tu  donn  ais. 
il  donn  ait. 
nous  donn  ions, 
vous  donn  iez. 
ils  donn  aient. 

Past  Definite 
/  gave,  etc. 
je  donn  ai. 
tu  donn  as. 
il  donn  a. 
nous  donn  &mes. 
vous  donn  fites. 
ils  donn  drent. 

Future 

J  shall  give,  etc. 

je  donner  ai. 

tu  donner  as. 

il  donner  a. 

noxis  donner  ons. 

vous  donner  ez. 

ils  donner  ont. 

Conditional 
I  should  give,  etc. 

je  donner  ais. 

tu  donner  ais. 
il  donner  ait. 
nous  donner  ions, 
■vous  donner  iez. 

ils  donner  aient. 


Imperfect 
/  was  finishing,  used 
to  finish,  etc. 
je  fin  iss  ais. 
tu  fin  iss  ais. 
il  fin  iss  ait. 
cous  fin  iss  ions, 
vous  fin  iss  iez. 
ils  fin  iss  aient. 

Past  Definite 

/  finished,  etc. 

je  fin  is. 

tu  fin  is. 

il  fin  it. 

nous  fin  imes. 

vous  fin  ites. 

ils  fin  irent. 

Future 
/  shall  finish,  etc. 
je  finir  ai. 
tu  finir  as. 
il  finir  a. 
nous  finir  ons. 
vous  finir  ez. 
ils  finir  ont 

Conditional 
/  should  finish,  etc. 

je  finir  ais. 

tu  finir  ais. 
il  finir  ait. 
nous  finir  ions, 
vous  finir  iez. 

ils  finir  aient. 


Imperfect 
/  was  breaking,  used 
to  break,  etc. 
je  romp  ais. 
tu  romp  ais. 
il  romp  ait. 
nous  romp  ions. 
vous  romp  iez. 
ils  romp  aient. 

Past  Definite 

/  broke,  etc. 

je  romp  is. 

tu  romp  is. 

il  romp  it 
nous  romp  imes. 
vous  romp  ites. 

ils  romp  irent 

Future 

/  shaU  break,  etc. 

je  rompr  ai. 

tu  rompr  as. 

il  rompr  a. 

nous  rompr  ons. 

vous  rompr  ez. 

ils  rompr  ont 

Conditional 
/  should  break,  etc. 

je  rompr  ais. 

tu  rompr  ais. 
il  rompr  ait. 
nous  rompr  ions, 
vous  rompr  iez. 

ils  rompr  aient 


Present 
Give,  etc. 
donn  tA 
<qu'il  donn  c.) 
donn  on*, 
donn  ez. 
(qu'ils  donn  ent) 


Imperative  Mood 

Present 
Finish,  etc. 
finis, 
(qu'il  fin  iss  e.) 
fin  iss  ons. 
fin  iss  ez. 
(qu'ils  fin  iss  ent) 


Present 
Break,  etc. 
romp  s. 
(qu'il  romp  e.) 
romp  ons. 
romp  ez. 
(qu'ils  romp  eat) 


a  This  form  becomes  'donn  ea'  when  followed  by  -7  or  -en. 


EASY   ROAD   TO    FRENCH 


265 


Present 

{That)  I  (may)  give, 

etc. 

(que)  je  donn  e. 

(que)  tu  donn  es. 

(qu')  il  donn  e. 

(que)  nous  donn  ions. 

(que)  vous  donn  iez. 

(qu')  ils  donn  ent. 

Imperfect 

(.That)  I  (.might)  give, 
etc. 

(que)  je  donn  asse. 

(que)  tu  donn  asses, 
(qu')  il  donn  at. 
(que)  nous  donn  assions. 
(que)  vous  donn  assiez. 

(qu')  ils  donn  assent. 


Subjunctive  Mood 

Present 
{That)  I  (may)  finish, 


etc. 

(que)  je  fin  iss  e. 

(que)  tu  fin  iss  es. 

(qu')  U  fin  iss  e. 

(que)  nous  fin  iss  ions. 

(que)  vous  fin  iss  iez. 

(qu')  ils  fin  iss  ent. 

Imperfect 

(That)  I  (might)  finish, 
etc. 

(que)  je  fin  isse. 

(que)  tu  fin  isses. 
(qu')  il  fin  it. 
(que)  nous  fin  issions. 
(que)  vous  fin  issiez. 

(qu')  ils  fin  issent. 


Present 

(That)  I  (may)  break, 

etc. 

(que)  je  romp  e. 

(que)  tu  romp  es. 

(qu')  il  romp  e. 

(que)  nous  romp  ions. 

(que)  vous  romp  iez. 

(qu')  ils  romp  ent 

Imperfect 

(That)  I  (might)  break, 
etc. 

(que)  je  romp  isse. 

(que)  tu  romp  isses. 
(qu')  il  romp  it. 
(que)  nous  romp  issions. 
(que)  vous  romp  issiez. 

(qu')  ils  romp  issent. 


AUXILIARY  VERBS 

The  two  auxiliary  verbs  avoir,  'to  have,'  and  §tre,  'to  be/ 
are  conjugated  in  their  simple  tenses  as  follows: 

Infinitive 

Pres.  avoir,  to  have.  Pres.  gtre,  to  he. 

Participles 


Pres.  ayant,  having. 
Past,  eu,  had. 


Present 
/  have,  am  having,  etc. 
j'ai.  nous  avons. 

vous  avez. 


Pres.  6tant,  being. 
Past.  6t6,  been. 


Indicative 


tu  as. 
Ua. 


ils  ont. 


Imperfect 
/  had,  was  having,  etc. 
j'avais.        nous  avions. 

tu  avals.        vous  aviez. 

il  avait.  ils  avaient. 


Present 
/  am,  am  being,  etc. 
je  suis.  nous  sommes. 

tu  es.  vous  etes. 

il  est.  ils  sont. 

Imperfect 

I  was,  was  being,  etc. 

j'6tais.         nous  6tions. 

tu  6tais.         vous  6tiez. 

il  6tait.  ils  ^talent. 


2  66       THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 


Past  Definite 

Past  Definite 

/  had,  etc. 

/  was,  etc. 

j'eus.           nous  eAmes. 

je  fus.            nous  fiknes. 

tu  evis.           vous  eutes. 

tu  fus,            vous  futes. 

a  eut.                ils  eurent. 

il  fut.                Us  furent. 

Future 

Future 

/  shaU  have,  etc. 

I  shall  be,  etc. 

j'aurai.         nous  aurons. 

je  serai.         nous  serons. 

tu  auras.        vous  aurez. 

tu  seras.         vous  serez. 

il  aura.             ils  auront. 

il  sera.               ils  seront. 

Conditional 
/  should  have,  etc. 
j'aurais.       nous  aurions. 
tu  aurais.       vous  auriez. 
il  aurait.  ils  auraient. 


Conditional 
/  should  be,  etc. 
je  serais.        nous  serions. 
tu  serais.        vous  seriez. 
il  serait.  ils  seraient. 


Imperative 

Present 
Have,  etc. 

ayons. 
aie.                          ayez.                          sois. 
(qu'il  ait.)            (qu'ils  aient.)             (qu'U  soit.) 

Present 
Be,  etc. 

soyons. 

soyez. 
(qu'ils  soient.) 

Subjunctive 

Present 
{That)  I  {may)  have,  etc. 
(que)  j*aie.         (que)  nous  ayons, 
(que)  tu  aies.       (que)  vous  ayez. 
(qu')  il  ait.  (qu')  ils  aient. 

Imperfect 
(That)  I  {might)  have,  etc. 
(que)  j'eusse.     (que)  nous  eussions. 
(que)  tu  exisses.    (que)  vous  eussiez. 
(qu*)  il  edt.  (qu')  ils  eussent. 


Present 
{That)  I  {may)  be.  eU. 
(que)  je  sois.       (que)  nous  soyons. 
(que)  tu  sois.       (que)  vous  soyez. 
(qu')  il  soit.  (qu')  ils  soient. 

Imperfect 
{That)  I  {might)  be,  etc. 
(que)  je  fusse.     (que)  nous  fussions. 
(que)  tu  fusses,    (que)  vous  fussiez. 
(qu*)  il  fit.  (qu')  ils  fussent. 


COMPOUND  TENSES 

Compound  tenses  are  formed  from  the  past  participle  of 
the  principal  verb  by  using  an  auxiliary  verb  (usually  avoir, 
sometimes  etre). 

Avoir  Etre 

Infinitive 


Perfect 
To  have  given 
avoir  dcmn6. 


Perfect 
To  have  arrived. 
Atre  arriv6(e)(8). 


EASY   ROAD   TO   FRENCH 


267 


Participle 


Perfect 

Having  given. 
ay  ant  donn6. 


Perfect 

Having  arrived. 

6tant  arriv6(e)(s). 


Indicative 


Past  Indefinite 
/  have  given,  etc. 

j'ai  donn6. 

tu  as  donn6. 

etc. 

Pluperfect 

I  had  given,  etc. 

j 'avals  donn6. 

etc. 

Past  Anterior 

/  had  given,  etc. 

j'eus  donn6. 

etc. 

Future  Anterior 

/  shall  have  given,  etc. 

j'atirai  donn6. 

etc. 

Conditional  Anterior 

/  should  have  given,  etc. 

j'aurais  donn6. 

etc. 


Past  Indefinite 

I  have  arrived,  etc. 

je  suis  arriv6(e). 

tu  es  arriv6(e). 

etc. 

Pnn»ERFECT 

/  had  arrived,  etc. 

j'6tais  arriv6(e). 

etc. 

Past  Anterior 

/  had  arrived,  etc. 

je  fus  arriv6(e). 

etc. 

Future  Anterior 

/  shall  have  arrived,  etc. 

je  serai  amv6(e). 

etc. 

Conditional  Anterior 

/  should  have  arrived,  etc. 

je  serais  arriv6(e). 

etc. 


Subjunctive 


Perfect 

{That)  I  (may)  have  given,  etc. 

(que)  j'aie  donn6. 

etc. 

Pluperfect 

{That)  I  (.might)  have  given,  etc. 

(que)  j'eusse  donn6. 

etc. 


Perfect 

(That)  I  (may)  have  arrived,  etc. 

que  je  sois  aiTiv6(e). 

etc. 

Pluperfect 

(That)  I  (might)  have  arrived,  etc, 

(que)  je  fusse  arriv6(e). 

etc. 


268       THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

FORMATION  OP  TENSES 

(Very  Important) 

Principal  Parts. — The  various  tenses  of  all  regular  verbs 
and  of  most  irregular  verbs  are  formed  from  five  forms  of 
the  verb,  called  primary  tenses: 

The  Infinitive  gives  the  Future  by  adding  -ai,  -as,  -a, 
-ons,  -ez,  -ont,  and  the  Conditional  by  adding  -ais,  -ais, 
-ait,  -ions,  -iez,  -aient — dropping  the  final  infinitive  -e  of 
the  third  conjugation  for  both  tenses. 

The  Present  Participle  gives  the  Imperfect  Indicative  by 
changing  -ant  into  -ais,  -ais,  -ait,  -ions,  -iez,  -aient, 
and  the  Present  Subjunctive  by  changing  -ant  into  -e,  -es, 
-6,  -ions,  -iez,  -ent. 

The  Past  Participle  gives  the  Compound  Tenses,  with  the 
auxiliary  avoir  or  6tre,  and  the  Passive,  with  the  auxiliary 
fttre. 

The  Present  Indicative  gives  the  Imperative  by  dropping 
the  pronoun  subject  of  the  second  singular  and  first  and 
second  plural,  the  -S  of  the  first  conjugation  second  singular 
also  being  dropped,  except  before  y  and  en. 

The  Past  Definite  gives  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  by  chang- 
ing the  final  letter  of  the  first  singular  (-i  or  -s)  into  -sse, 
-sses,  -t,  -ssions,  -ssiez,  -ssent,  and  putting  a  circumflex 
accent  over  the  last  vowel  of  the  third  singular. 

IMPORTANT  IRREGULAR  VERBS 

Aller,  'to  go* 

Infinitive  aller;  fut.  irai,  iras,  ira,  etc.;  condl.  irais,  etc. 

Pres.  Part,  allant;  impf  indie,  allais,  etc.;  pres.  subj. 
aille,  allies,  aille,  allions,  alliez,  aillent. 

Past  Part.  all6;  past  indef.  je  suis  all6,  etc. 

Pres.  Indie,  vais,  vas,  va,  allons,  allez,  vent;  impve.  va, 
allons,  allez. 


EASY   ROAD   TO    FRENCH  269 

Past  Def.  allai,  alias,  alia,  allames,  allates,  allerent;  impf. 
suhj.  allasse,  allasses,  allat,  allassions,  allassiez,  allassent. 

Venir,  'to  come' 

Infinitive,  venir;  Jut.  viendrai,  viendras,  etc.;  condl.  vien- 
drais,  etc. 

Pres.  Part,  venant;  impf.  indie,  venais,  etc.;  pres.  subj, 
vienne,  viennes,  vienne,  venions,  veniez,  viennent. 

Past  Part,  venu;  past  indef.  Je  suis  venu,  etc. 

Pres.  Indie,  viens,  viens,  vient,  venons,  venez,  viennent; 
impve.  viens,  venons,  venez. 

Past  Def.  vins,  vins,  vint,  vinmes,  vintes,  vinrent;  impf. 
suhj.  vinsse,  vinsses,  vint,  vinssions,  vinssiez,  vinssent. 

Connaltre,  'to  know,'  etc. 

Infinitive,  connaitre;  fut.  connaitrai,  etc.;  condl.  con- 
naitrais,  etc. 

Pres.  Part,  connaissant;  impf.  indie,  connaissais,  etc.; 
pres.  suhj.  connaisse,  connaisses,  connaisse,  connaissions,  con- 
naissiez,  connaissent. 

Past  Part,  connu;  j'ai  connu,  etc. 

Pres.  Indie,  connais,  connais,  connait,  connaissons,  con- 
naissez,  connaissent;  impve.  connais,  connaissons,  connaissez. 

Past  Def.  connus,  connus,  connut,  connumes,  conntites, 
connurent;  impf.  suhj.  connusse,  connusses,  connut,  connus- 
sions,  connussiez,  connussent. 

Dire,  'to  say,'  'tell' 

Infinitive,  dire;  fut.  dirai,  etc.;  condl.  dirais,  etc. 

Pres.  Part,  disant;  impf.  indie,  disais,  etc.;  pres.  subj, 
dise,  discs,  dise,  disions,  disiez,  disent. 

Past  Part,  dit;   past  indef.  j'ai  dit,  etc. 

Pres.  Indie,  dis,  dis,  dit,  disons,  dites,  disent;  impve.  dis, 
disons,  dites. 


2  70        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Past  Def.  dis,  dis,  dit,  dimes,  dites,  dirent;  impf.  subj. 
disse,  disses,  dit,  dissions,  dissiez,  dissent. 

Like  dire : 

contredire,  contradict.  m6dire  (de),  slander.  prMire,  predict. 

d6dire,  retract,  deny.  redire,  say  again. 

The  2d  plur.  pres.  indie,  and  impve.  is:  Contredisez,  d6disez,  etc. 

Faire,  *to  do'  'make' 

Infinitive,  faire;  fut.  ferai,  etc.;  condl.  ferais,  etc. 

Pres.  Part,  faisant;  impf.  indie,  faisais,  etc.;  pres.  subj. 
fasse,  f asses,  fasse,  fassions,  fassiez,  f assent. 

Past  Part,  fait;   past  indef.  j'ai  fait,  etc. 

Pres.  Indie,  fais,  fais,  fait,  faisons,  faites,  font;  impve. 
fais,  faisons,  faites. 

Past  Def.  fis,  fis,  fit,  fimes,  fites,  firent;  impf.  subj.  fisse, 
fisses,  fit,  fissions,  fissiez,  fissent. 

Mettre,  'to  place,'  'put' 

Infinitive,  mettre;  fut.  mettrai,  etc.;  condl.  mettrais,  etc. 

Pres.  Part,  mettant;  impf.  indie,  mettais,  etc.;  pres.  subj. 
mette,"  mettes,  mette,  mettions,  mettiez,  mettent. 

Past  Part,  mis;   past  indef.  j'ai  mis,  etc. 

Pres.  Indie,  mets,  mets,  met,  mettons,  mettez,  mettent; 
impve.  mets,  mettons,  mettez. 

Past  Def.  mis,  mis,  mit,  mimes,  mites,  mirent;  impf.  subj, 
misse,  misses,  mit,  missions,  missiez,  missent. 

Like  mettre : 

se  mettre.  begin.  d6mettre,  dismiss.  promettre,  promise. 

admcttre,  admit.  6mettre,  emit.  remettre,  ptU  back,  hand  to. 

commettre.  commit.  s'entremettre,  interpose,  repromettre,  promise  again. 

compromettrc,  com-  omettre,  omit.  soumettre,  submit, 

promise.  permettre,  permit.  transmettre,  transmit. 

Prendre,  'to  take' 

Infinitive,  prendre;  fut.  prendrai,  etc.;  condl.  prendrais, 
etc. 


EASY   ROAD   TO    FRENCH  271 

Pres.  Part,  prenant;  impf.  indie,  prenais,  etc.;  pres.  suhj, 
prenne,  prennes,  prenne,  prenions,  preniez,  prennent. 

Past  Part,  pris;   past  indef.  j'ai  pris,  etc. 

Pres.  Indie,  prends,  prends,  prend,  prenons,  prenez,  pren- 
nent;  impve.  prends,  prenons,  prenez. 

Past  Def.  pris,  pris,  prit,  primes,  prites,  prirent;  impf, 
suhj.  prisse,  prisses,  prit,  prissions,  prissiez,  prissent. 

Suivre,  'to  follow* 

Infinitive.  SUivre;  Jut.  suivrai,  etc.;  condl.  suivrais,  etc. 

Pres.  Part,  suivant;  impf.  indie,  suivais,  etc.;  pres.  suhj, 
suive,  suives,  suive,  suivions,  suiviez,  suivent. 

Past  Part,  suivi;  past  indef.  j'ai  suivi,  etc. 

Pres.  Indie,  suis,  suis,  suit,  suivons,  suivez,  suivent; 
impve.  suis,  suivons,  suivez. 

Past  Def.  suivis,  suivis,  suivit,  suivimes,  suivites,  suivirent; 
impf.  suhj.  suivisse,  suivisses,  suivit,  suivissions,  suivissiez, 
suivissent. 

Irregular  Verbs  in  -oir 

Verbs  in  -oir,  which  are  all  irregular,  form,  in  some  gram- 
mars, a  separate  conjugation,  the  third,  verbs  in  -re  being 
the  fourth. 

Recevoir,  'to  receive' 

Infinitive,  recevoir;  fut.  recevrai,  etc.;  condl.  recevrais, 
etc. 

Pres.  Part,  recevant;  impf.  indie,  recevais,  etc.;  pres. 
suhj.  regoive,  regoives,  regoive,  recevions,  receviez,  refoivent. 

Past  Part,  regu;   past  indef.  j'ai  regu,  etc. 

Pres.  Indie,  regois,  regois,  regoit,  recevons,  recevez,  regoi- 
vent;   impve.  regois,  recevons,  recevez. 

Past  Def.  reQUS,  regus,  regut,  regtimes,  regiites,  regurent; 
impf.  suhj.  'regusse,  regusses,  regut,  regussions,  regussiez, 
regussent. 


272        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Devoir,  'to  owe' 

Infinitive,  devoir;  fut.  devrai,  etc.;  condl.  devrais,  etc. 

Pres.  Part,  devant;  impf.  indie,  devais,  etc.;  pres.  suhj. 
doive,  doives,  doive,  devions,  deviez,  doivent. 

Past  Part.  dCl  (f.  due,  pi.  du(e)s);   past  indef.  j'ai  dd,  etc. 

Pres.  Indie,  dois,  dois,  doit,  devons,  devez,  doivent; 
impve. . 

Past  Def.  dus,  dus,  dut,  dumes,  diltes,  durent;  impf.  suhj. 
dusse,  dusses,  diit,  dussions,  dussiez,  dussent. 

Note — ^Devoir  follows  the  recevoir  model,  but,,  as  its  forms  present  some 
difiBctUty,  they  have  been  given  in  full. 

Pouvoir,  'to  be  able,'  etc. 

Infinitive,  pouvoir;  fut.  pourrai,  etc.;  condl.  pourrais,  etc. 

Pres.  Part,  pouvant;  impf .  indie,  pouysiis,  etc.;  pres.  suhj. 
puisse,  puisses,  puisse,  puissions,  puissiez,  puissent. 

Past  Part,  pu;    past  indef.  j'ai  pu. 

Pres.  Itidie.  puis  or  peux,  peux,  peut,  pouvons,  pouvez, 
peuvent;  impve. . 

Past  Def.  pus,  pus,  put,  pAmes,  pdtes,  parent;  impf.  suhj, 
pusse,  pusses,  pdt,  pussions,  pussiez,  pussent. 

Savoir,  'to  know,'  etc. 

Infinitive,  savoir;  fut.  saurai,  etc.;  condl.  saurais,  etc. 

Pres.  Part,  sachant;  impf.  indie,  savais,  etc.;  pres.  suhj. 
sache,  saches,  sache,  sachions,  sachiez,  sachent. 

Past  Part.  SU;   past  indef.  j'ai  su,  etc. 

Pres.  Indie,  sais  [se],  sais,  sait,  savons,  savez,  savent; 
impve.  sache,  sachons,  sachez. 

Past  Def.  SUS,  sus,  sut,  sdmes,  siltes,  surent;  impf.  suhj. 
susse,  susses,  sdt,  sussions,  sussiez,  sussent. 

Voir,  'to  see' 
Infinitive,  voir;  fut.  verrai,  etc.;  condl.  verrais,  etc. 
Pres.  Part,  voyant;   impf.  indie,  voyais,  etc.;   pres.  suhj. 
voie,  voies,  voie,  voyions,  voyiez,  voient. 


EASY   ROAD   TO    FRENCH  273 

Past  Part,  vu;  past  indef.  j'ai  vu,  etc. 

Pres.  Indie,  vois,  vois,  voit,  voyons,  voyez,  voient;  impve. 
vols,  voyons,  voyez. 

Past  Def.  vis,  vis,  vit,  vimes,  vites,  virent;  impf.  subj.  visse, 
visses,  vit,  vissions,  vissiez,  vissent. 

Vouloir,  'to  will/  etc. 

Infinitive,  vouloir ;  fut.  voudrai,  etc. ;  eondl.  voudrais,  etc. 

Pres.  Part,  voulant;  impf.  indie,  voulais,  etc.;  pres.  subj. 
veuille,  veuilles,  veuille,  voulions,  vouliez,  veuillent. 

Past  Part,  voulu;  past  indef.  j'ai  voulu,  etc. 

Pres.  Indie,  veux,  veux,  veut,  voulons,  voulez,  voulent; 
impve.  veux,  voulons,  voulez. 

Past  Def.  voulus,  voulus,  voulut,  voulumes,  voulutes, 
voulurent;  impf.  subj.  voulusse,  voulusses,  voulut,  voulus- 
sions,  voulussiez,  voulussent. 

veuillez  = 'have  the  kindness  to'  usually  serves  as  second 
plural  imperative. 


19 


APPENDIX 
Definitions 

Alignment:  A  straight  line  upon  which  several  elements 
are  formed,  or  are  to  be  formed;  or  the  dressing  of 
several  elements  upon  a  straight  line. 

Base:  The  element  on  which  a  movement  is  regulated. 

Battle  sight:  The  position  of  the  rear  sight  when  the 
leaf  is  laid  down. 

Center:  The  middle  point  or  element  of  a  command. 

Column:  A  formation  in  which  the  elements  are  placed 
one  behind  another. 

Cores  in  file:  To  file  oneself  directly  behind  the  man 
in  front. 

Deploy:  To  extend  the  front.  In  general  to  change  from 
column  to  line,  or  from  close  order  to  extend  order. 

Depth:  The  space  from  head  to  rear  of  any  formation, 
including  the  leading  and  rear  elements.  The  depth 
of  a  man  is  assumed  to  be  12  inches. 

Distance:  Space  between  elements  in  the  direction  of 
depth.  Distance  is  measured  from  the  back  of  the 
man  in  front  to  the  breast  of  the  man  in  rear.  The 
distance  between  ranks  is  40  inches  in  both  line  and 
column.  To  judge  this  distance,  remember  that  it 
is  three  inches  less  than  the  length  of  your  rifle. 

Echelon:  A  formation  in  which  the  subdivisions  are 
placed  behind  one  another,  extending  beyond  and 
unmasking  one  another  either  wholly  or  in  part,  as 

A  Co. 

B  Co. 

C  Co. 

D  Co. 

274 


APPENDIX  275 

Element:  A  file,  squad,  platoon,  company,  or  larger  body, 
forming  part  of  a  still  larger  body. 

File:  Two  men,  the  front-rank  man  and  the  correspond- 
ing man  of  the  rear  rank.  The  front-rank  man  is 
the  file  leader.  A  file  which  has  no  rear-rank  man  is 
a  blank  file.  The  term  file  appHes  also  to  a  single 
man  in  a  single-rank  formation. 

File  closers:  Such  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers 
of  a  company  as  are  posted  in  rear  of  the  Hne.  For 
convenience,  all  men  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers. 

Flank:  The  right  or  left  of  a  command  in  line  or  in 
column;  also  the  element  on  the  right  or  left  of  the 
line. 

Formation:  Arrangement  of  the  elements  of  a  command. 
The  placing  of  all  fractions  in  their  order  in  line,  in 
column,  or  for  battle. 

Front:  The  space,  in  width,  occupied  by  an  element, 
either  in  line  or  in  column.  The  front  of  a  man  is 
assumed  to  be  22  inches.  Front  also  denotes  the 
direction  of  the  enemy. 

Guide:  An  officer,  noncommissioned  officer,  or  private 
upon  whom  the  command  or  elements  thereof  regu- 
late its  march. 

Head:  The  leading  element  of  a  column. 

Interval:  Space  between  elements  of  the  same  line.  The 
interval  between  men  in  ranks  is  4  inches  and  is 
measured  from  elbow  to  elbow.  Between  companies, 
squads,  etc.,  it  is  measured  from  the  left  elbow  of 
the  left  man  or  guide  of  the  group  on  the  right,  to 
the  right  elbow  of  the  right  man  or  guide  of  the 
group  on  the  left. 

Left:  The  left  extremity  or  element  of  a  body  of  troops. 


2  76       THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

Line:  A  formation  in  which  the  different  elements  are 

abreast  of  each  other. 
Order,  close:  The  formation  in  which  the  units,  in  double 

rank,  are  arranged  in  line  or  in  column  with  normal 

intervals  and  distances. 
Order,  extended:  The  formation  in  which  the  units  are 

separated  by  intervals  greater  than  in  close  order. 
Pace:  Thirty  inches;  the  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick 

time. 
Parole:  A  promise  given  on  one's  faith  and  honor  not 

to  do  or  to  do  a  certain  thing. 
Patrol:  A  body  of  men  sent  out  to  reconnoitre  or  to 

guard  against  surprise. 
Platoon:  Not  less  than  two  squads  nor  more  than  four. 
Point  of  rest:  The  point  at  which  a  formation  begins. 

Specifically,  the  point  toward  which  units  are  aligned 

in  successive  movements. 
Rank:  A  line  of  men  placed  side  by  side. 
Right:  The  right   extremity  or  element  of  a  body  of 

troops. 
A  safe  guard:  A  detachment  of  soldiers  posted  or  de- 
tached by  a  commander  of  troops  for  the  purpose 

of  protecting  some  person  or  persons  or  a  particular 

village,  building,  or  other  property. 
Forcing  a  safe  guard:  To  break  past  a  safe  guard. 
Squad:  A  corporal  and  seven  privates. 

Slang  in  the  Army 

"Doughboy" — The  infantryman. 

"Holy  Joe"— The  chaplain. 

"French  leave"— (A.  W.  O.  L.)  Absent  without  leave. 


APPENDIX  277 

"Rookie" — A  new  recruit. 

"Top" — Top  sergeant.    First  sergeant. 

"Q.  M." — Quartermaster. 

"Come  and  get  it" — Mess  is  ready. 

"K.  O." — The  commanding  officer. 

"Sand  rat" — The  man  on  duty  in  the  rifle  pit  at  target 
practice. 

"On  the  carpet"  or  "High  jump" — Being  brought  before 
the  commanding  officer  for  some  offense. 

"Bunkie" — The  soldier  who  shares  the  shelter  tent  with 
you.  (Bunkies  always  look  after  each  other's  prop- 
erty when  either  is  absent.) 

"Canned  Willie" — Canned  corned  beef. 

"Papoose" — The  carry  pack. 

"O.  D."— Olive  drab. 

"Canary" — A  mosquito. 

"Jarheads"  or  "hardtails" — Army  mules. 

"Gold  fish"— Salmon. 

"Pup"  tent— Shelter  tent. 

FORM  OF  A  MILITARY  LETTER 

Station 

Date 

From:  Sergeant  John  Marsh 

To:  The  Adjutant-General  of  the  Army 

(Through  Military  Channels). 

Subject:  Request  for  transfer. 

I.  The  undersigned  hereby  applies  for  a  transfer  from 
The  Signal  Corps  to  the  Aviation  Section,  Signal  Corps. 

John  Marsh. 


278       THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

FORM    FOR    LAST    WILL    AND    TESTAMENT 

Last  Will  and  Testament 
of 


/,    

of 

do  make,  publish,  and  declare  this  my  last  will  and 
testament. 

I  give,  devise,  and  bequeath  to^ 

1  Here  insert  specific  legacies  and  devises. 


And  I  do  give,  devise,  and  bequeath  all  the  rest  and 
residue  of  my  estate,  both  real  and  personal,  to 


heirs  and  assigns  forever,^ 

2If  the  residue  of  the  estate  is  given  to  several  persons,  add 
here  the  manner  in  which  it  is  to  be  divided,  as  "in  equal 
shares  as  tenants  in  common." 


APPENDIX                             279 
/  hereby  appoint 


executor 


of  this  my  last  will  and  testament^  and  I  desire  that 

shall  not  be  required  to  give  bond  for  the  performance  of 
the  said  duties  of  that  office. 


Witness  my  hand  this 


s  If  the  will  is  made  in  Nevada,  or  if  the  testator  has  real 
estate  in  that  State,  he  should  affix  his  seal. 

day  of. . : ,  191 

Signed,  published,  and  declared  by 


the  above-named  testator,  as  and  for  his  last  will  and 
testament,  in  the  presence  of  us,  who,  at  his  request  and 
in  his  presence,  and  in  the  presence  of  each  other,  have 
subscribed  our  names  as  witnesses  thereto.^ 

*  If  the  will  is  made  in  Louisiana,  unless  it  is  wholly  in 
the  handwriting  of  the  testator,  there  should  be  seven  wit- 
nesses and  a  notary  at  the  "seaHng  up."  If  wholly  in  his 
handwriting  no  formalities  are  required. 


Residence ; 
Residence : 
Residence 


28o        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

INFANTRY  DIVISION 

Make-up  Under  War  Conditions 

Each  Infantry  Division  will  now  comprise: 

Organization  Number 

OF  Men 

One  division  headquarters 164 

One  machine  gun  battahon  of  four  companies 768 

Two  infantry  brigades,  each  composed  of  two  infan- 
try regiments  and  one  machine  gun  battalion  of 

three  companies 16,420 

One  field  artillery  brigade,  composed  of  three  field 
artillery  regiments,  and  one  trench  mortar  bat- 
tery   5,068 

One  field  signal  battalion 262 

One  regiment  of  engineers 1,666 

One  train  headquarters  and  mihtary  police 337 

One  ammunition  train 962 

One  supply  train 472 

One  engineer  train 84 

One  sanitary  train,  composed  of  four  field  hospital 

companies  and  four  ambulance  companies 949 

Total 27,152 

Under  the  new  plans  an  infantry  regiment  comprising  103 
officers  and  3,652  men,  will  be  made  up  as  follows: 

Organization  Number 

OF  Men 

One  headquarters  and  headquarters  company 303 

Three  battalions  of  four  rifle  companies  each 3,078 

One  supply  company 140 

One  machine  gun  company 178 

One  medical  detachment 56 

Total 3,755 

Each  rifle  company  has  a  strength  of  250  men  and  6  officers: 
I  captain,  2  first  lieutenants,  and  3  second  lieutenants.  It 
is  composed  of  a  company  headquarters  and  4  platoons. 


APPENDIX  281 

'  The  machine  gun  company  has  6  officers  and  172  men.  It 
consists  of  the  headquarters  and  3  platoons.  Its  armament 
is  1 2  machine  guns  of  heavy  type  and  4  spare  guns. 

MILITARY  BADGES   OR  SERVICE  RIBBONS 

The  little  strips  of  parti-colored  ribbon  worn  by  soldiers  on 
their  left  breasts,  each  of  a  prescribed  length  of  one  and  three- 
eighth  inches,  are  Army  service  ribbons,  each  ribbon  having 
its  own  particular  significance.  The  strips  are  symbols  stand- 
ing for  medals  and  campaign  badges  which  the  bearer  is  en- 
titled to  wear.  There  are  ten  of  these  honors  recognized  by 
the  Army.  Two  are  medals  of  honor,  one  a  certificate  of 
merit,  and  the  other  badges  of  campaigns.  It  would  be  im- 
practical for  the  possessor  to  wear  medals  and  badges  on  his 
service  uniform  and  so  he  wears  the  little  ribbon  symbol 
instead.     The  ribbons  are  as  follows: 

Congressional  Medal  of  Honor — White  stars  on  a  field 
of  light  blue  silk.  This  medal  is  awarded  only  by  Congress 
for  some  particular  deed  of  gallantry  in  action. 

Certificate  of  Merit  Badge — Two  red,  white  and  blue 
bands  separated  by  a  thin  band  of  white,  the  blue  being  outer- 
most.    This  honor  is  conferred  by  the  President. 

Philippines  Congressional  Medal — Blue  band  in  center 
flanked  by  stripes  of  white,  red,  white  and  blue,  the  blue 
on  the  outermost  edges  of  the  ribbon.  This  ribbon  is  worn 
by  those  men  who  stayed  in  the  service  after  the  close  of 
the  Spanish- American  War  to  put  down  the  Philippine 
insurrection. 

Civil  War — Campaign  ribbon  of  equal  sized  bands  of  blue 
and  gray. 

Indian  Wars — Bright  red,  with  narrow  edges  of  deeper 
red. 

Spanish  Campaign — Alternating  stripes  of  yellow  and  blue. 

Philippine  Campaign — Blue  band  in  center,  flanked  by 
narrower  bands  of  red,  blue  edges. 

Cuban  Occupation  (time  of  Spanish  War  and  several 
years  thereafter) — Blue  in  center,  flanked  by  narrow  stripes, 
then  broader  red  stripes,  and  finally  blue  borders. 

Cuban  Pacification  (indicating  service  in  Cuba  from 
1 906-1 909,  when  the  United  States  straightened  out  govern- 
mental affairs  for  the  new  Republic) — Broad  olive-drab  cen- 


282       THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

ter,  flanked  by  three  narrow  stripes  of  red,  white  and  blue, 
the  red  on  the  outermost  edges. 

China  Campaign  (indicating  service  in  the  march  to  Pek- 
ing)— Broad  band  of  yellow  with  narrow  borders  of  blue. 

Ribbons  for  gallantry  in  action  are  worn  farthest  to  the 
left,  followed  by  campaign  ribbons  in  chronological  order. 

MILITARY  MAIL 

The  proper  manner  of  addressing  mail  to  soldiers  in  the 
Regular  Army,  National  Guard,  and  the  National  Army,  is 
as  follows: 

Regular  Army: 
Private  John  Smith, 

Company  A,  22nd  Infantry, 

Camp  Jay,  Governor's  Island, 

New  York. 

National  Guard: 
Private  John  Smith, 

Company  B,  165th  Infantry  (69th  N.  Y.), 

Camp  Mills,  Mineola, 

New  York. 

National  Army: 
Private  John  Smith, 

Company  C,  310th  Infantry  (N.  J.), 

Camp  Dix,  Wrightstown, 

New  Jersey. 
Note — ^The  designation  of  regiments  of  the  National  Guard 
will  show  in  parenthesis  their  present  State  designations,  as, 
for  example,  "Co.  B,  165th  Infantry  (69th  N.  Y.)." 

The  designation  of  regiments  of  the  National  Army  will 
show  in  parenthesis  the  State  from  which  each  organization, 
or  the  bulk  of  it,  was  drawn,  as,  for  example,  "Co.  C,  310th 
Infantry  (N.  J.)." 

The  War  Department  has  adopted  the  following  system  of 
numbering  the  regiments:  Regular  Army,  i  to  100;  Na- 
tional Guard,  10 i  to  300;  National  Army,  301  up. 

The  attention  of  correspondents  is  directed  to  the  importance 
of  addressing  mail  in  the  manner  described  and  of  having  each 


APPENDIX  283 

letter  and  parcel  bear  the  address  of  the  sender.  Insured, 
C.  O.  D.,  and  registered  letters  or  parcels  which  are  not 
properly  addressed  and  do  not  bear  a  return  address  of  sender 
will  not  be  accepted  for  mailing. 

Postal  employees  will  assist  relatives  and  friends  in  pre- 
paring and  properly  addressing  mail  for  soldiers.  Unless 
addressed  to  Company  and  Regiment,  mail  will  be  delayed 
and  probably  returned  to  writer  as  undeliverable. 

CANTONMENTS  AND  MOBILIZATION  CAMPS 

The  following  is  a  list  of  National  Army  Cantonments  and 
National  Guard  mobilization  camps,  showing  the  official 
designation  of  the  camp,  the  name  of  the  post  office  to  which 
the  military  branch  handling  the  mail  for  the  camp  is 
attached,  the  line  of  railroad,  the  R.  R.  station,  and  the 
States  from  which  the  troops  will  be  sent. 


National  Guard  Camps 


Name  of  Camp 
AND  Address 

Nearest 
City 

Railroad 

R.  R.  Station 

States 

Camp  Mills,  Min- 

New  York 

L.  L 

Country  LUe  Press 

RainbowDivision 

eola,  L.  L,  N.  Y. 

(severalStates) 
Maine 
New  Hampshire 

Camp  Greene, 

CharIotte,N.C. 

Southern 

Camp  Greene, 

Vermont 

N.  C 

N.  C. 

Massachusetts 
Rhode  Island 
Connecticut 

CampWadsworth, 

Spartanburg, 

Southern, 
Piedmont  & 
Northern 

Calvert,  S.  C 

New  York 

Calvert,  S.  Q. 

S.  C. 

Camp  Hancock, 
Wheless,  Ga. 

Augusta,  Ga. 

Georgia  R.R. 

Wheless,  Ga. 

Pennsylvania 

New  Jersey 

Virginia 

Camp  McClellan, 

AnnistoD,  Ala. 

Southern 

Camp  McClellan, 

Mar>'land 

Ala. 

Ala. 

Delaware 

Dist.  of  Columbia 

Tennessee 

Camp  Sevier,  Ala. 

Greenville, 

Southern,    P. 

Paris,  S.  C. 

North  Carolina 

S.  C. 

&  N.  Elec. 

South  Carolina 

Camp  Wheeler, 

Macon,  Ga. 

Macon,  Dub- 

Camp Wheeler. 

Georgia 

Paris,  S.  C. 

lin  &  Sav. 

Ga.(M.D.&  S.) 

Alabama 
Florida 

Camp  Mar  Arthur, 

Waco,  Tex. 

St.  L.  &  S.  W. 

Camp  MacArthur, 

Michigan 
1  Wisconsin 

Ga- 

Tex. 

Camp  Logan,  Tex. 

Houston,  Tex. 

M.  K.  &  T., 
S.  P. 

Camp  Logan,  Tex. 

lUinois 

Minnesota 

Iowa 

Camp  Cody,  Tex. 

■^■Sk 

S.  P.,  A.  T.  & 

Camp  Cody, 

Nebraska 

S.  F. 

N.  Mex. 

North  Dakota 

South  DakoU 

Camp   Doniphan, 

Lawton,  Okla. 

C.  R.  L  &  P., 

Camp    Doniphan, 

Missouri 

N.  Mex. 

FriscoLines 

Ft.  Sill,  Okla. 

Kansas 

Camp  Bowie, 

Fort  Worth,'! 

Tex.  &  Pac. 

Camp  Bowie,  Tex. 

Texas 

Ft.  Sill.  Okla. 

Tex. 

FriscoLines 

Oklahoma 

Camp  Sheridan, 

Montgomery, 

S.  A.  L..  W. 

Camp  Sheridan, 

Ohio 

West  Virginia 

Tex.,    Vandiver 
Park.  Ala. 

Ala. 

R.  of  Ala.. 
C.  of  Ga. 

Vandiver  Park. 
Ala. 

Camp  Shelby.  Ala. 

Hattiesburg, 

Miss.  Cent. 

Camp  Shelby, 

Indiana 

Miss. 

Miss. 

Kentucky 

Camp  Beauregard, 

Alexandria, 

Tioga&South- 

Camp  Beauregard, 

Louisiana 

Mus. 

La. 

ern   (Log 
road) 

La. 

Mississippi 
Arkansas 
California 
Nevada 

Camp  Kearney, 

San  Diego, 

A.  T.  &  S.  F. 

Camp  Kearney, 

Utah 

La. 

CaL 

Colorado 

Arizona 

New  Mexico 

Washington 

Oregon 

CamD  Fremont, 

San  Francisco, 

So.  Pac. 

Menlo  Park,  Cal. 

MonUna 

Cal. 

Idaho 

Wyoming 

284 


National  Army  Cantonments 


Name  of  Camp 
AND  p.  0.  Address 

Nearest  City 

Railroad 

States 

Maine 

New  Hampshire 

Camp  Devens,  Mass. 

Fitchburg,  Mass. 

B.&M. 

Vermont 
Massachusetts 
Rhode  Island 
[Connecticut 

Camp  Upton,  L.   L, 

Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 

L.  L 

Metropolitan  portion  of 
New  York,  N.  Y. 

New  York 

Camp  Dix,  Wrights- 
town,  N.  J. 

Trenton,  N.  J. 

Penna.  R.  R. 

New  York  State 
Northern  Pennsylvania 
Southern  Pennsylvania 

Camp  Meade,  Md. 

Baltimore,  Md. 

Penna.,  B.  &  0., 

Maryland 

W.  B.  &  A. 

District  of  Columbia 
New  Jersey 

Camp  Lee,  Va. 

Petersburg,  Va. 

N.  &W. 

Virginia 
Delaware 

Camp  Jackson,  S.  C. 

Columbia,  S.  C. 

S.  &L.,A.  C.  L., 

Tennessee 

Southern 

North  Carolina 
South  Carolina 
Georgia 

Camp  Gordon,  Cham- 

Atlanta,  Ga. 

Southern 

Alabama 

blee,  Ga. 

Florida 

Camp  Sherman,  Ohio 

Chillicothe,  Ohio 

B.&O. 

/Ohio 
West  Virginia 

Camp  Taylor, 

Louisville,  Ky. 

Southern 

Indiana 

Dumesnil,  Ky. 

Kentucky 

Camp  Custer,  Mich. 

Battle  Creek,  Mich. 

Mich.  Cent., 

Michigan 

G.  T. 

\  Wisconsin 

Camp  Grant,  LI. 

Rockford,  ni. 

C.  B.  &  Q. 

Illinois 
Arkansas 

Camp  Pike,  Ark. 

LitUe  Rock,  Ark. 

Mo.Pac 

Louisiana  ^ 
Mississippi  ' 
Minnesota 

Camp  Dodge,  la. 

Des  Moines,  la. 

Steam  Train  over 

Iowa 

Electric     from 

Nebraska 

Des  Moines 

North  Dakota 
South  Dakota 
Kansas 

Camp  Funston, 

Junction  City,  Kan. 

U.P. 

Missouri 

Ft.  Riley,  Kan. 

Colorado 
Texas 

Camp  Travis, 

San  Antonio,  Tex. 

M.  K.  &  T.,  G. 

Arizona 

San  Antonio,  Tex. 

H.  &  San  A. 

New  Mexico 

Oklahoma 

Washington 

Oregon 

California 

Camp  Lewis,  Ameri- 

Tacoma, Wash. 

N.  P. 

Nevada 
Utah 

can  Lake,  Wash. 

Idaho 

Montana 

Wyoming 

285 


286       THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 
ARMY  INSIGNIA 

In  the  U.  S.  Army  there  are  pertain  insignia  or  ornaments 
by  which  you  can  tell  the  rank  and  branch  of  the  service  to 
which  a  man  belongs. 

The  following  are  some  of  the  insignia  you  should  know: 


II  U.  S.  Shield  (Offi- 
cers' Garrison 
Caps). 


4  Coast  Artillery. 


12  Dental  Corps. 


13  Veterinary  Corps. 


$ 

t 


5  Engineer  Corps. 


6  Signal  Corps. 

7  Aviation  Section 
of  Signal  Corps. 

8  Ordnance  Depart- 
ment. 


9  Quartermaster's 
Corps. 


xo  Medical  Corps. 


14  General  Staflf. 


IS  Adjutant    Gener- 
al's Department 


16  Inspector    Gener- 
al's Department 

17  Judge  Advocate 
General's  De- 
partment. 


18  Philippine  Scouts. 


APPENDIX 


287 


19  Recruiting       Ser- 
vice. 


20  Service  School  De- 
tachments. 


21  U.  S.  Disciplinary 
Barracks. 


PlMiHiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiininiT 


i^^^a^ 


22  General  Csil- 

i"iiiii"""iiii™  ver  star^/. 


3jmiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii(B 


m 


ijIniiiiiiiiiMiiiiiii iiiiiniiiim 


IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII 


mm 

mnl 


iiiiiimiiiiiiiiimnq 


^^ 


iiiHiiiiiiiiM iiiiiniiiiiiifa 


23  Lieutenant 

General  (sil- 
ver star). 

24  Major     Gen- 

eral   (silver 
star). 

25  Brigadier 

General  (sil- 
ver star), 

26  Colonel  (sil- 

ver eagle). 

27  Lieutenant 

Colonel  (sil- 
ver leaves) 

28  Major     (gold 

leaves). 

29  Captain  (sil- 

ver bars). 


»  »|      30  First    Lieu- 

i  il=  tenant  (sil- 


I'liiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii 


iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii 


iiiiiiiiiimiiiiiiDB 


31  Second  Lieu- 
tenant. 


32  Chaplain. 


33  Nurse. 


34  Regimental     Ser- 
geant Major. 


35  Regimental    Sup- 
ply Sergeant. 


36  Battalion  and 
Squadron  Ser- 
geant Major. 


37  Color  Sergeant. 


38  First  Sergeant. 


288       THE    CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

l^^l       39  Supply  Sergeant. 


40  Stable  Sergeant! 

A 

41  Sergeant. 

A 

42  Corporal. 

A, 

43  Lance  Corporal. 

45  For  all  enlisted 
men,  except  avi- 
ation mechanics 
and  enlisted  avi- 
ators. 


m 


46  Aviation 
Mecha- 
nicians. 


47  Junior  Military 
Aviator. 

^48   Mili- 

i>^^       taryAvi- 
i^  ator. 

49  Regular  U.  S.  Of- 
ficer. 


44  Enlisted  Aviator. 


tyitMo    '°  \cer.''"'"'  °'' 


$1  U.     S.     National 
Guard  Officer. 


APPENDIX  289 

Hat  Cords 

All  Officers  wear  on  the  service  hat  a  gold  and  black  hat 
cord  with  gold  acorns.     On  the  garrison  cap,  all  officers  wear 
a  bronze  national  seal. 
Infantry — Hat  cord  for  enlisted  men  is  light  blue. 

Emblem:     Crossed  rifles. 
Cavalry — Hat  cord  for  enlisted  men  is  yellow. 

Emblem:     Crossed  swords. 
Artillery — Hat  cord  for  enlisted  men  is  red. 

Emblem:     Crossed  cannon. 
Signal  Corps — Hat  cord  for  enlisted  men  is  a  combination  of 
orange  piped  with  white. 

Emblem:     Crossed  signal  flags. 
Engineers — Hat  cord  for  enlisted  men  is  red  piped  with 
white. 
Emblem:    Double  turreted  castle. 
Medical  Corps — Hat  cord  for  enlisted  men  is  maroon  piped 
with  white. 
Emblem:     A  caduceus. 
Ordnance  Corps — Hat  cord  for  enlisted  men  is  black  and 
red. 
Emblem:    A  bomb  with  a  flare  of  flame. 
Quartermaster's  Corps — Hat  cord  for  enlisted  men  is  a 
salmon  shade  of  buff. 
Emblem:    A  wheel  surmounted  by  an  eagle  with  crossed 
key  and  sword. 
Note — To  know  an  officer,  look  at  his  hat  cord.    If  this 
is  gold  and  black  he  is  an  officer.     If  he  wears  a  cap,  the 
national  seal  shows  that  he  is  an  officer.     While  officers  wear 
leather  puttees,  enlisted  men  in  many  branches,  as  the  cavalry 
and  signal  corps,  also  wear  leather  puttees.     All  officers  wear 
a  brown  braid  on  the  sleeves  of  the  blouse. 

The  Overcoat  of  an  officer  does  not  have  a  cuff.  A  Second- 
Lieutenant  wears  no  braid  on  the  overcoat  sleeve;  a  first 
Lieutenant  wears  one  knot  of  black  braid;  a  Captain  two 
knots  of  black  braid;  a  Major  three  knots  of  black  braid, 
and  so  on,  adding  one  knot  for  each  higher  grade. 


APPENDIX 


291 


BUGLE  CALLS 


T»  F^irstCau* 


^ 


^ 


^^ 


/^ 


2.  Guard  Mounting. 


^i(;]b 


292        THE   CANTONMENT   MANUAL 

5.    Drill- 


Quick. 


¥ 


— 4~-w- 


IK         0JL4.W 


^^^S 


^1^1^ 


& 


Moderate* 


9.  Assembly. 


tu  To  THE  Color. 


^,  f  LJ|   r,f  j,;-|f  "f  l.# 


AJL 


APPENDIX 


293 


15.   Reveille. 


Quich 


^^^^m^ 


End. 


I 


>»i    >»     I 


e=ts=e 


tr%i^m 


D.Cf. 


iti^i^nc 


=?=^p: 


:^F^ 


U^U-P^ 


s 


16.  Retreat. 


3Toderaie. 


^^^^^^m 


==qw 


:*=?: 


^^ 


a:-u 


21 


294        THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 

RLTREAT— Concluded, 


m 


r-rff 


^^ 


p— * 


zz: 


I 


^m 


i=)ct 


t=S:J 


^EIS 


^^^^^^^m 


^rf 


g^ 


.# — * 


lii,  r  '  ir  u-ig==Sg^ 


I 


r=^;=p 


^ 


i 


APPENDIX 


295 


I 


Qukh. 


e3L 


I 


BUGLE  CALLS. 
17.   Tattoo. 


5i=t 


m 


■0 #  •  0  4—^ 


jgp^?^^^ 


itzifzit 


#         0'  4   0      0- 


I 


^ 


^ 


"JT^^jT^ir^ 


I 


S 


^^^ 


p3=Fg^---j^-^^^^^^=^=F^ 


-!»-^- 


=F=rr= 


^^ 


# 


t 


=^ 


296        THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 


BUGLE  CALLS. 
Tattoo— Continwd, 

,0     9  •  9  9. 


^^^=^-^  J  n  ir  {Tfju^. 


APPENDIX 


297 


Tattoo— CdwcZttdeA 


[fjtij'r  uri-^-i-j=--j3^ 


liQr. 


^:S^ 


^^^^ 


^^^^ 


^ h 


zi-jj  rsr  r-^ 


298  THE    CANTONMENT    MANUAL 


^ 


BUGLE  CALLS. 

18.  Call  to  Quarters. 


m 


OL 


P-fi'Pii^S 


yTrT^r^*4^ 


-ta^ 


i 


/?\   /:n   /IS 


F — ^-i — P--i ^ — t     •  I  — \—    ^-     + 


i 


19.   Taps. 


ij,..°?-i:.  r^ip.^^^^ 


i^^ 


M  j'  rrir  > 


20.   Mess. 


Qteielfe. 


^  r  ^  r- 

!      I      !      I 


T    r-^  ,  )TT-r:r-i — »- 


:n=t 


n  ^  - 


^ 


APPENDIX 
21.   Sick. 


299 


m 


Quich 


■^-r^ 


P"*^   't^ 


1— V 


^?1f-^^^ 


rrp: 


22.     CHURCH. 


'S-       ^ 


Si??'^^ 


:5c; 


'^-IT 


— J- 


^S 


* 


4t-#- 


/rv      i 


_^_^H — ^L-^ — ^^ ^_|_tf _«., — «_< J    J    J     I    ^  -i»^ — t--; — ^ 


J=:^ 


23.   Recall. 


^ 


JfoeferofiJ.^,,^ 


#^ 


4-fA4. 


^ 


^=S 


28.  Fatigue, 


i 


^•cJfe. 


0     yi^P   ^ 


S 


INDEX 


About  face,  25 
Absent  without  leave,  198 
Advance,  the,  85 
by  succession  of  thin  lines. 

Advice  to  riflemen,  178 
Advising    or    aiding    another 

to  desert,   198 
Aiming,  172 
Alertness,  2 
Alignments,  40,  (iy 
Ambition,  3 
Arm  signals,  122 
Arms,  manual  of,  29 

inspection,  29,  2i7 

left  shoulder,  34 

present,  32,  34 

port,  zi,  34 

order,  31,   32,  35 

right  shoulder,  29,  2>Z^  34 

stack,  44 

trail,   35 

take,  45 
Army   insignia,   286-288 
Arrest  or  confinement  of  ac- 
cused persons,  200 
Arrest    of    deserter    by    civil 

authorities,  212 
Articles  of  War,  194 
As  you  were,  16 
Assaulting    or    willfully   dis- 
obeying a  superior  of- 
ficer, 199 
Assembly,  52,  85,  89 


At  ease,  78,  79 
Attention,     position     of     the 
soldier  at,  23 

Back  step,  27 

Badges    or    service    ribbons, 

military,  281 
Battle  sight,  173 
Bayonet,   charge,  37 

fix,  z^ 

unfix,  36 
Broken  bone,  218 
Bugle  calls,  291 

Calling  the  shot,  177 
Camps,   mobilization,   list  of, 

283,  284 
Cantonment  life,  simple  rules 

for,  6 
Cantonments,  list  of,  283,  285 
Captain,  67 

Captured  property,  204 
Cease  firing,  128 
Change  step,  march,  28 
Cheerfulness,  2 
Classes   of   firing,   95 
Cleanliness,  2 
Cleanliness  in  camp,  193 
Clip  fire,  58 
Close  order,  65 
Clothing,  care  of,  184 
Cock  fight,  II 
Code,  semaphore,  131-132 


301 


302 


INDEX 


Color,  the,  no 

manual  of  the,   II2 

to  receive  the,  II2 
Color  guard,  no 
Column  right,  yz 
Command,  19,  21 

preparatory,  21 

of   execution,    121 
Company,  acting  alone,  93 

to  dismiss  the,  67 

to  form  the,  66 

inspection,   100 

right,  68,  69,  70 

size  of,  280 

school  of  the,  61,  62 

in  support,  92 
Comradeship,  2 
Conduct   unbecoming  an   of- 
ficer    and     gentleman, 
210 
Conical  wall  tent,  118 
Coordination,  178 
Corporal,  to  follow  the,  50 
Countersigns,  155 
Count  off,  40,  61 
Courage,  i 

Courtesy,    military,    3 
Court-martial,  214 
Cover,  the  use  of,  59 
Cuts  and  wounds.  216 


Dealing  in  captured  or  aban- 
doned property,  204 

Definitions,   274 

Delivery  of  offender  to  civil 
authorities,   202 

Deploy,    squad    as    skirmish- 
ers, 89 

Deployment,  82 

rules  for   (company),  81 

Desertion,  i9iB 


Detachment,  64 

Determination,   i 

Disciplining,  powers  of  com- 
manding officer,  210 

Disrespect  toward  superior 
officer,  199 

Disrespect  toward  President, 
etc,  199 

Distance,  to  take,  44 

Division,  infantry,  280 

Double  time,  26 

Dress,  right,  40 

Drill,  infantry,  12 

Drills  and  formations,  gen- 
eral rules  for,  14 

Drowned,  restoring  the  ap- 
parently, 220 

Drunk  on   duty,   206 

Dueling,  207 

Enlistment,  without  dis- 
charge, 196 

fraudulent,  196 
Entertaining  a  deserter,    198 
Equipment,  care  of,  184 

cloth,  186 
Exercises,   arm,  9 

body,   10 

leg,   10 

setting-up,  9 
Exhaustion,  219 
Extended  order,  81 
Eyes,    right,    front,    etc.,   24 

Face,  about,  25 

to,  in  marching,  24 
Facings,  24 
Fainting,  219 
False  returns,   197 
File  closers,  65 
Fire,  93 


INDEX 


30s 


Fire,  at  will,  57 

by   clip,  58 
Fire    attack,    90 
Fire  control,  97 
Fire  direction,  96 
Fire   discipline,  98 
Firing,    to    suspend,    58 

to  cease,  58 

classes  of,  95 
Firing  position,  175 
Firings  and  loadings,  53 
First-aid    suggestions,    216 
First  sergeant,  66 
Flag     signals,     conventional, 

130 
Flank,   to   march  by  the,   28 
Forcing  a  safeguard,  204 
Formations   and    drills,    gen- 
eral rules  for,    14 
Fixed  pivot,  to  turn  on,  68 
Frauds    against    the    govern- 
ment,  208 
Fraudulent  enlistment,  196 
Freezing,   220 
French,   easy  road  to,   225 

adjectives,  229 

adverbs,  229 

arms,  252 

articles,    226 

auxiliary  rules,  265 

clothing,  252 

commandements,    262 

common  phrases,  232 

common  words,  241 

compound  tenses,  266 

conjugation,  263 

correspondence,  235 

currency,   244 

days,  246 

directions,    237 

disjunctive    personal     pro- 
nouns, 229 


dress,  235 

drink,  234 

equipment,  252 

familiar  phrases,  247 

food,  234,  258 

formation  of  tenses,  268 

hospitals,  259 

important    irregular    rules, 

268 
"learn  these  by  heart,"  230 
measures,  234 
military,  grades,  249 

ranks,  249 

terms,  250 

titles,  249 
months,  246 
numerals,  243 
"on  the  road,"  238 
places,    237 
plurals,  228 

points  of  the  compass,  260 
pronouns,  227 
pronunciation,  225 
questions,  228 

about  the  road,  254 
railroads,   257 
rations,  258 
requests,  22,3 
seasons,  246 
smoke,  234 
telegraph,  235 
toilet,  235 
towns,  256 
trench  warfare,  260 
uniform,  252 
utensils,    22,6 
weights,  234 
Front  into  line,  76 
Frost  bite,  220 

General  articles.  210 


304 


INDEX 


General  orders,  for  sentinels, 

210 

German    (summons    to    sur- 
render in),  263 
Good  order  to  be  maintained 
and  wrongs  redressed, 
206,  207 
Guard,  sergeant  of,  133 

corporal  of,  137 

privates  of,  144 
Guard  duty,  interior,  133 
Guard  mounting,   158 

formal,  158 

informal,  164 
Guarding   prisoners,    157 
Guide,  16 

right,  41 
Guides,    company,    65 

platoons,  65 

Half    step,    the,    27 
Halt,  to,  28 

Hand,  position  of,  in  dress- 
ing, 40 

salute  with  the,  25 
Hat    cords,    289 
Health,  a  few  hints  on,  190 

of  the  soldier,  190 
Hike,  when  on  a,  7 
Honors  and  salutes,   106 

Improper    use     of     counter- 
sign, 204 
Infantry   drill,    12 

division,  280 
Initiative,  2 

Injuries  to  persons  or  prop- 
erty, redress  of,  211 
In  place  halt,   15 
Insignia,   army,   286-288 
Inspection,  arms,  29,  y? 

company,  100 


Inspections  and  muster,  100 

Insubordinate  conduct  to- 
ward noncommis- 
sioned   officer,   199 

Interior  guard  duty,   133 

Interval,  to  take,  41 

Intervals,  to  increase  or  di- 
minish, 52 

Intimidation  of  persons 
bringing  provisions, 
206 

Investigation  of  and  action 
on  charges,  201 

Junior  officer  salutes  first, 
106 

Kaiser,  ten  "Be's"  that  will 

beat  the,  8 
Kneel,   to,  52 

Last     will     and     testament, 

form  of,  278 
Left  face,  24 
Left    shoulder   arms,    34 
Letter,    form   of   a   military, 

V7 
Lieutenants,  61,  67 
Lie  down,  to,  52 
Load,  to,  54 

Loadings  and   firings,   53 
Loyalty,  3 

Mail,    military,    how    to    ad- 
dress, 282 
Manual   of  arms,  29 
execution    of,    31 
rules  governing  the,  30 
March,  when  on  a,  7 
Mark  time,  to,  27 
Marksmanship,      preliminary 
training  in,  169 


INDEX 


30s 


Maximum  and  minimum 
punishments,  215 

Mess  kit,  care  of,  186 

Mifitary    courtesy,    3 

Military  law,  persons  sub- 
ject to,  195 

Military  letter,   form  of,  ^Tj 

Military  property,  willful  or 
negligent  loss,  damage 
or  wrongful  disposi- 
tion of,  205 

Misbehavior,  before  the  ene- 
my, 203 
of  sentinel,   206 

Moving  pivot,  to  turn  on,  46, 

n 

Musicians,  161,  165,   166 
Muster,  company,  104 
Muster    rolls — false    muster, 

196 
Murder,  207 
Mutiny  or  sedition,  200 
failure  to  suppress,  200 


Noncommissianed  officer 

commanding,     position 
of,  133 

Oath   of   enlistment,   213 
Obedience,    i 
Oblique,   march,  46 

right,  46 
Observation,  60 
Officer,    definition    of,    194 

making     unlawful     enlist- 
ment, 196 
On  right  into  line,  75,  *](> 
Order,  close,  65 
Order  arms   standing,    posi- 
tion of,  31,  3a 


Orders,  20 
general,    for   sentinels,    145 
special,  for  sentinels,  153 

Pack,  closed,  103 

open,    103 
Parade    rest,    without    arms, 

with  arms,  34 
Paroles     and     countersigns, 

155 
Personal   interest  in  sale  of 

provisions,    206 
Persons    subject    to    military 

law,  19s 
Platoon  columns,  86^  87 
Platoons,  63 
right,  69,  70,  71 »  72 
columns  right,   74 
Pointers    for    care    of    rifle, 

189 
Poncho,     to    make    sleeping 

bag  of,  116 
Port  arms,  32,  34 
Position  of  the  soldier,  23 
Present  arms,   32,  34 
Provoking    speeches   or   ges- 
tures, 207 
Punishment,  214 
maximum    and    minimum, 

215 
Pyramidal    tent,    method    of 
folding,  119 

Quick  time,  26 
Quarrels,     frays,     disorders, 
200 

Ranges,   close,  etc.,  94 
Rape,  207 

Rear,  to  march  to  the,  28 
Recruits,  helpful  hints  for,  4 


3o6 


INDEX 


Refusal  to  receive  prisoners; 

202 

Releasing    prisoners    without 
proper   authority,    202 

Relieving  the  old  guard,  165 

Relieving,  corresponding 

with  or  aiding  the  ene- 
my, 205 

Report  of  prisoners  received, 
202 

Rests,   the,   23 

Resume  march,  16 

Rifle,  care  of,   184 
parts  of,  187,  188 

Rifle  salute,  35 

Rifle  or  piece,  rules  govern- 
ing the  carrying  of,  32 

Right,  give  way  to  the,  16 

Right  by  file,  79 

Right   by   twos,   79,  80 

Right  dress,  40 

Right  face,  24 

Right  front  into  line,  76,  TJ 

Right  half  face,  24 

Right  oblique,  46 

Right  shoulder  arms,  29,  33, 
34 

Right  turn,  46,  47,  yz 

Rise,    if    kneeling    or    lying 
down,  53 

Route  step,  78 

Rush,  by  platoon,  etc.,  90 

Salute,  with  hand,  25 

with  rifle,  35 
Sanitation  and  cleanliness  in 

camp,   193 
Schaefer   method,    220 
School  of  the  company,  61, 62 
School    of   the   soldier,   22 
School  of  the  squad,  38 


Selling  military  property,  205 
Semaphore  code,  131-132 
Sentinels,     orders    for,     144, 

145 
Sergeant,  first,  66 
Setting-up  exercises,  9 
Shelter  tents,  114 

to  strike,  116 
Shoes,  care  of,  185 
Side  step,  27 
Sight,   adjustment,   169 

corrections,  table  of,  171 

to  set  the,  56 
Signals,   arm,   122 

conventional  flag,   130 
Signals  and  codes,  129 
Signals  and  signaling,   122 
Skirmishers,  squad  to  deploy, 

51 
company  as,  82 
company    to    deploy    from 

column  of  squads,  83, 

84 
to  deploy  as,  from  platoon 
or  squad  columns,  89 
Slang  in  the  army,  276 
Sleeping  bag,  to  make  out  of 
poncho,  116 
double,    116 
single,  116 
Small-arms  firing,  course  in, 

181 
Soldier,  definition  of,  194 
characteristics  of  a  good,  r 
health  of,  190 
position  of,  23 
school  of  the,  22 
Soldiers,  to  make  good  time 
lost,  212 
separated    from    the    serv- 
ice, 2ii 
Spies,  205 


INDEX 


307 


Squads 
columns,  87,  88 
consists  of,  38 
to    deploy    as    skirmishers, 

89 

to  dismiss  the,  2t7 

to  form  the,  40 

halt,   28 

right,  48,  49 

right  about,  50,  74 

school  of  the,  38 
Squads  right,  72,  y^ 

column  right,  74 

platoons,   column  right,  74 
Stack  arms,  44 
Step,  back,  27 

change,  28 

length  of,  25 

side,  27 

the  half,  27 
Steps  and  marchings,  25 
Strike  tents,  to,   118 
Subordinates  compelling 

commander  to   surren- 
der, 204 
Sunstroke,  219 
Suspend  firing,  58 

Take  arms,  45 
Take  interval,  41 
Target,   the,   95 
Target   practice,    169 
Targets,   181,  182,  183 


Team  work,  3 
Tent  pitching,  114 
Tents,   common,    wall,    pyra- 
midal,      and       conical 
wall,  to  strike,  118 

to  fold,   119 

pitch,  117 

to  strike,  118 
Thin    lines,    to    advance   by, 

89 
Time,  quick,  26 
To  the  rear,  march,  28 
Trail  arms,  35 
Trigger  squeeze,   174 
Turn,  right,  46 

on  the  fixed  pivot,  16 

on  the  moving  pivot,  16 

Unload,  to,  56 

Various  crimes,  2q3 
Venereal  diseases,   192 
Volley,  to  fire  by,  56 

War  offenses,  203 

Waste  or  unlawful  disposi- 
tion of  military  prop- 
erty, 205 

Will,  form  of,  278 

Wounded,  hints  for  treating, 
223 

Wounds  and  cuts,  216 


(2) 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 

University  of  California  Library 

or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
BIdg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 
2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 

(510)642-6753 
1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books 

to  NRLF 
Renewals    and    recharges    may    be    made    4    days 

prior  to  due  date 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


4 


N  0  3  1994 
iV  0  e  1938 


SENT  ON  ILL 


FF9  1  3  2003 


"  C.aeflKCLEY 


-^^-i^ou 


I 


00 


-n/ 


YB  0397- 


-kho 


